Mitsubishi Electric MELSEC FX3G Programming Manual Download Page 956

Page: 956 / 1000

954

/FX

3UC

Series Programmable Controllers

Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History

A-1 Programming Tool Applicability

Appendix A-1-4 Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series

Make sure to provide the following setting when monitoring circuits, monitoring device registration and
reading/writing programs in an FX

/FX

3UC

PLC using GX Developer Ver. 8.22Y or later and the

transparent function by way of the USB in the GOT1000 Series.
If the following setting is not provided, a communication error occurs.

Setting in GX Developer (Ver. 8.22Y or later)

1. Select [Online]

→

[Transfer setup...] to open "Transfer setup" dialog box.

2. Double-click [Serial] in [PC side I/F] to open "PC side I/F Serial setting" dialog box.

3. Select "USB (GOT Transparent mode)".

4. Click [OK] button to finish the setting.

GX Developer Ver.8.21X or former

GX Developer Ver8.22Y or later

When using transparent function by way of USB
in GOT1000 Series

Not supported (not available)

Setting shown below is required.

When using transparent function by way of RS-
232 in GOT1000 Series

Set "COM port" and "Transmission
speed" on "PC side I/F Serial
setting" dialog box.

Select "RS-232C" in setting shown
below, and set "COM port" and
"Transmission speed".

When directly connecting GX Developer to PLC
When directly connecting GX Developer to PLC
(standard built-in RS-422 port)

Select "USB (GOT transparent mode)"

Double-click it.

PLC

This example shows a window displayed
when GX Developer Ver. 8.72A is used.

/FX

3CU

PLC

Select "USB (GOT transparent mode)"

Double-click it.

This example shows a window displayed
when GX Developer Ver. 8.72A is used.

Summary of Contents for MELSEC FX3G

Page 1: ...ries Programmable Logic Controllers Programming Manual Basic Applied Instructions Edition FX3U FX3UC FX3G MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Art no 168591 16 07 2009 JY997D16601 Version F INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...ntroller It should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Manual No JY997D16601 Revision F Date 6 2009 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any...

Page 4: ...ed in purposes related to human life Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power electric power aerospace medicine or passenger movement vehicles consult with Mitsubishi Electric This product has been manufactured under strict quality control However when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails install appropriate backup or fa...

Page 5: ...N OFF and RUN STOP 36 2 6 3 Types of backup methods against power failure 41 2 6 4 Change between general devices and latched battery backed devices 42 2 6 5 How to initialize devices battery backed 42 2 7 Types and Setting of Parameters 43 2 7 1 Parameter list 43 2 7 2 Parameter initial values and available tools for changing parameter values 45 2 7 3 Memory capacity setting range 47 2 7 4 Compat...

Page 6: ...n use 121 4 8 High Speed Counter C FX3G PLCs 123 4 8 1 Types and device numbers of high speed counters 123 4 8 2 Input assignment for high speed counters 125 4 8 3 Handling of high speed counters 126 4 8 4 Current value update timing and comparison of current value 126 4 8 5 Related devices 126 4 8 6 Assignment of counter input terminal and switching of function 127 4 8 7 Response frequency of hig...

Page 7: ...uctions 167 5 7 3 Indexing example for instruction with limited number of use 169 6 What to Understand before Programming 171 6 1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions 171 6 2 Cautions on Creation of Fundamental Programs 174 6 2 1 Programming procedure and execution order 174 6 2 2 Double output double coil operation and countermeasures 175 6 2 3 Circuits which cannot be programmed and counterme...

Page 8: ... FNC 14 CML Complement 264 9 6 FNC 15 BMOV Block Move 266 9 6 1 Function of transfer between file registers and data registers 268 9 7 FNC 16 FMOV Fill Move 271 9 8 FNC 17 XCH Exchange 274 9 9 FNC 18 BCD Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal 276 9 10 FNC 19 BIN Conversion to Binary 279 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation FNC 20 to FNC 29 282 10 1 FNC 20 ADD Addition 283 10 2 FNC 21 SUB Subtraction 28...

Page 9: ... 53 HSCS High Speed Counter Set 365 13 4 1 Common cautions on using instructions for high speed counter 368 13 5 FNC 54 HSCR High Speed Counter Reset 371 13 6 FNC 55 HSZ High Speed Counter Zone Compare 374 13 6 1 Program in which comparison result is set to ON when power is turned ON ZCP FNC 11 instruction 378 13 6 2 Table high speed comparison mode M8130 380 13 6 3 Frequency control mode HSZ and ...

Page 10: ...Volume Read 488 16 7 FNC 86 VRSC Volume Scale 490 16 8 FNC 87 RS2 Serial Communication 2 492 16 9 FNC 88 PID PID Control Loop 495 17 Data Transfer 2 FNC100 to FNC109 499 17 1 FNC102 ZPUSH Batch Store of Index Register 500 17 2 FNC103 ZPOP Batch POP of Index Register 503 18 Floating Point FNC110 to FNC139 504 18 1 FNC110 ECMP Floating Point Compare 506 18 2 FNC111 EZCP Floating Point Zone Compare 5...

Page 11: ...20 2 FNC151 DVIT Interrupt Positioning 574 20 3 FNC152 TBL Batch Data Positioning Mode 576 20 4 FNC155 ABS Absolute Current Value Read 577 20 5 FNC156 ZRN Zero Return 578 20 6 FNC157 PLSV Variable Speed Pulse Output 580 20 7 FNC158 DRVI Drive to Increment 582 20 8 FNC159 DRVA Drive to Absolute 584 21 Real Time Clock Control FNC160 to FNC169 586 21 1 FNC160 TCMP RTC Data Compare 587 21 2 FNC161 TZC...

Page 12: ...NC205 LEFT Extracting Character String Data from the Left 660 26 7 FNC206 MIDR Random Selection of Character Strings 663 26 8 FNC207 MIDW Random Replacement of Character Strings 666 26 9 FNC208 INSTR Character string search 670 26 10 FNC209 MOV Character String Transfer 672 27 Data Operation 3 FNC210 to FNC219 675 27 1 FNC210 FDEL Deleting Data from Tables 676 27 2 FNC211 FINS Inserting Data to Ta...

Page 13: ...ite to ER 777 33 6 FNC295 INITER Initialize ER 783 34 FX3U CF ADP Applied Instructions FNC300 to FNC305 786 34 1 FNC 300 FLCRT File create check 787 34 1 1 Detailed explanation of setting data 788 34 2 FNC 301 FLDEL File delete CF card format 790 34 2 1 Detailed explanation of setting data 791 34 3 FNC 302 FLWR Data write 792 34 3 1 Detailed explanation of setting data 794 34 4 FNC 303 FLRD Data r...

Page 14: ...vices M8000 D8000 873 37 1 Special Device List M8000 D8000 873 37 1 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 873 37 1 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 890 37 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and D8000 909 37 2 1 RUN monitor and initial pulse M8000 to M8003 909 37 2 2 Watchdog timer D8000 910 37 2 3 Battery voltage low detection M8005 and M8006 911 37 2 4 Power failure detection time D80...

Page 15: ...pendix A 2 Peripheral product applicability except programming tools 956 Appendix A 2 1 Peripheral product applicability 956 Appendix A 3 Version Upgrade History 958 Appendix A 3 1 Manufacturer s serial number check method 958 Appendix A 3 2 Version check 959 Appendix A 3 3 Version upgrade history FX3G 959 Appendix A 3 4 Version upgrade history FX3U 959 Appendix A 3 5 Version upgrade history FX3UC...

Page 16: ...he FX3U Series User s Manual Hardware Edition For detailed explanation refer to the FX3U Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Additional Manual FX3U Series User s Manual Hardware Edition JY997D16501 Details about the hardware including I O specifications wiring installation and maintenance of the FX3U PLC main unit 09R516 FX3UC PLC main unit U Supplied with product FX3UC D DSS Series Hardware Man...

Page 17: ...ecial adapter For use refer to the FX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition U Supplied with product FX3U 232ADP MB Installation Manual JY997D26401 Handling procedures of the RS 232C communication special adapter For the MODBUS serial communication network refer to the FX3U Series User s Manual MODBUS Serial Communication Edition For computer link or non protocol communication by RS and R...

Page 18: ... product FX3U 64CCL Installation Manual JY997D29801 Handling procedures of the CC Link interface special function block For use refer to the FX3U 64CCL User s Manual Additional Manual FX3U 64CCL User s Manual JY997D30401 Handling procedures of the CC Link interface special function block 09R718 Supplied with product FX2N 32CCL User s Manual JY992D71801 Handling procedures of the CC Link remote dev...

Page 19: ...ontrol Edition Supplied with product FX2N 4AD User s Guide JY992D65201 Handling procedures of the 4 channel analog input special function block Supplied with product FX2NC 4AD User s Manual JY997D07801 Handling procedures of the 4 channel analog input special function block Supplied with product FX2N 8AD User s Manual JY992D86001 Handling procedures of the 8 channel analog input and thermocouple i...

Page 20: ...ures of the 4 channel analog output special function block Supplied with product FX2NC 4DA User s Manual JY997D07601 Handling procedures of the 4 channel analog output special function block Analog I O mixed When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each product is connected U Supplied with product FX3U 3A ADP User s Manual JY997D35601 H...

Page 21: ... 2 axis positioning special extension unit For use refer to the FX2N 10GM FX2N 20GM Hardware Programming Manual Additional Manual FX2N 10GM FX2N 20GM Hardware Programming Manual JY992D77801 Details on the 1 axis 2 axis positioning special extension unit 09R612 Programmable cam switch When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each product...

Page 22: ...structions Edition Battery maintenance option U Supplied with product FX3U 32BL Battery Hardware Manual JY997D14101 Battery life and handling procedures Display module U Supplied with product FX3G 5DM Installation Manual JY997D33801 Procedures for mounting and handling the display module U Supplied with product FX3U 7DM User s Manual JY997D17101 Procedures for mounting and handling the display mod...

Page 23: ... of special communication adapters The models shown below FX3U 232ADP MB and FX3U 485ADP MB CF card special adapter Generic name of CF card special adapters CF ADP FX3U CF ADP Special analog adapter Generic name of special analog adapters The models shown below FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP and FX3U 4AD TC ADP Connector conversion adapter G...

Page 24: ...V for FX3G FX3U series Memory cassette FX3G EEPROM 32L FX3U FLROM 16 FX3U FLROM 64 and FX3U FLROM 64L Battery FX3U 32BL Peripheral equipment Peripheral equipment Generic name of programming software handy programming panels and display units Programming tools Programming tool Generic name of programming software and handy programming panels Programming software Generic name of programming software...

Page 25: ...f sequence programs 2 Example of list display 2 Circuit programming In this method ladder formats are drawn on the graphic screen 1 Features In a circuit program a sequence circuit is drawn on the graphic screen by sequence formats and device numbers Because a sequence circuit is expressed with contact symbols and coil symbols the contents of a program can be understood easily In the circuit displ...

Page 26: ...tibility among programs All sequence programs created by the aforementioned three types are stored in the form of instruction words contents as at the time of list program in the program memory inside the PLC Programs created by these three types of input methods can be converted mutually and then displayed and edited as shown in the figure below Circuit SFC List ...

Page 27: ...unter compare HSCS FNC 53 HSCR FNC 54 and HSZ FNC 55 If the number of high speed counters is insufficient special extension equipment high speed counter blocks can be connected By extending hardware counters in the high speed counter block 2 high speed pulses at up to 50 kHz can be received except 1 and 4 edge count 2 Can only be connected to the FX3U FX3UC PLC FX2N C 1HC high speed counter block ...

Page 28: ...input terminal information of the PLC in the batch refresh method is input at one time by the input image memory before operation in the step 0 The output information is output at one time when END instruction is executed I O refresh instruction can get the latest input information and immediately output the operation result during sequence operation Related instruction Refresh REF FNC 50 2 Pulse ...

Page 29: ...s the device comment area where Katakana Kanji and alphanumeric characters are available can be secured in the program memory Refer to the manual of the used programming tool 6 Writing programs in the RUN mode Programs can be changed while the PLC is operating RUN mode By this function programs can be adjusted and changed efficiently without stopping the machine Refer to the manual of the used pro...

Page 30: ...to floating point FNC 49 FNC118 FNC119 and FNC129 Floating point arithmetic operations FNC120 to FNC123 Floating point square root ESQR FNC127 Refer to Chapter 10 Chapter 12 and Chapter 18 4 Rotation and shift operation Rotation right ROR FNC 30 Rotation left ROL FNC 31 Rotation right with carry RCR FNC 32 Rotation left with carry RCL FNC 33 Bit shift right SFTR FNC 34 Bit shift left SFTL FNC 35 W...

Page 31: ...r 33 8 Complicated control Search a data stack SER FNC 61 Sort tabulated data FNC 69 and FNC149 PID control loop PID FNC 88 Refer to Chapter 14 Chapter 16 and Chapter 19 9 Positioning control Dog search zero return DSZR FNC150 Interrupt positioning DVIT FNC151 Batch data positioning mode TBL FNC152 Absolute present value read ABS FNC155 Zero return ZRN FNC156 Variable speed pulse output PLSV FNC15...

Page 32: ...uded manual 4 AS i system A network system at the actuator or sensor level can be constructed with an FX3U FX3UC PLC working as the master station in the AS i system Refer to the included manual 5 Simple N N link Up to eight FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLCs are connected and data are automatically transferred among them Refer to the Data Communication Edition 6 Parallel link Two PLCs are connected and data ar...

Page 33: ...2 5 1 Relationship among devices Arrows show transfer of signals 4 1 2 3 Input terminal or input connector Input relay X Input relays function as receiving ports when the PLC receives signals from external input switches The assigned device mnemonic is X The PLC has built in input relays in accordance with its scale Auxiliary relay M There are many auxiliary relays inside the PLC The assigned devi...

Page 34: ...r it can be programmed as a general contact coil in the same way as an auxiliary relay State relays can be used as annunciators for external fault diagnosis 4 Timers T Refer to Section 4 5 A timer adds and counts clock pulses of 1 10 or 100 ms and its output contact turns ON or OFF when the counted result reaches a specified set value A timer can count from 0 001 to 3276 7 seconds depending on the...

Page 35: ...pe devices can be protected against power failure when the optional battery is connected In FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLCs the contents of extension registers R can be stored in extension file registers ER In FX3U FX3UC PLCs extension file registers ER can be used only while a memory cassette is mounted 8 Index registers V Z Refer to Section 4 11 Among registers there are index type registers V and Z used f...

Page 36: ...lue register C Index register V Z Contact image memory Input relay X Output relay Y Auxiliary relay M State relay S Timer contact and time counting coil Counter contact counting coil and reset coil Extension register R Data memory CPU System ROM Built in program memory RAM Not used Memory cassette Flash memory Parameter File register D Comment Sequence program Extension file register ER The PLC au...

Page 37: ...t value register C Index register V Z Contact image memory Input relay X Output relay Y Auxiliary relay M State relay S Timer contact and time counting coil Counter contact counting coil and reset coil Extension register R Data memory Transfer and initialization by instructions Extension file register ER Not attached CPU System ROM Built in program memory EEPROM Not used EEPROM Parameter File regi...

Page 38: ...STOP Parameter Does not change 1 Sequence program Does not change 1 Comment Can be secured by parameter setting Does not change 1 File register Does not change 1 Item Power OFF Power OFF ON STOP RUN RUN STOP Data register D General type Cleared Does not change Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON latched battery backed type Does not change 2 File type Does not change 1 Special type Cleared Se...

Page 39: ...30 minutes or more The clock data is backed up by the battery when the optional battery is installed and the battery mode is selected in the parameter setting Item Power OFF Power OFF ON STOP RUN RUN STOP Data register D General type Cleared 1 Does not change Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON latched battery backed type Does not change File type Does not change Special type Cleared Set to ...

Page 40: ...ange while M8033 is ON latched battery backed type auxiliary relay M Does not change Special type auxiliary relay M Cleared Set to initial values 1 Does not change 1 General type state relay S Does not change latched battery backed type state relay S Does not change Annunciator S Does not change Timer contact Time counting coil T For 100 ms Cleared Does not change Cleared Does not change while M80...

Page 41: ...ge Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON General type auxiliary relay M Cleared 1 Does not change Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON latched battery backed type auxiliary relay M Does not change Special type auxiliary relay M Cleared Set to initial values 2 Does not change 2 General type state relay S Cleared 1 Does not change latched battery backed type state relay S Does not change An...

Page 42: ... backed up correctly when the battery voltage becomes low due to expiration of the battery life or another reason In such a case clear latched battery backed type devices transfer programs again when a memory cassette is not attached and then set initial values and clock data if necessary For a rough guide to the life and replacement of the battery refer to the respective PLC User s Manual Hardwar...

Page 43: ...ecessary to back up sequence programs by the battery Item Description Latched battery backed contents The optional battery backs up the RAM memory built in the PLC and clock data Maintenance The battery life is around 5 years when the ambient temperature is 25 C For replacement information refer to the Users Manual Hardware Edition of each PLC Cautions When the optional battery voltage becomes low...

Page 44: ... major methods 1 M8032 latch memory all clear When M8032 is turned ON all latched type devices 1 including reset coils of timers and counters are cleared M8032 can be turned ON and OFF using the forced ON OFF operation from peripheral equipment or within the sequence program Note that latched type devices cannot be turned ON while M8032 is ON When turning ON M8032 within the sequence program note ...

Page 45: ...corporates data registers into the program memory 1 A sequence program and control data such as machining set values can be handled together which is convenient 2 Up to 500 file registers can be created when one block is specified but the program memory capacity is reduced because file registers require 500 steps in the memory capacity Other special setting capacity 1 This parameter sets whether o...

Page 46: ...C is used for RUN input RUN terminal input number This parameter specifies the input number of the RUN input described above X000 to X017 X000 to X007 in FX3U 16M FX3UC 16M and 14 point type FX3G PLCs X000 to X014 in 24 point type FX3G PLCs PLC system setting 2 Serial communication Serial port operation setting This parameter corresponds to the following settings by specifying each contents on the...

Page 47: ...MT LT 2 and can be set using GX Developer Ver 8 68W or later Item GX Developer Initial value Setting range Programming tool Display unit FX 30P FX 10P E 1 FX 20P E 1 FX PCS WIN E 1 GOT 1000 GOT F900 Series 2 ET 940 Series 3 Memory capacity steps Program capacity 16000 4 Refer to Subsection 2 7 3 8000 2000 8000 16000 8000 Katakana character comment capacity 0 0 0 0 File register capacity 0 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 48: ...E 1 FX 20P E 1 FX PCS WIN E 1 GOT 1000 GOT F900 Series 1 2 ET 940 Series 1 3 Memory capacity steps Program capacity 8000 Refer to Subsection 2 7 3 8000 2000 8000 8000 8000 Katakana character comment capacity 0 0 0 0 File register capacity 0 0 0 0 0 0 Positioning setting Not used Latch range battery backed Auxiliary relay M State relay S Counter C 16 bits Counter C 32 bits Data register D Program t...

Page 49: ...r later in FX3G PLCs 3 This item is supported only in the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 and can be set using GX Developer Ver 8 68W or later Caution After changing the memory capacity setting make sure to write both the programs and parameters to the PLC If only the parameters are written to the PLC program errors such as parameter error circuit error and grammar error may occur in the PLC FX3G PLCs operate in ...

Page 50: ...teps Memory type Allowable number of times of writing Remarks FX3G EEPROM 32L 32000 EEPROM memory 10000 times Write protect switch and loader function are provided Model name Maximum number of steps Memory type Allowable number of times of writing Remarks FX3U FLROM 64 64000 Flash memory 10000 times Write protect switch is provided FX3U FLROM 16 1 16000 Flash memory 10000 times Write protect switc...

Page 51: ...s in Japanese are available for the ET 940 Series 4 GT Designer2 Ver 2 85P or later supports the customer keyword The security provided by the entry code second entry code and customer keyword is limited and is not always perfect Registered entry code Entered entry code Change Cancel Disable Outline Permanent PLC lock The permanent PLC lock cannot be changed canceled or reset Entry code Entry code...

Page 52: ...he following operations in accordance with the selected registration condition It is not possible to cancel the entry code using the customer keyword When both the entry code and second entry code are set The programming tool performs the following operations in accordance with the selected registration condition When only the entry code is set 1 When using handy programming panel FX 10P E FX 20P ...

Page 53: ...0 or later Caution on registering the entry code The entry codes are provided to restrict access from peripheral equipment to programs created by the users Keep the entry codes carefully If a registered entry codes is forgotten the online operations from a programming tool to the PLC are disabled depending on the programming tool type and the contents of the registered entry code Set item Contents...

Page 54: ...ramming Manual Basic Applied Instruction Edition 2 Overview Sequence Program 2 7 Types and Setting of Parameters 4 Click Execution button to open Keyword confirmation dialog box 5 Input the entry codes again 6 Click OK to register the entry codes to the PLC ...

Page 55: ...istered in the PLC When the entry code inputs are verified the PLC executes Read from PC or Write to PC When the entry code inputs are not verified the PLC does not execute Read from PC or Write to PC Canceling the entry codes This section explains the operating procedure of GX Developer Ver 8 23Z For the entry code canceling deletion procedure in FX 10P E FX 20P E FX 30P and FX PCS WIN E refer to...

Page 56: ... PCS WIN E refer to the manual of each product 1 Select Online Keyword setup Disable to open Keyword Disable dialog box 2 Input the keyword 2nd keyword or customer keyword currently registered in the PLC 1 The second entry can be set in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 20 or later 2 The customer keyword can be set only in FX3G PLCs 3 Click Execution button to reset the entry codes or valida...

Page 57: ...positioning setting available in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 20 or later a table and constants for added TBL FNC152 instruction can be set Make sure to set this parameter when using TBL FNC152 instruction The positioning setting for TBL FNC152 instruction uses 9000 steps 18 blocks in the memory capacity For details on TBL FNC152 instruction refer to the Positioning Control Manual 2 7 8...

Page 58: ...ents of setting Setting range Memory capacity Set the program memory capacity Initial value 16000 1 Refer to Subsection 2 7 3 Comments capacity Set the capacity of comments to be stored in the PLC Initial value 0 50 device comments block 500 steps File register capacity Set the file register capacity Initial value 0 500 file registers block 500 steps Program capacity The number of steps available ...

Page 59: ...attery backed auxiliary relay range Initial value 500 to 1023 0 to 1023 State Set the latched battery backed state relay range Initial value 500 to 999 0 to 999 Timer The setting displayed here cannot be changed Counter 16bit Set the latched battery backed 16 bit counter range Initial value 100 to 199 0 to 199 Counter 32bit Set the latched battery backed 32 bit counter range Initial value 220 to 2...

Page 60: ... system configuration those inputs and outputs are checked in programming by GX Developer FX3U FX3UC 0 to 377 FX3G 0 to 177 Output relay FX3U FX3UC 0 to 377 FX3G 0 to 177 Special Unit 1 It is necessary to set the memory capacity Unit No This is the unit number of each special function block unit Unit Name Set the name of each special function block unit whose initial values are to be set 32 half w...

Page 61: ...signment tab are displayed 32 half width characters or 16 full width characters No This column indicates the order of initial value setting in the selected unit number Numbers 1 to 98 can be set Address Set the buffer memory address BFM number in a decimal value whose initial value is to be set 1 Comment This column is displayed when device comments are registered On the above screen Input mode of...

Page 62: ...transmission rates 2 5Mbps 625kbps 156kbps Point Mode Select one of the following supported point modes 16 point mode 4 point mode No This item indicates the station number of the built in CC Link LT module Station numbers 1 to 64 are available Station type Select one of the following station type Remote I O station Input Remote I O station Output Remote I O station Input Output Remote device stat...

Page 63: ... Introduction 2 Overview 3 Instruction List 4 Devices in Detail 5 Specified the Device Constant 6 Before Programming 7 Basic Instruction 8 FNC00 FNC09 Program Flow 9 FNC10 FNC19 Move Compare 10 FNC20 FNC29 Arith Logic Operation 6 Setting the PLC system 1 Click on the PLC system 1 tab to setup Battery less mode MODEM initialized and RUN ter minal input 1 FX3U FX3UC PLC ...

Page 64: ...et item Contents of setting Setting range Battery less mode 1 Select this to operate the PLC without using the battery When a check mark is put here the battery error indicator lamp is automatically turned off and devices in the latched battery backed area are automatically cleared Battery mode 2 Select this item to operate the PLC with the battery MODEM initialized Set this item to automatically ...

Page 65: ...ial port do not put a check mark to Operate communication setting Set item Contents of setting Setting range Channel selection Select a channel in which a serial port is set CH1 CH2 Operate communication setting Put a check mark when using the selected serial port in computer link no protocol communication or inverter communication Do not put a check mark when transferring and monitoring sequence ...

Page 66: ... The positioning setting function is available in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 20 or later 1 Click Positioning tab Positioning tab is displayed when a check mark is put to Positioning on Memory capacity tab 2 Set the positioning constants in TBL FNC152 instruction For TBL FNC152 instruction refer to the Positioning Control Manual This example shows a window in an FX3U FX3UC PLC ...

Page 67: ...h output number of pulse Initial value 100 000 1 Creep speed Hz Set the creep speed in DSZR FNC150 instruction for each output number of pulse Initial value 1000 10 to 32767 2 Zero return speed Hz Set the zero point return speed in DSZR FNC150 instruction for each output number of pulse Initial value 50000 1 Acceleration time ms Set the acceleration time for each output number of pulse Initial val...

Page 68: ...3G are occupied starting from the head device number set here without regard to the number of axes Initial setting R0 Refer to the Positioning Control Manual FX3U FX3UC D0 to D6400 R0 to R31168 FX3G D0 to D6400 R0 to R22800 No This column shows the table number Numbers 1 to 100 can be set Positioning Instruction Select the positioning type among the following DDVIT Interrupt positioning instructio...

Page 69: ...etting is changed in step 7 PLC system 2 restore the PLC power Caution After changing the memory capacity setting make sure to write both the programs and parameters to the PLC If only the parameters are written to the PLC program errors such as parameter error circuit error and grammar error may occur in the PLC Positioning table settings will not be initialized when the PLC is powered on A check...

Page 70: ...P Load Pulse Initial logical operation of Rising edge pulse X Y M S D b T C Section 7 5 LDF Load Falling Pulse Initial logical operation of Falling trailing edge pulse X Y M S D b T C Section 7 5 AND AND Serial connection of NO normally open contacts X Y M S D b T C Section 7 3 ANI AND Inverse Serial connection of NC normally closed contacts X Y M S D b T C Section 7 3 ANDP AND Pulse Serial connec...

Page 71: ... PLC operations Section 7 10 MEP MEP Conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse Section 7 11 MEF MEF Conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse Section 7 11 Out Instruction OUT OUT Final logical operation type coil drive Y M S D b T C Section 7 2 SET SET SET Bit device latch ON Y M S D b Section 7 13 RST Reset RESET Bit device OFF Y M S D b T C D R V Z Section 7 13 PLS Pulse R...

Page 72: ...struction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver 1 30 or later 7 The instruction is provided in the FX3U FX3UC Series Ver 2 61 or 4 The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver 2 20 or later later FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function FX 3U FX 3UC FX 3G Applicable PLC Reference FX 1S FX 1N FX 2N FX 1NC FX 2NC Program Flow 00 CJ Conditional Jump 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 8 1 01 CALL Call Subroutine 3 3 3 3...

Page 73: ...MUL Multiplication 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 10 3 23 DIV Division 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 10 4 24 INC Increment 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 10 5 25 DEC Decrement 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 10 6 26 WAND Logical Word AND 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 10 7 27 WOR Logical Word OR 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 10 8 28 WXOR Logical Exclusive OR 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 10 9 29 NEG Negation 3 3 3 3 Section 10 10 1 The instruc...

Page 74: ...3 3 3 3 3 Section 12 3 43 SUM Sum of Active Bits 3 3 3 3 3 Section 12 4 44 BON Check Specified Bit Status 3 3 3 3 3 Section 12 5 45 MEAN Mean 3 3 3 3 3 Section 12 6 46 ANS Timed Annunciator Set 3 3 3 3 3 Section 12 7 47 ANR Annunciator Reset 3 3 3 3 3 Section 12 8 48 SQR Square Root 3 3 3 3 Section 12 9 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC Series Ver 3 00 or later 5 The instruction is p...

Page 75: ...ction 13 10 Handy Instruction 60 IST Initial State 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 14 1 61 SER Search a Data Stack 3 3 3 3 3 Section 14 2 62 ABSD Absolute Drum Sequencer 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 14 3 63 INCD Incremental Drum Sequencer 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 14 4 64 TTMR Teaching Timer 3 3 3 3 Section 14 5 65 STMR Special Timer 3 3 3 3 Section 14 6 66 ALT Alternate State 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 14 7 67 RAM...

Page 76: ...3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 16 1 81 PRUN Parallel Run Octal Mode 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 16 2 82 ASCI Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 16 3 83 HEX ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 16 4 84 CCD Check Code 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 16 5 85 VRRD Volume Read 6 3 3 3 3 3 Section 16 6 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC Series Ver 3 00 or later 5 The inst...

Page 77: ...to Character String Conversion 3 3 Section 18 4 117 EVAL Character String to Floating Point Conversion 3 3 Section 18 5 118 EBCD Floating Point to Scientific Notation Conversion 3 3 3 3 Section 18 6 119 EBIN Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion 3 3 3 3 Section 18 7 120 EADD Floating Point Addition 3 3 6 3 3 Section 18 8 121 ESUB Floating Point Subtraction 3 3 6 3 3 Section 18 9 1 The i...

Page 78: ...int Arc Cosine 3 3 Section 18 22 135 ATAN Floating Point Arc Tangent 3 3 Section 18 23 136 RAD Floating Point Degrees to Radians Conversion 3 3 Section 18 24 137 DEG Floating Point Radians to Degrees Conversion 3 3 Section 18 25 138 139 Data Operation 2 140 WSUM Sum of Word Data 3 5 Section 19 1 141 WTOB WORD to BYTE 3 5 Section 19 2 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC Series Ver 3 00 ...

Page 79: ...ariable Speed Pulse Output 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 20 6 158 DRVI Drive to Increment 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 20 7 159 DRVA Drive to Absolute 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 20 8 Real Time Clock Control 160 TCMP RTC Data Compare 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 21 1 161 TZCP RTC Data Zone Compare 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 21 2 162 TADD RTC Data Addition 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 21 3 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC ...

Page 80: ...og Block 3 3 3 1 3 1 Section 22 4 178 179 Extension Function 180 EXTR External ROM Function FX2N FX2NC 1 1 Others 181 182 COMRD Read Device Comment Data 3 5 Section 24 1 183 184 RND Random Number Generation 3 3 Section 24 2 185 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC Series Ver 3 00 or later 5 The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver 2 20 or later 2 The function is changed in th...

Page 81: ...STR BIN to Character String Conversion 3 5 Section 26 1 201 VAL Character String to BIN Conversion 3 5 Section 26 2 202 Link Character Strings 3 3 Section 26 3 203 LEN Character String Length Detection 3 3 Section 26 4 204 RIGHT Extracting Character String Data from the Right 3 3 Section 26 5 205 LEFT Extracting Character String Data from the Left 3 3 Section 26 6 1 The instruction is provided in ...

Page 82: ...pare 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 28 1 226 LD Load Compare 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 28 1 227 228 LD Load Compare 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 28 1 229 LD Load Compare 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 28 1 230 LD Load Compare 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 28 1 231 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC Series Ver 3 00 or later 5 The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver 2 20 or later 2 The function is cha...

Page 83: ... 3 3 3 3 Section 28 3 242 OR OR Compare 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 28 3 243 244 OR OR Compare 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 28 3 245 OR OR Compare 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 28 3 246 OR OR Compare 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 28 3 247 to 249 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC Series Ver 3 00 or later 5 The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver 2 20 or later 2 The function is changed in the F...

Page 84: ...eter Block Write 3 3 Section 30 5 275 to 277 Data Transfer 3 278 RBFM Divided BFM Read 3 5 Section 31 1 279 WBFM Divided BFM Write 3 5 Section 31 2 High Speed Processing 2 280 HSCT High Speed Counter Compare With Data Table 3 3 Section 32 1 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC Series Ver 3 00 or later 5 The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver 2 20 or later 2 The function is ...

Page 85: ...tion 34 1 301 FLDEL File delete CF card format 7 7 Section 34 2 302 FLWR Data write 7 7 Section 34 3 303 FLRD Data read 7 7 Section 34 4 304 FLCMD FX3U CF ADP command 7 7 Section 34 5 305 FLSTRD FX3U CF ADP status read 7 7 Section 34 6 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC Series Ver 3 00 or later 5 The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver 2 20 or later 2 The function is chang...

Page 86: ...M0 to M499 500 points The setting can be changed between the latched battery backed type and the non latched type using parameters Section 4 3 Latched battery backed type variable M500 to M1023 524 points Latched battery backed type fixed M1024 to M7679 6656 points Special type 2 M8000 to M8511 512 points Chapter 37 State relay Initial state general type variable S0 to S9 10 points The setting can...

Page 87: ...ints 10 kHz 2 points 2 phases 50 kHz 1 edge count 50 kHz 4 edge count Software counter 1 phase 40 kHz 2 phases 40 kHz 1 edge count 10 kHz 4 edge count Section 4 7 1 phase 2 counting input Bi directional 32 bits C246 to C250 2 phase 2 counting input Bi directional 32 bits C251 to C255 Data register 32 bits when used in pair form General type 16 bits variable D0 to D199 200 points The setting can be...

Page 88: ...n and the exponent expression are available Character string Character string Specify characters by quotation marks In a constant of an instruction up to 32 half width characters are available 1 Available device numbers vary depending on the PLC For details refer to Section 4 2 2 For supported functions refer to Chapter 37 For handling of the latched battery backed area refer to Section 2 6 3 When...

Page 89: ...to S999 100 points General type 1 S1000 to S4095 3096 points Timer on delay timer 100 ms T0 to T191 192 points 0 1 to 3 276 7 sec Section 4 5 100 ms for subroutine or interrupt routine T192 to T199 8 points 0 1 to 3 276 7sec 10 ms T200 to T245 46 points 0 01 to 327 67 sec Retentive type for 1 ms EEPROM keep T246 to T249 4 points 0 001 to 32 767 sec Retentive type for 100 ms EEPROM keep T250 to T25...

Page 90: ...pe 16 bits 2 D8000 to D8511 512 points Chapter 37 Index type 16 bits V0 to V7 Z0 to Z7 16 points Section 4 11 Extension register Extension file register Extension register 16 bits 1 R0 to R23999 24000 points Section 4 10 Extension file register 16 bits EEPROM keep ER0 to ER23999 24000 points Pointer For jump and branch call P0 to P2047 2048 points For CJ and CALL instructions Section 4 12 Input in...

Page 91: ...000 to X017 16 points X000 to X037 32 points X000 to X057 48 points X000 to X367 248 points Output Y000 to Y007 8 points Y000 to Y017 16 points Y000 to Y037 32 points Y000 to Y057 48 points Y000 to Y367 248 points FX3UC 32MT LT 2 PLC Model name FX3UC 32MT LT 2 When extended 256 points in total Input X000 to X017 16 points X000 to X357 240 points Output Y000 to Y017 16 points Y000 to Y357 240 point...

Page 92: ...ontacts and NC contacts These contacts can be arbitrarily used inside the PLC Differences in operations between external output contacts output devices and internal contacts are explained on the next page The PLC receives signals from external switches through input terminals An input relay X connected to an input terminal inside the PLC is an electronic relay isolated optically and has many NO co...

Page 93: ... if inputs change while the program is executed the contents of the input image memory remain unchanged but the changes in inputs are read during the input processing in the next cycle Even if an input contact changes from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON its ON OFF status is judged after the response delay approximately 10 ms caused by the input filter When the input filter is a digital type input ter...

Page 94: ...ed area by setting the parameters 3 The characteristics of latch battery backup cannot be changed in the parameters 4 These registers can be changed to the latched battery backed type by the parameter setting when the optional battery is used However the latched range cannot be set When simple N N link or parallel link is used some auxiliary relays are occupied for the link Refer to the Data Commu...

Page 95: ...turns ON and M600 turns ON in this circuit M600 holds its operation by itself even if X000 is opened Because M600 is a latched battery backed type device it remains activated when the operation is restarted even after X000 has turned OFF due to power failure If an NC contact of X001 is opened when the operation is restarted however M600 is deactivated The figure on the left shows a circuit using t...

Page 96: ...atched battery backed area by setting the parameters 2 This area is latched battery backed It can be changed to a non latched non battery backed area by setting the parameters 3 The characteristics of latch battery backup cannot be changed in the parameters 4 These registers can be changed to the latched battery backed type by the parameter setting when the optional battery is used However the lat...

Page 97: ...many NO contacts and NC contacts in the same way as auxiliary relays and such contacts can be used arbitrarily in sequence programs When state relays S are not used for step ladder instructions they can be used in general sequences in the same way as auxiliary relays M as shown in the figure on the right 2 Latched battery backed type Latched battery backed type state relays store their ON OFF stat...

Page 98: ...programmed as a processes flow in SFC diagrams M8000 RUN monitor M8049 Y000 X000 FNC 46 ANS T 0 K 10 S900 X002 FNC 46 ANS T 1 K 20 S901 X003 X004 FNC 46 ANS T 2 K100 S902 M8048 Y010 X005 FNC 47 ANRP X001 When the special auxiliary relay M8049 is driven monitoring becomes valid If the forward end detection input X000 is not activated within 1 second after the forward output Y000 is driven S900 is a...

Page 99: ... values 1 In FX3U FX3UC PLCs retentive type timers are backed up by the battery 2 In FX3G PLCs retentive type timers are backed up by the EEPROM memory For 100 ms pulses 0 1 to 3276 7 sec For 10 ms pulses 0 01 to 327 67 sec Retentive type for 1 ms pulses 1 0 001 to 32 767 sec Retentive type for 100 ms pulses 1 0 1 to 3276 7 sec For 1 ms pulses 0 001 to 32 767 sec T 0 to T199 200 points Routine pro...

Page 100: ...seconds When the reset input X002 turns ON the timer is reset and the output contact is returned 3 Potentiometer type 1 When variable analog potentiometers built in the FX3G main unit are used Values of variable analog potentiometers built in FX3G PLCs as standard are stored as numeric data in the range from 0 to 255 in the following special registers in accordance with the scale position An obtai...

Page 101: ...ectly specified value of the defined data register previously set by a digital switch Note that the set value of a latched battery backed type register is not held correctly sometimes when the battery voltage becomes low 4 5 4 Cautions on routines 1 Use timers T192 to T199 in subroutines and interrupt routines These timers execute counting when a coil instruction or END instruction is executed Whe...

Page 102: ... 1 ms as an interrupt processing after a coil instruction has been executed 4 5 6 Program examples off delay timer and flicker timer Off delay timer Flicker timer blink In addition the flicker operation can be performed by the ALT FNC 66 instruction Multi timer by the applied instruction STMR FNC 65 FX3U FX3UC PLC By this instruction off delay timers one shot timers and flicker timers can be easil...

Page 103: ...y the teaching timer instruction TTMR FNC 64 X000 FNC 65 STMR T 10 K100 M0 S m D X000 M0 M1 M3 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec M2 A value specified by m becomes the set value of the timer specified by 10 second in this example S M0 is an off delay timer M1 is a one shot timer after ON OFF operation M2 and M3 are provided for a flicker timer and connected as shown in the program example for flic...

Page 104: ...t 2 32 bit 2 Use examples in applied instructions For the full use of timers as numeric devices refer to the explanation of applied instructions later 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 b15 Sign 0 Positive number 1 Negative number 1 b0 High order Low order 16 bits Available numeric value range 16 bit 0 to 32 767 32 bit 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 ...

Page 105: ...g range etc 16 bit up counter Counting range 0 to 32767 32 bit bi directional counter Counting range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 General type Latched battery backed type protected by battery against power failure General type Latched battery backed type protected by battery against power failure C0 to C99 100 points 1 C100 to C199 100 points 2 C200 to C219 20 points 1 C220 to C234 15 points 2 1...

Page 106: ... the output contact returns The counter set value can be set by a constant K as shown above or indirectly specified by a data register number For example when D10 is specified and the contents of D10 are 123 it is equivalent to K123 If data beyond the set value is written to the current value register by MOV instruction etc the OUT coil turns ON and the current value register becomes the set value...

Page 107: ...6 the output contact is reset The current value increases or decreases regardless of the operation of the output contact When a counter executes up counting from 2 147 483 647 the counter value becomes 2 147 483 648 In the same way when a counter executes down counting from 2 147 483 648 the counter value becomes 2 147 483 647 This type of counter is called ring counter When the reset input X013 t...

Page 108: ...ing as an interrupt processing for specific input and can execute counting at 5 k to 6 kHz regardless of the cycle time For high speed counters refer to Section 4 7 X003 C 0 K100 Constant decimal constant 1 to 32767 100 counts X001 FNC 12 MOV K100 D 5 X003 C 0 D 5 D5 100 100 counts Counts to the indirectly specified value of the defined data register previously set by a digital switch Note that th...

Page 109: ... 2048 4096 8192 16384 b15 Sign 0 Positive number 1 Negative number 1 b0 High order Low order 16 bits Available numeric value range 16 bit counter 0 to 32767 32 bit counter 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 1 The sign is valid only when a counter is handled as a substitute for data register 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 b31 Sign 0 Positive numbe...

Page 110: ...to high speed counter inputs General purpose inputs X000 to X007 are used for high speed counter inputs An encoder 1 adopting the output method shown in the table below can be connected depending on the connected terminal Encoders adopting the voltage output method and absolute encoders cannot be connected to high speed counter inputs For the wiring refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit 1...

Page 111: ...combining a special auxiliary relay M8388 M8198 or M8199 For the method to use a 2 phase 2 input 4 edge count counter refer to Subsection 4 7 8 5 The external reset input is usually reset by turning ON but can be changed to be reset by turning OFF by combining special auxiliary relays M8388 and M8389 For the method to change the logic of the external reset input refer to Subsection 4 7 6 6 The cou...

Page 112: ...ces For some high speed counters in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs the assignment of input terminals will switch when special auxiliary relays are used Such high speed counter devices are classified below Note that description as OP is not available in programming Standard Device Numbers Switched Device Numbers Standard Device Numbers Switched Device Numbers C244 C244 OP C248 C248 OP C245 C245 OP C253 C253 O...

Page 113: ...al start input 1 Cautions on wiring should be considered for these high speed counters For the wiring refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit 2 Hardware counters are switched to software counters when a comparison set reset instruction for high speed counter DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ or DHSCT is used The counter C253 is switched to a software counter when the logic of the external reset input signal...

Page 114: ...on is executed C235 is reset The counting direction of the counters C235 to C245 is switched to down count or up count when M8235 to M8245 turns ON or OFF C244 immediately starts counting when the input X006 turns ON while X012 is ON The counting input is X000 In this example the set value is indirectly specified by the contents of data registers D1 and D0 A high speed counter can be reset using X...

Page 115: ...ting While X012 is ON C249 immediately starts counting when the input X006 turns ON The up count input is X000 and the down count input is X001 A high speed counter can be reset by X011 in a sequence as shown in the figure but C249 is immediately reset without any program when X002 is closed So a program with X011 is not necessary The up down count operation of C246 to C250 can be checked with M82...

Page 116: ... in the main program if the HCMOV instruction is used just before the comparison instruction CMP or ZCP or comparison contact instruction 1 If it is necessary to execute comparison to update an output contact with the high speed counter s changing value use comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS HSCR HSZ or HSCT 2 Using comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS HSCR HSZ or...

Page 117: ...ounting Down counting C247 M8247 C248 M8248 C249 M8249 C250 M8250 2 phase 2 counting input C251 M8251 C252 M8252 C253 M8253 C254 M8254 C255 M8255 Device No Name Description M8388 Contact for changing function of high speed counter Changes the function of high speed counter M8389 Function switching device Switches the logic of the external reset input For details refer to Subsection 4 7 6 M8390 Swi...

Page 118: ...en combined with the following special auxiliary relays In a program put a special auxiliary relay just before a target counter Counter No When inverting logic of external reset input signal Description C241 to C245 C247 to C250 C252 to C255 The logic of the external reset input is inverted so that the counters are reset when the input turns OFF The logic is inverted for all target counters Counte...

Page 119: ...o C255 with 4 edge counting For the 2 phase 2 count input counters C251 to C255 the edge count is usually set to 1 By using the programs shown in the table below the edge count may be set to 4 Counter No When using 2 phase 2 count input counters with 4 edge counting Description C251 1 edge count before change 4 edge count after change C252 C253 C253 OP C254 C255 M8000 M8198 C251 K A phase B phase ...

Page 120: ...cy However when hardware counters are handled as software counters with the following conditions their maximum response frequency and total frequency are limited in the same way as the software counters Use M8380 to M8387 to check whether high speed counters are handled as hardware counters or software counters When DHSCS FNC 53 DHSCR FNC 54 DHSZ FNC 55 or DHSCT FNC280 instruction is used for a ha...

Page 121: ...refer to the previous page 1 When special analog adapters and FX3U FX3UC Series special function blocks units are not used 1 When an index register is added to a counter number specified by a HSCS HSCR HSZ or HSCT instruction all hardware counters are switched to software counters 2 The high speed counters C244 OP and C245 OP can count up to 10 kHz Counter type Counter No Maximum response frequenc...

Page 122: ...n 1 When HSZ and HSCT instructions are not used When only HSCT instruction is used When only HSZ instruction is used When both HSZ and HSCT instructions are used Maximum response frequency kHz Total frequency kHz Maximum response frequency kHz Total frequency kHz Maximum response frequency kHz Total frequency kHz Maximum response frequency kHz Total frequency kHz 1 phase 1 counting input C241 C242...

Page 123: ...nterrupt pointers I00 and I10 pulse catch contacts M8170 and M8171 and SPD instruction using X000 and or X001 cannot be used When a counting pulse is not provided none of the high speed counter output contacts will turn ON even if the PLC executes an instruction where present value set value Counting may be started or stopped for a high speed counter when the output coil OUT C is set to ON or OFF ...

Page 124: ... When the driving contact is the continuous execution type the current value of the counter is reset to 0 and the counter reset status is cleared at each scan while X010 remains ON 2 Timing chart X010 FNC 12 DMOV K0 C235 The current value of C235 is cleared to 0 X000 Current value of C235 1 2 3 Because X010 turns ON FNC12 DMOV is executed The current value of C235 is reset to 0 X010 1 2 3 Because ...

Page 125: ...als waveforms of high speed counters 4 Cautions on counterpart equipment connected to high speed counter inputs General purpose inputs X000 to X007 are used for high speed counter inputs An encoder 1 adopting the output method shown in the table below can be connected depending on the connected terminal Encoders adopting the voltage output method and absolute encoders cannot be connected to high s...

Page 126: ...on of high speed counter devices In some high speed counters in FX3G PLCs the input terminal assignment is changed over when used together with special auxiliary relays Such high speed counter devices are classified below Note that description as OP is not available in programming Classification Counter No Data length External reset input terminal External start input terminal 1 phase 1 count inpu...

Page 127: ...rdware Edition of the main unit U Up counting input D Down counting input A A phase input B B phase input R External reset input S External start input Restriction to overlap input numbers Inputs X000 to X007 are used for high speed counters input interrupt pulse catch SPD ZRN DSZR instructions and general purpose inputs When assigning functions there should be no overlap between those input termi...

Page 128: ...uctions are processed in the operation cycle of the PLC and operation delay is generated before the comparison output result is obtained If it is necessary to execute comparison to update an output contact with the high speed counter s changing value use comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS HSCR and HSZ 2 Using comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS HSCR or HSZ The co...

Page 129: ...ut a special auxiliary relay just before a target counter Type Counter No Monitoring device OFF ON 1 phase 2 counting input C246 M8246 Up counting Down counting C247 M8247 C248 M8248 C249 M8249 C250 M8250 2 phase 2 counting input C251 M8251 C252 M8252 C253 M8253 C254 M8254 C255 M8255 Device No Name Description M8388 Contact for changing function of high speed counter Changes the function of high s...

Page 130: ...ns related to positioning DRVI instruction Y000 and DRVA instruction Y001 are used Overall frequency 200 kHz 2 axes x 40 kHz 120 kHz Example2 When HSCS HSCR or HSZ instruction is not used and instructions related to positioning DRVI instruction Y000 are used Number of pulse width pulse period measurement inputs X003 Overall frequency 200 kHz 1 axes 1 input x 40 kHz 120 kHz Counter type Response fr...

Page 131: ...ontacts M8170 and M8171 SPD instruction using X000 and or X001 and pulse width pulse period measurement contacts M8076 and M8077 cannot be used When a counting pulse is not provided none of the high speed counter output contacts will turn ON even if the PLC executes an instruction where present value set value Counting may be started or stopped for a high speed counter when the output coil OUT C i...

Page 132: ...en the driving contact is the continuous execution type the current value of the counter is reset to 0 and the counter reset status is cleared at each scan while X010 remains ON 2 Timing chart X010 FNC 12 DMOV K0 C235 The current value of C235 is cleared to 0 X000 Current value of C235 1 2 3 Because X010 turns ON FNC12 DMOV is executed The current value of C235 is reset to 0 X010 1 2 3 Because the...

Page 133: ...acked It can be changed to the latched battery backed area by setting parameters 2 This area is latched battery backed It can be changed to the non latched non battery backed area by setting parameters 3 The latch battery backup characteristics cannot be changed using parameters 4 Data registers D1000 and later can be used as file registers in units of 500 points by setting parameters 5 These regi...

Page 134: ...sters can store a numeric value within the range from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 In the case of 32 bit type when a data register or file register on the low order side example D0 is specified the subsequent number on the high order side example D1 is automatically occupied Either an odd or even device number can be specified for the low order side but it is recommended to specify an even devic...

Page 135: ...e battery built into the PLC In FX3G PLCs the contents of data registers are backed up by the EEPROM built into the PLC When the optional battery is installed the battery backs up the contents of some general type data registers against power failure The contents of data registers are backed up by the battery built in the PLC For details on each backup method refer to Section 2 6 When using fixed ...

Page 136: ...ing 16 bit or 32 bit numeric values data registers As in the case of data registers when 16 bit timers or counters are used as 32 bit devices two timers or two counters example C1 and C0 store 32 bit numeric data One 32 bit counter example C200 can store 32 bit numeric data T 2 D 0 C 10 D 20 A counter or timer operates while regarding the contents of a specified data register as its set value FNC ...

Page 137: ...rned ON or when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN This means that the contents changed in the data memory are initialized every time when the PLC turns ON or when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN When it is necessary to save data changed in the data memory using a sequence program update the file register area A to the changed values by the same number register update mode in BMOV FNC 1...

Page 138: ...reverse flag M8024 is ON the contents of a data register inside the data memory are written to the file register area inside the program memory as shown in the figure on the left When updating the contents of a file register in the same number update mode make sure that the file register numbers at and are equal to each other Also make sure that the number of transfer points specified by n does no...

Page 139: ...he figure below Cautions on reading When a file register D1000 or later is specified for the source of BMOV FNC 15 instruction and the same number file register is not specified for the destination the contents of the file register area A inside the program memory are not read 1 When a file register is specified for the source and a data register is specified for the destination Batch transfer of ...

Page 140: ...1 1 Only FX3U FX3UC PLC 2 Allowable number of writes to the memory Data can be written to the memory cassette up to 10 000 times and to the memory EEPROM built in FX3G PLCs up to 20 000 times When a continuous operation type instruction is used for data writing in a program data is written to the memory in every operation cycle of the PLC To prevent this make sure to use a pulse operation type ins...

Page 141: ...rameter setting when the optional battery is used However the latched range cannot be set 3 These registers are stored in the EEPROM built in the PLC or in the EEPROM in the memory cassette when the memory cassette is attached 4 10 2 Data storage destination and access method Because the memory for storing data is different between extension registers and extension file registers the access method...

Page 142: ... extension registers are backed up by the battery even when the power is turned OFF or when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN in FX3U FX3UC PLCs and in FX3G PLCs if extension registers are changed to the latched battery backed type and the optional battery is installed When initializing the contents of extension registers clear them using a sequence program or GX Developer 1 When clearing the...

Page 143: ...t value of a timer or counter A counter or timer operates with regards to the contents of a specified extension register as the set value 2 Extension registers in applied instructions Operation examples using MOV FNC 12 instruction Changing the current value of a counter The current value of the counter C2 is changed to the contents of R5 Reading the current value of a counter to an extension regi...

Page 144: ...s R to extension file registers ER 1 in 2048 point 1 sector units Use this instruction to store newly created sectors 2048 points of data to extension file registers ER 1 INITR FNC292 This instruction initializes extension registers R and extension file registers ER 1 in 2048 point 1 sector units Use this instruction to initialize extension registers R and extension file registers ER 1 before star...

Page 145: ...M General purpose device sequence program R4096 R0 R32767 SAVER instruction sector units RWER instruction point units Available with a memory cassette mounted ER2048 ER0 ER32767 ER4096 R2048 2048 points 2048 points 2048 points R30720 ER30720 1 sector All points are written at one time 2048 points 2048 points 2048 points 16 sectors Nonvolatile memory LOADR instruction point units INITR instruction ...

Page 146: ...evice range Sector 0 R0 ER0 to ER2047 R0 to R2047 Sector 8 R16384 ER16384 to ER18431 R16384 to R18431 Sector 1 R2048 ER2048 to ER4095 R2048 to R4095 Sector 9 R18432 ER18432 to ER20479 R18432 to R20479 Sector 2 R4096 ER4096 to ER6143 R4096 to R6143 Sector 10 R20480 ER20480 to ER22527 R20480 to R22527 Sector 3 R6144 ER6144 to ER8191 R6144 to R8191 Sector 11 R22528 ER22528 to ER24575 R22528 to R24575...

Page 147: ... it is necessary to initialize the target area to be written in advance For writing data to extension file registers in FX3G PLCs it is not necessary to initialize the target area to be written in advance 1 When initializing extension file registers in a program required only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs a Initializing only extension file registers in sector units Ver 1 30 or later Example When initializing...

Page 148: ... operation cycle of the PLC For preventing this make sure to use a pulse operation type instruction Execution of the LOADR FNC290 instruction is not counted as a write to the memory 4 10 8 Registration of data in extension registers and extension file registers This subsection explains the operating procedures of GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later For details on GX Developer operating procedures refe...

Page 149: ...d the Device Constant 6 Before Programming 7 Basic Instruction 8 FNC00 FNC09 Program Flow 9 FNC10 FNC19 Move Compare 10 FNC20 FNC29 Arith Logic Operation 3 Setting the data 1 Right click Device memory in the project data list to open the submenu 2 Click New on the submenu to display New dialog box 3 Click the OK button to display the dialog box for confirmation 4 Click the Yes button 1 For Ver 8 1...

Page 150: ...Devices in Detail 4 10 Extension Register R and Extension File Register ER 5 Input a device number to be set to Device Label and click the Display button 6 Select the data type to be set in the two selection boxes to the right of the Display button 7 Input data or character string to each device accordingly ...

Page 151: ...LC dialog box 1 For Ver 8 13P to 8 24A of GX Developer the PLC type is FX3UC 2 Put a check mark next to MAIN prepared device memory name under Device memory 3 Click the Device data tab and add Ext file register to target devices By default Ext file register is not included for reading writing To add it click the blank space on the left side of Ext file register to change it to In GX Developer Ver ...

Page 152: ...nts 1 V 16 bits Z 16 bits V0 to V7 8 points Z0 to Z7 8 points V0 high order side Z0 low order side V1 high order side Z1 low order side V2 high order side Z2 low order side V3 high order side Z3 low order side V4 high order side Z4 low order side V5 high order side Z5 low order side V6 high order side Z6 low order side 32 bits V7 high order side Z7 low order side This is because FX PLCs handle Z a...

Page 153: ...ed and D20V0 is executed an instruction is executed for the device number D25 D20 5 Constants can be indexed also When K30V0 is specified an instruction is executed for decimal value K35 30 5 Octal devices X Y KnX and KnY For example when Z1 K8 is specified and X0Z1 is executed an instruction is executed for the device number X10 X0 8 addition of octal value When indexing for a device whose device...

Page 154: ... speed counter or speed detection FNC 56 which uses the same input range 1 FX3U FX3UC PLC 2 FX3G PLCs For branch For input interrupt input delay interrupt For timer interrupt For counter interrupt For jump to END step P0 to P62 P64 to P4095 4095 points P63 1 point I00 X000 I30 X003 I10 X001 I40 X004 I20 X002 I50 X005 6 points I6 I7 I8 3 points I010 I040 I020 I050 I030 I060 6 points For branch For ...

Page 155: ...fer to Chapter 36 1 Applied instructions using pointers for branch P CJ FNC 00 conditional jump CALL FNC 01 call subroutine Role of pointer P63 for jump to the END step P63 is a special pointer for jumping to the END step when the CJ FNC 00 instruction is executed Note that a program error will occur when P63 is programmed as a label Refer to 5 Label unnecessary for the pointer P63 in Section 8 1 ...

Page 156: ...input terminals For example when the input interrupt pointer I001 is used X000 is occupied As a result C235 C241 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 and C254 input interrupt pointer I000 pulse catch contact M8170 and SPD instruction using X000 cannot be used Delay function of input interrupt This input interrupt has a function to delay the execution of interrupt routine in units of 1ms The delay time is...

Page 157: ... to 10 ms or more When the timer interrupt time is set to 9 ms or less the timer interrupt processing may not be executed at an accurate cycle in the following cases When the processing time of the interrupt program is long When an instruction requiring long processing time is used in the main program Input No Interrupt cycle ms Interrupt disabling flag I6 An integer in the range from 10 to 99 is ...

Page 158: ...ported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs 2 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP Pointer No Interrupt disabling flag Pointer No Interrupt disabling flag I010 M8059 2 I040 M8059 2 I020 I050 I030 I060 Step 0 I620 Pointer for interrupt Interrupt routine Interrupt is enabled Main program is finished Main program Interrupt at every 20 ms Interrupt return FNC 04 EI FNC 06 FEND FNC 03 IRET END FEND i...

Page 159: ...tor FNC 04 EI FNC 53 DHSCS K1000 C255 FNC 03 IRET END Step 0 C255 I010 Interrupt pointer number is specified FNC 06 FEND Interrupt routine interrupt program I010 Pointer for interrupt Counter interrupt is specified Interrupt return K2 147 483 647 Enable interrupt after EI instruction and describe the main program Drive the coil of a high speed counter and specify an interrupt pointer in DHSCS FNC ...

Page 160: ...perands and instruction operations in applied instructions constant H 3 Binary numbers BIN For a timer counter or data register a numeric value is specified in decimal or hexadecimal as described above But all of these numeric values are handled in the binary format inside PLCs When these devices are monitored in peripheral equipment they are automatically converted into the decimal format as show...

Page 161: ... of numeric values Numeric values handled in FX PLCs can be converted as shown in the table below Major applications Decimal number DEC Octal number OCT Hexadecimal number HEX Binary number BIN BCD 0 0 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 1 01 0000 0001 0000 0001 2 2 02 0000 0010 0000 0010 3 3 03 0000 0011 0000 0011 4 4 04 0000 0100 0000 0100 5 5 05 0000 0101 0000 0101 6 6 06 0000 0110 0000 0110 7 7 07 0000 0...

Page 162: ... 625 22 The sign bit b31 states whether data is positive or negative but is not handled as a complement Number of significant figures The number of significant figures of binary floating point is approximately 7 when expressed in decimal The binary floating point range is as follows Least absolute value 1175494 10 44 Most absolute value 3402823 1032 Handling of the zero M8020 borrow M8021 and carr...

Page 163: ...er data register having a larger device number handles the exponent part For example when data registers D1 and D0 are used they handle scientific notation as shown below Data can be written to D0 and D1 by MOV instruction Scientific notation real number Mantissa D0 10 Exponent D1 Mantissa D0 1000 to 9999 or 0 Exponent D1 41 to 35 The most significant bit of D0 and D1 specifies the positive or neg...

Page 164: ...bits is used K 2 147 483 648 to K2 147 483 647 5 2 2 Constant H hexadecimal number H indicates a hexadecimal number and is mainly used to specify numeric values as operands in applied instructions Example H1234 When using digits 0 to 9 the bit status 1 or 0 of each bit is equivalent to the BCD code so BCD data can be specified also Example H1234 When specifying BCD data specify each digit of hexad...

Page 165: ...00H indicating the end of the character string data in the destination devices specified in an applied instruction 1 Character string data stored in word devices Example of data which can be Example of data which cannot be recognized as character string data recognized as character string data 2 Character string data stored in bit devices with digit specification Example of data which can be Examp...

Page 166: ...rder bits are always regarded as 0 It means that such data is always positive Two digit BCD data expressed by X004 to X013 is converted into binary data and then transferred to D0 A bit device number can be specified arbitrarily but it is recommended to set the least significant digit to 0 for X or Y In other words it is recommended to specify X000 X010 X020 Y000 Y010 Y020 For M and S multiples of...

Page 167: ...Target word device Data register or special data register Bit number 0 to F hexadecimal 5 6 Direct Specification of Buffer Memory U G A buffer memory BFM of a special function block or special extension unit can be specified directly BFM is 16 bit or 32 bit word data and is mainly used for operands in applied instructions For specifying a BFM specify the unit number U of a special function block o...

Page 168: ... use 16 bit counters as 32 bit counters by executing indexing 3 When an octal device number of X or Y is indexed with an index register the contents of the index register are converted into octal and then added to the device number For example when the value of an index register added to the input X000 is changed in the order K0 K8 K16 the device number converted into octal is added to the input X...

Page 169: ...he transfer destination D0 in MOV instruction is indexed with the index register V3 as shown in the figure on the right Transfer K0 or K10 to the index register V3 in advance When X001 is set to ON D 0 0 D0 if V3 is 0 and K500 is transferred to D0 When X001 is set to ON D 0 10 D10 if V3 is 10 and K500 is transferred to D10 2 indexing operands in 32 bit instructions In a 32 bit instruction it is al...

Page 170: ...git specification K4M0Z0 is valid but K0Z0M0 is invalid 6 Indexing of I O relays octal device numbers When octal device numbers of X Y KnX and KnY are indexed with index register the contents of an index register are converted into octal and then added to the device number In the example shown in the figure on the right Y007 to Y000 are output by MOV instruction and inputs are switched by indexing...

Page 171: ...d Z the target device numbers can be changed using the program In this way an instruction with a limited number of uses per program can be used with multiple devices Example using the TKY instruction FNC 70 Two groups of key entries numeric keypad from 0 to 9 store the input data to D0 and D2 Although the TKY instruction FNC 70 can only be programmed once modifying the head device number of the in...

Page 172: ...170 FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual Basic Applied Instruction Edition 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions 5 7 Indexing MEMO ...

Page 173: ...ogramming This chapter explains the I O processing relationship among instructions and programming method which should be understood before creating sequence programs 6 1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions In this manual applied instructions are explained in the following form For the expression methods and basic rules for applied instructions read in advance 6 5 General rules for applied ins...

Page 174: ...ndicate an independent instruction not associated with the 16 bit or 32 bit type WDT FNC 07 Continuous lines on the upper left side indicates that 16 bit type is available D on the lower left side indicates that the 32 bit type is available MOV FNC 12 Dotted lines on the lower left side indicate that the 32 bit type does not exist Continuous lines on the upper left side indicate that only the 16 b...

Page 175: ...Explanation of function and operation The function of each instruction is explained Cautions Cautions on using each instruction are described Errors Major errors that are possible to occur in each instruction are described For details on errors refer to Chapter 38 Errors and Error Code List Program examples Concrete program examples using each instruction are described 1 Bit devices X Input relay ...

Page 176: ...n be simplified and the number of steps can be saved depending on the contact configuration method 1 It is recommended to write a circuit with many serial contacts in an upper position 2 It is recommended to write a circuit with many parallel contacts in a left position 2 Program execution and programming order A sequence program is executed from top to bottom and from left to right Code the seque...

Page 177: ... first coil Y003 the image memory turns ON and the output Y004 turns ON also because the input X001 is ON In the second coil Y003 however the image memory is set to OFF because the input X002 is OFF Accordingly the actual output to the outside is Y003 OFF Y004 ON 2 Countermeasures against double outputs Double outputs double coils do not cause illegal input program error but the operation is disru...

Page 178: ...t A circuit in which the current flows in both directions should be changed as shown in the figure on the right so that a circuit without D and a circuit without B are connected in parallel 2 Coil connection position Do not write a contact on the right side of a coil It is recommended to program a coil between contacts first The number of steps can be saved when a coil E between the contacts A and...

Page 179: ...onger time than PLC cycle time Input filter response delay When the response delay of the input filter 10 ms is considered and the cycle time is supposed as 10 ms the ON duration and OFF duration should be at least 20 ms respectively Accordingly PLCs cannot handle input pulses at 25 Hz 1000 20 20 25 or more However the situation can be improved by PLC special functions and applied instructions Con...

Page 180: ...l instructions In the table below indicates containment relationship and indicates that zones are partially overlapped Top line Left line MC MCR MC MCR octet Example 1 Example 2 CJ P EI DI FOR NEXT STL RET P SRET I IRET FEND END O FEND O END no FEND CJ P EI DI FOR NEXT STL RET quintet 2 inside one STL 1 1 Example 1 MC CJ P MCR Instruction in left line Instruction in top line Example 2 MC CJ MCR P ...

Page 181: ...ndicated by continuous lines is discribed 3 Instructions having containment relationship can be combined except some combinations as follows 1 MC MCR cannot be used in FOR NEXT STL RET P SRET and I RET 2 STL RET cannot be used in FOR NEXT P SRET and I IRET 3 MC MCR FOR NEXT P SRET and I IRET cannot be interrupted by I IRET SRET FEND END etc The first FEND or END is valid but the intended processes...

Page 182: ...ressed as etc in the same way as sources m n Operands not falling under source or destination are expressed as m and n When indexing is allowed and there are two or more such operands they are expressed as m1 m2 n1 n2 etc in the same way as sources and destinations In applied instructions the program step of the instruction part always occupies 1 step but each operand occupies 2 or 4 steps dependi...

Page 183: ... such as T C and D For avoiding confusion it is recommended to specify an even device number which will be the low order side for an operand in a 32 bit instruction 32 bit counter C200 to C255 is regarded as 32 bits and cannot be used as an operand in a 16 bit instruction 2 Pulse operation type and continuous operation type Pulse operation type In the example shown in the figure on the right when ...

Page 184: ...n execution complete flag M8029 When two or more instruction execution complete flags M8029 are programmed together for applied instructions it is difficult to determine which instruction executes which flag For using flags in any positions other than directly under applied instructions refer to the next page M8000 FNC 72 DSW X10 Y10 D0 K1 FNC 22 MUL D0 K10 D20 M8029 Execution is completed M0 FNC ...

Page 185: ...uctions When two or more applied instructions are programmed general flags turn ON or OFF when each applied instruction turns ON Accordingly when using a flag in any position other than directly under an applied instruction set to ON or OFF another device just under the applied instruction and then use the contact of the device as the command contact M8000 FNC 72 DSW X10 Y10 D0 K1 FNC 22 MUL D0 K1...

Page 186: ...nd step number of the new error These devices are set to OFF when errors are cleared When the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN these devices are cleared instantaneously and then set to ON again if errors have not been cleared 2 Operation error latch When an operation error has occurred M8068 turns ON In the FX3U FX3UC PLCs D8313 and D8312 32 bits in total store the step number in which the error...

Page 187: ...number of instructions Limitation in the number of instructions and limitation in simultaneous driving Some applied instructions can be used only up to the specified number of times 1 Total number of times that the FNC53 HSCS FNC54 HSCR and FNC55 HSZ instructions are used When using above instructions beyond the allowable number of times of use For instructions whose operands allow indexing device...

Page 188: ...tructions at the same time for the same output number 2 High speed processing instructions FX3U FX3UC PLC In FNC 53 HSCS FNC 54 HSCR and FNC 55 HSZ instructions including FNC280 HSCT instruction make sure that up to 32 instructions are driven at the same time FNC280 HSCT instruction can be used only once Note that FNC280 HSCT instruction table high speed comparison mode of FNC 55 HSZ instruction a...

Page 189: ... logical operation of rising edge pulse X Y M S D b T C Section 7 5 LDF Load Falling Pulse Initial logical operation of falling trailing edge pulse X Y M S D b T C Section 7 5 AND AND Serial connection of NO normally open contacts X Y M S D b T C Section 7 3 ANI AND Inverse Serial connection of NC normally closed contacts X Y M S D b T C Section 7 3 ANDP AND Pulse Serial connection of rising edge ...

Page 190: ...operation result to trailing edge pulse Section 7 11 Out Instruction OUT OUT Final logical operation type coil drive Y M S D b T C Section 7 2 SET SET Set bit device latch ON Y M S D b Section 7 13 RST Reset Reset bit device OFF Y M S D b T C D R V Z Section 7 13 PLS Pulse Rising edge pulse Y M Section 7 12 PLF Pulse Falling Falling trailing edge pulse Y M Section 7 12 Master Control Instruction M...

Page 191: ...d Z S2 State relays S cannot be indexed with index registers V and Z S3 D b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs However index modifiers V and Z are not available S4 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation 1 LD instruction initial logical operation NO contact type Instruc tion Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification Syste...

Page 192: ... and LDI instructions When specifying a bit in data register input after a data register D number and then input a bit number 0 to F consecutively Only 16 bit data registers are available Specify a bit number as 0 1 2 9 A B F from the least significant bit Example In the example shown on the left LD contact is set to ON becomes conductive or OFF becomes non conductive by the bit 3 of D0 1 This fun...

Page 193: ...ly in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation 1 When a bit device is used A device described in OUT instruction turns ON or OFF according to the driven contact status Parallel OUT instructions can be used consecutively as many times as necessary In the program example shown below OUT M100 and OUT M101 are parallel If two or more OUT instructions are executed for a same device number ...

Page 194: ...used for the set value by MOV instruction DSW instruction or display unit before driving the timer or counter 3 Setting range of timers and counters The table below shows the set value range of timers and counters the actual timer constants and the number of program steps including the set value for OUT instruction Timer counter Setting range Value of K or current value of D or R Actual set value ...

Page 195: ...fied as a device used in OUT instruction When specifying a bit in data register input after a data register D number and then input a bit number 0 to F consecutively Only 16 bit data registers are available Specify a bit number as 0 1 2 9 A B F from the least significant bit Example In the example shown on the left the bit 3 of D0 turns ON or OFF when X000 turns ON or OFF 1 This function is suppor...

Page 196: ...th index registers V and Z S3 D b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs However index modifiers V and Z are not available S4 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation 1 AND instruction serial connection of NO normally open contacts Instruc tion Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant ...

Page 197: ...ter D 1 A bit in data register D can be specified as a device used in AND and ANI instructions When specifying a bit in data register input after a data register D number and then input a bit number 0 to F consecutively Only 16 bit data registers are available Specify a bit number as 0 1 2 9 A B F from the least significant bit Example In the example shown on the left AND contact turns ON becomes ...

Page 198: ...List program K30 X000 Y003 AND instruction LD AND OUT LD ANI OUT AND OUT SP LD ANI OUT 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0010 0011 0012 X000 X001 Y003 X002 X003 Y004 X004 T0 K30 X005 T0 Y005 Contact connected in series X001 X002 Y004 ANI instruction X003 Contact connected in series ANI instruction T0 X004 AND instruction Contact connected in series Contact connected in series ...

Page 199: ...cable devices S1 Special auxiliary relays M and 32 bit counters C cannot be indexed with index registers V and Z S2 State relays S cannot be indexed with index registers V and Z S3 D b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs However index modifiers V and Z are not available S4 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation 1 OR instruction parallel connec...

Page 200: ... and Z State relays S special auxiliary relays M 32 bit counters and D b cannot be indexed The index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 are available for indexing When a used device is an input X or output Y the value of an index register V or Z is converted into an octal number and then added Example When the value of V0 is 10 OR contact is set to ON becomes conductive or OFF becomes non conductive ...

Page 201: ...a register D number and then input a bit number 0 to F consecutively Only 16 bit data registers are available Specify a bit number as 0 1 2 9 A B F from the least significant bit Example In the example shown on the left OR contact is set to ON becomes conductive or OFF becomes non conductive by the bit 3 of D0 1 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Errors When an I O number used in O...

Page 202: ...ord Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P LDP 3 3 3 3 3 3 S LDF 3 3 3 3 3 3 S ANDP 3 3 3 3 3 3 S ANDF 3 3 3 3 3 3 S ORP 3 3 3 3 3 3 S ORF 3 3 3 3 3 3 S LDP Load Pulse Basic Instruction LDP Continuous Operation Pulse Single Operation Mnemonic Operati...

Page 203: ... and ORP instructions initial logical operation of rising edge pulse serial connection of rising edge pulse and parallel connection of rising edge pulse In the example shown above M0 or M1 is ON during only one operation cycle when X000 to X002 turn ON from OFF ON ON ON ON X000 X001 M0 0000 LDP X000 0002 ORP X001 0004 OUT M0 0005 LD M8000 0006 ANDP X002 0008 OUT M1 M8000 X002 M1 RUN monitor Timing...

Page 204: ...ster input after a data register D number and then input a bit number 0 to F consecutively Only 16 bit data registers are available Specify a bit number as 0 1 2 9 A B F from the least significant bit Example In the example shown on the left LDP contact turns ON becomes conductive or OFF becomes non conductive when the bit 3 of D0 turns ON or OFF 1 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLC...

Page 205: ...gram Flow 9 FNC10 FNC19 Move Compare 10 FNC20 FNC29 Arith Logic Operation 4 Output drive side The following two circuits offer a same operation In each circuit M6 is ON during only one operation cycle when X010 turns ON from OFF In each circuit MOV instruction is executed only once when X020 turns ON from OFF X010 M6 X010 PLS M6 Operation cycle X010 M 6 OUT instruction Pulse instruction Operation ...

Page 206: ...to 3 detect the rising edge of M0 Because of LD instruction the contact 4 is conductive while M0 is ON M2800 to M3071 From M2800 driven by X000 the program is divided into the upper block block A and the lower block block B In each of the blocks A and B only the first contact which detects the rising or falling edge is activated Because of LD instruction the contact in the block C is conductive wh...

Page 207: ...device status is same as the time when the instruction was executed last the instruction turns OFF 2 Cautions on write during RUN 1 Instructions for falling edge pulse When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse LDF ANDF or ORF instruction the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without regard to the ON OFF status of the target de...

Page 208: ...el circuits which can be connected by ORB instructions in the case of appropriate program shown above Though ORB instructions can be used at one time note that the repeated use of LD or LDI instruction is limited to 8 or less in the case of inappropriate program shown above Instruc tion Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Nu...

Page 209: ...uction serial connection of multiple parallel circuits Caution There is no limitation in the number of ANB instruction Though ANB instructions can be used at one time note that the repeated use of LD or LDI instruction is limited to 8 or less in the same way as ORB instruction Instruc tion Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real...

Page 210: ...User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P MPS There are no applicable devices MRD There are no applicable devices MPP There are no applicable devices Memory Point Store MPS Basic Instruction 1 step MPS Continuous Operation Pulse Single Operation Mnemonic Operation Condition MRD Memory Read Basic Instructio...

Page 211: ...ves the currently stored result Use MPS instruction to store the intermediate result of operation and then drive the output Y002 Use MRD instruction to read the stored data and then drive the output Y003 MRD instruction can be programmed as many times as necessary In the final output circuit use MPP instruction instead of MRD instruction MPP instruction reads the stored data described above and th...

Page 212: ...004 Y002 Y003 X005 MPS MPP MPP X006 X007 Y004 Y005 X010 MPS MRD Y006 X011 MRD Y007 X012 MPP 0000 LD X000 0001 AND X001 0002 0003 AND X002 0004 OUT Y000 0005 0006 OUT Y001 0007 LD X003 0008 0009 AND X004 0010 OUT Y002 0011 0012 AND X005 0013 OUT Y003 0014 LD X006 0015 0016 AND X007 0017 OUT Y004 0018 0019 AND X010 0020 OUT Y005 0021 0022 AND X011 0023 OUT Y006 0024 0025 AND X012 0026 OUT Y007 MPS M...

Page 213: ...01 Y000 X002 MPS X003 Y001 X004 X005 X006 X007 Y002 Y003 X010 X011 MRD MPP 0000 LD X000 0001 0002 LD X001 0003 OR X002 0004 ANB 0005 OUT Y000 0006 0007 LD X003 0008 AND X004 0009 LD X005 0010 AND X006 0011 ORB 0012 ANB 0013 OUT Y001 0014 0015 AND X007 0016 OUT Y002 0017 LD X010 0018 OR X011 0019 ANB 0020 OUT Y003 MPS MRD MPP Circuit program List program X000 X001 X002 Y000 Y001 MPP X003 X004 X005 ...

Page 214: ...can be programmed easily without MPS instruction X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003 Y004 MPS MPS MPS MPS MPP MPP MPP MPP 0000 LD X000 0001 0002 AND X001 0003 0004 AND X002 0005 0006 AND X003 0007 0008 AND X004 MPS MPS MPS MPS 0009 OUT Y000 0010 0011 OUT Y001 0012 0013 OUT Y002 0014 0015 OUT Y003 0016 0017 OUT Y004 MPP MPP MPP MPP X004 X000 X001 X002 X003 0000 LD X000 0001 OUT Y004 0002 A...

Page 215: ...fter MC contact execute each operation only when MC instruction is executed and do not execute the operation when MC instruction is not executed In the program example below the instructions from MC to MCR are executed as they are while the input X000 is ON However while the input X000 is OFF each driven device offers the following operation Timers except retentive type timers and devices driven b...

Page 216: ...fter it is set to the STOP mode once and then to the RUN mode again Program examples 1 When the nesting structure is not adopted Circuit program List program X000 MC N 0 M100 N 0 M100 X001 Y000 X002 Y001 MCR N 0 X003 MC N 0 M150 N 0 M150 X004 Y002 X005 Y003 MCR N 0 0000 LD X000 0001 MC N000 SP M100 0004 LD X001 0005 OUT Y000 0006 LD X002 0007 OUT Y001 0008 MCR N000 Two step instruction Three step ...

Page 217: ... programming MCR N6 and MCR N7 the nest level is returned to 5 at one time Available nest levels are from N0 to N7 eight layers B A C B While X000 is OFF A N 1 N 2 X000 MC N 0 M100 N 0 M100 X001 Y000 X002 MC N 1 M101 N 1 M101 X003 Y001 X004 MC N 2 M102 N 2 M102 X005 Y002 MCR N 2 X006 Y003 MCR N 1 X007 Y004 MCR N 0 X010 Y005 N 0 N 1 N 2 N 0 D C While X002 is OFF While X004 is OFF Circuit program Le...

Page 218: ...hen INV instruction is used in a complicated circuit containing ORB and ANB instructions the operation range of INV instruction is as shown in the figure below INV instruction inverts the operation result after LD LDI LDP or LDF instruction located before INV instruction Accordingly if INV instructions are used inside ORB and ANB instructions blocks after LD LDI LDP or LDF instruction seen from ea...

Page 219: ...uctions simplifies the process of changing driving contacts to pulses when multiple contact points connect in a series 1 Instruction format 2 Applicable devices Explanation of function and operation 1 MEP instruction ON during rising edge of driving contacts results 2 MEF instruction ON during falling edge of driving contacts results Instruc tion Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit S...

Page 220: ...truction results After writing to the circuit with MEP instructions during RUN the MEP instruction result turns ON conductive while the operation results up to the MEP instruction are ON 2 Pulse instruction during falling edge of operation MEF command results After writing to the circuit with MEF instructions during RUN the MEF instruction result turns OFF non conductive regardless of the operatio...

Page 221: ...truction steps refer to Section 7 15 2 Applicable devices S1 Except special auxiliary relays M S2 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation 1 PLS instruction rising edge pulse In the figure above M0 is ON during only one operation cycle when X000 changes from OFF to ON 2 PLF instruction falling trailing edge pulse In the figure above M1 is ON during o...

Page 222: ...lse is not executed without regard to the ON OFF status of the operation condition device It is necessary to set to ON the target device or operation condition device once and then set it to OFF for executing the instruction for falling edge pulse 2 Instructions for rising edge pulse When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for rising edge pulse the instruction for...

Page 223: ...extension register R or index register V Z RST instruction can be used to clear to 0 the contents of a data register D or index register V Z The same result can be obtained by MOV instruction which transfers the constant K0 RST instruction can be used also to reset the current value and return the contact of retentive type timers T246 to T255 SET and RST instructions can be used for a same device ...

Page 224: ... 1 phase 1 input counters C235 to C245 use special auxiliary relays M8235 to M8245 for specifying the counting direction X010 in ON status Specifies down counting X010 in OFF status Specifies up counting When X011 turns ON the output contact of the counter CUUU is returned and the current value of the counter CUUU is reset to 0 In counters with reset input C241 C242 the same situation is achieved ...

Page 225: ...o octal and then added Example When Z0 is 20 Y024 turns ON or OFF 1 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs 4 Bit specification of a data register D 1 A bit in data register D can be specified as a device used in SET or RST instruction When specifying a bit in data register input after a data register D number and then input a bit number 0 to F consecutively Only 16 bit data registers a...

Page 226: ...tions 1 Instruction format 2 Applicable devices Explanation of function and operation 1 NOP instruction no operation or null step NOP instruction specifies no operation If NOP operation is written in the middle of a program PLCs ignore it in executing the program When an existing program is replaced with NOP instructions it means that former instructions are deleted Instruc tion Bit Devices Word D...

Page 227: ...teps after END instruction If END instruction is not written at the end of a program PLCs execute the program until the final step and then execute the output processing At the first execution after the PLC mode was changed from STOP to RUN PLCs start from END instruction When END instruction is executed the watchdog timer which checks the operation cycle is refreshed Caution Do not write END inst...

Page 228: ...es X000 to X357 1 2 Y000 to Y357 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 M0 to M1535 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 M1536 to M3583 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 M3584 to M7679 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 S0 to S1023 1 2 2 2 2 S1024 to S4095 2 2 2 2 2 T0 to T191 T200 to T245 1 3 2 2 T192 to T199 T246 to T511 1 3 2 2 C0 to C199 1 3 2 2 C200 to C255 1 5 2 2 Special auxiliary relays M8000 to M8255 1 2 2 2 2 Special auxiliary relays M8256 to M8511 2 2 2 2 2 Bit devices with...

Page 229: ...9 provide instructions mainly related to control flow of sequence programs such as conditional program execution and priority processing FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 00 CJ Conditional Jump Section 8 1 01 CALL Call Subroutine Section 8 2 02 SRET Subroutine Return Section 8 3 03 IRET Interrupt Return Section 8 4 04 EI Enable Interrupt Section 8 5 05 DI Disable Interrupt Section 8 6 06 F...

Page 230: ...FX3U FX3UC n 0 to 4095 FX3G n 0 to 2047 P63 jumps to END instruction Pointer number Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 P FNC 00 CJ 16 bit Instruction 3 steps CJ CJP Continuous Operation Pulse Single Operation Mn...

Page 231: ...r number step than CJ instruction However note that a watchdog timer error occurs when the scan time exceeds 200 ms default setting 3 Jumping to one label from two or more CJ instructions When the pointer number in operands is same and there is one label the following operation is caused When X020 turns ON the program execution jumps from CJ instruction corresponding to X020 to the label P9 When X...

Page 232: ...nnot be shared by CALL instruction and CJ instruction 7 Unconditional jump if the command contact is normally ON Because M8000 is normally ON while a PLC is operating unconditional jump is specified when M8000 is used in the following example Label P 63 FNC 00 CJ P 63 END Do not program P63 X000 M8000 K10 FNC 01 CALLP C0 X001 P15 FNC 06 FEND RUN monitor normally ON FNC 02 SRET P15 Label User progr...

Page 233: ...nstant 6 Before Programming 7 Basic Instruction 8 FNC00 FNC09 Program Flow 9 FNC10 FNC19 Move Compare 10 FNC20 FNC29 Arith Logic Operation Program example 1 When jump is necessary after the OFF processing In one operation cycle after X023 changes to ON from OFF CJ P7 instruction becomes valid By using this method jump can be executed after all outputs between CJ P7 instruction and the label P7 tur...

Page 234: ...ent value is valid Operation of the routine timers T192 to T199 A routine timer continues its operation even if it is jumped after the coil is driven and the output contact is activated Operation of the high speed counters C235 to C255 A high speed counter continues its operation even if it is jumped after the coil is driven and the output contact is activated When each input changes during jump i...

Page 235: ...the counter C0 remains reset Accordingly the current value of C0 remains 0 even if X012 turns ON To clear this reset status it is necessary to turn OFF the RST instruction for counter C0 Refer to the program shown below Timing chart Program example for activating a timer and counter even during a jump Timing chart X010 K10 C0 RST C0 X012 P0 FNC 00 CJ Label P0 X011 Jump operation by CJ instruction ...

Page 236: ...R N 0 P 3 1 Jump from outside MC to outside MC Jump is available arbitrarily 2 Jump from outside MC to inside MC Jump is executed regardless of the MC operation Even if M0 is OFF M0 is regarded as ON after P1 3 Jump from inside MC to inside MC Jump is disabled while M0 is OFF 4 Jump from inside MC to outside MC Jump is disabled while M0 is OFF Jump is executed while M0 is ON but MCR is invalid CJ ...

Page 237: ...function and operation 1 16 bit operation While the command input is ON CALL instruction is executed and the program execution jumps to a step with a label Then a subroutine program with the label is executed When SRET FNC 02 instruction is executed the program execution returns to the step after CALL instruction At the end of the main program put FEND instruction Put a label P for CALL instructio...

Page 238: ...ad Label P 10 FNC 01 CALL P 10 FNC 06 FEND FNC 02 SRET END X000 Main program While X000 is ON the program execution jumps to a step with the label P10 Subroutine program When SRET instruction is executed after the subroutine program has executed the program execution returns to the original step 1 Label P 11 Label P 12 FNC 01 CALLP P 11 FNC 06 FEND FNC 01 CALL P 12 FNC 02 SRET FNC 02 SRET END Main...

Page 239: ...ed in a subroutine note that the output contact is activated when the first coil instruction or subroutine is executed after the timer reaches its set value 3 Countermeasures against latches of devices used in subroutines or interrupt routines Devices which were set to ON in a subroutine are latched in the ON status even after the subroutine is finished Refer to the program example shown below Whe...

Page 240: ...0 FNC 01 CALLP RST C0 X002 P0 FNC 06 FEND RST C0 FNC 02 SRET P0 RST Y007 Y007 is reset at an arbitrary timing The preceding RST C0 instruction is deactivated in the subroutine B M8001 RUN monitor normally OFF A Y007 X001 C0 K10 Execution of P0 is triggered by X000 X001 Current value of C0 1 2 3 Y007 is reset RST C0 Y007 Subroutine is executed 1 2 3 4 X002 Counter reset instruction is deactivated p...

Page 241: ...on format 2 Set data 3 Applicable devices Explanation of function and operation When CALL instruction in the main program is executed the program execution jumps to a subroutine SRET instruction returns the program execution to the main routine Refer to Section 8 2 Operand type Description Data type There is no set data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification ...

Page 242: ...UC PLCs For the interrupt function refer to Chapter 36 Operand type Description Data type There is no set data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P There are no applicable devices Function Interrupt No Description Ref...

Page 243: ... original main program by IRET instruction The timer interrupt of the pointer I620 is executed every timer time of 20 ms and the program execution is returned to the original main program by IRET instruction each time The high speed counter interrupt of the pointer I010 is executed when the current value of a high speed counter becomes equivalent to a value specified by DHSCS FNC 53 instruction Th...

Page 244: ...ces Explanation of function and operation EI instruction is the independent type and does not require command drive contact For the interrupt function refer to Chapter 36 Operand type Description Data type There is no set data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b ...

Page 245: ...plicable devices Explanation of function and operation DI instruction is the independent type and does not require command drive contact For the interrupt function refer to Chapter 36 Cautions Interrupts requests generated after DI instruction are processed after EI FNC 04 instruction is executed Operand type Description Data type There is no set data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others ...

Page 246: ...turns to the step 0 FEND instruction is required in creating subroutine programs and interrupt programs 1 In the case of CJ instruction Operand type Description Data type There is no set data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Mod...

Page 247: ...struction 2 When CALL or CALLP instruction is used Put a label after FEND instruction And the SRET instruction is required in every case 3 When CALL or CALLP instruction is used If FEND instruction is executed after CALL or CALLP instruction was executed and before SRET instruction is executed an error is caused 4 When FOR instruction is used If FEND instruction is executed after FOR instruction w...

Page 248: ...When the operation cycle is long insert WDT instruction in the middle of the program to avoid the watchdog timer error Related device Operand type Description Data type There is no set data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modif...

Page 249: ... the operation time may become longer and a watchdog timer error may occur 2 The watchdog timer time can be changed For details on changing watchdog timer time refer to Subsection 37 2 2 By overwriting the contents of D8000 watchdog timer time the watchdog timer detection time initial value 200 ms can be changed By inputting the program shown below the sequence program after this insertion is moni...

Page 250: ... Manual Basic Applied Instruction Edition 8 Program Flow FNC 00 to FNC 09 8 8 FNC 07 WDT Watchdog Timer Refresh 3 When FOR NEXT instruction is repeated many times Put WDT instruction between FOR and NEXT instructions FNC 08 FOR Program FNC 07 WDT K30000 FNC 09 NEXT ...

Page 251: ...vices S This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation For details refer to NEXT FNC 09 instruction Related instruction FOR instruction and NEXT FNC 09 instruction are set as a pair in programming Operand type Description Data type Number of repetition of the loop between FOR and NEXT instructions K1 to K32767 A value from 32768 to 0 is handled as 1 16 bit...

Page 252: ...ted by the specified number of times steps after NEXT instruction are executed Related instruction NEXT instruction and FOR FNC 08 instruction are set as a pair in programming Operand type Description Data type There is no set data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S...

Page 253: ...8010 is too long and a watchdog timer error may occur In such a case change the watchdog timer time or reset the watchdog timer For details on changing the watchdog timer time refer to Subsection 37 2 2 For resetting the watchdog timer refer to WDT FNC 07 instruction 2 Examples of wrong programs The following programs are regarded as errors FOR 1st level FOR FOR NEXT NEXT NEXT 2nd level 3rd level ...

Page 254: ...lue of D0Z D4 when Z is 4 is 6 the loop 2 is repeated 6 times When X010 is OFF When K1X000 is 7 the loop 1 is repeated 7 times When X010 is ON The program execution jumps to the pointer P22 and the loop 1 is skipped Number of times of repeating the loops 1 2 and 3 X010 ON X010 OFF 7 6 4 168 times 6 4 24 times 4 times 1 2 3 0 time 24 times 4 times X010 P 22 1 2 3 FNC 09 NEXT FNC 08 FOR K 4 FNC 08 F...

Page 255: ...ovide fundamental data processing instructions such as data transfer and data comparison which are regarded as most important in applied instructions FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 10 CMP Compare Section 9 1 11 ZCP Zone Compare Section 9 2 12 MOV Move Section 9 3 13 SMOV Shift Move Section 9 4 14 CML Complement Section 9 5 15 BMOV Block Move Section 9 6 16 FMOV Fill Move Section 9 7 17 ...

Page 256: ...erand Type Description Data Type Data or device number handled as comparison value 16 or 32 bit binary Date or device number handled as comparison source 16 or 32 bit binary Head bit device number to which comparison result is output Bit Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M...

Page 257: ... control Program examples 1 When comparing the current value of a counter If it is necessary to clear the comparison result when the instruction is not executed add the following contents under the above program 1 RST instruction 2 ZRST instruction S1 S1 S2 S2 D D D S1 S1 S2 S2 FNC 10 DCMP Even if the command input turns OFF and DCMP instruction is not executed 1 and 2 latch the status just before...

Page 258: ...cription Data Type Data or device number handled as lower comparison value 16 or 32 bit binary Data or device number handled as upper comparison value 16 or 32 bit binary Data or device number handled as comparison source 16 or 32 bit binary Head bit device number to which comparison result is output Bit Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Spec...

Page 259: ...ration DZCP and DZCPP The lower comparison value 1 and upper comparison value 1 are compared with the comparison source 1 According to the result smaller within zone or larger either one among 1 and 2 turns ON Comparison is executed algebraically Example 125400 22466 1015444 S1 S2 S D D D FNC 11 ZCP Even if the command input turns OFF and ZCP instruction is not executed 1 and 2 latch the status ju...

Page 260: ...en the lower comparison value is smaller than the upper comparison value 2 When the lower comparison value is larger than the upper comparison value D S1 S2 S1 S2 M 3 M 4 M 5 X000 ZCP K100 K120 C30 M3 C30 M3 M4 M5 S1 S2 S D 99 100 119 120 121 X000 Turns ON in the case of K100 C30 Current value Turns ON in the case of K100 C30 Current value K120 Turns ON in the case of K120 C30 Current value S1 S2 ...

Page 261: ... specifying digits of a bit device K1X000 K1Y000 The bit device transfers a maximum of 16 points multiple of 4 Operand Type Description Data Type Transfer source data or device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Transfer destination device number 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Numb...

Page 262: ...it device transfers a maximum of 32 points multiple of 4 When a word device is specified The word device transfers 1 point 50 50 0 ON Command contact S D Before execution After execution K50 K0 D10 D50 K50 K50 FNC 12 MOV D10 D50 Transfer S D Command input S S D D D S S FNC 12 DMOV S D Command input 1 S S 1 D D ON ON X000 OFF X001 OFF ON X037 ON Y000 OFF ON Y001 OFF ON Y037 ON OFF Command contact S...

Page 263: ...g a bit device The program written by basic instructions shown on the right can be expressed using MOV instruction as shown below 4 When transferring 32 bit data Make sure to use DMOV instruction for transferring the operation result of an applied instruction such as MUL whose operation result is output in 32 bits and for transferring a 32 bit numeric value or transferring the current value of a h...

Page 264: ...m1 Head digit position to be moved 16 bit binary m2 Number of digits to be moved 16 bit binary Word device number storing data whose digits are moved 16 bit binary n Head digit position of movement destination 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX...

Page 265: ... The digits of 103 and 100 of are not affected even if data is transferred from 3 The composed data BCD is converted into binary and stored to 2 Extension function When M8168 is set to ON first and then SMOV instruction is executed conversion from binary to BCD is not executed Data is moved in units of 4 bits Program example The data on three digit digital switches are composed and stored as binar...

Page 266: ... Operand Type Description Data Type Data to be inverted or word device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Word device number storing inverted data 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 ...

Page 267: ...t from a PLC Program examples 1 When receiving an inverted input The sequence program shown below can be written by CML instruction 2 When four bits are specified for a device with digit specification S S D D S S FNC 14 DCML 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 to b7 b6 n5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Sign bit 0 Positive 1 Negative Inverted data is transfer...

Page 268: ...in the order 1 2 3 according to the number overlap status Operand Type Description Data Type Transfer source data or device number storing data 16 bit binary Transfer destination device number 16 bit binary n Number of transferred points including file registers n 512 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stan...

Page 269: ... flag M8024 1 for BMOV FNC 15 instruction data can be transferred in two directions in one program 1 M8024 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP Caution When specifying digits of bit devices specify a same number of digits for and BMOV direction inverse flag Transfer direction M8024 1 OFF D5 D10 D6 D11 D7 D12 M8024 1 ON D5 D10 D6 D11 D7 D12 X000 FNC 15 BMOVP D5 D10 K3 X001 M8024...

Page 270: ...ions with regard to file registers D1000 and later When restoring the power data registers set as file registers are automatically copied from the file register area A to the data register area B Instruction Contents of transfer Remarks BMOV instruction Can read from and write to the file register area A inside the program memory Other applied instructions Can read from and write to the data regis...

Page 271: ...transfer points does not exceed the file register area 5 Handling of the memory cassette When changing the contents of file registers secured inside the memory cassette confirm the following conditions Set the protect switch of the memory cassette to OFF It takes 66 to 132 ms to write data to one serial block 500 points in the memory cassette flash memory It takes 80 ms to write data to one serial...

Page 272: ...r even if a file register having different number is specified for and respectively data cannot be transferred from the file register area to another file register area In such a case read the contents of a file register specified as in the same number register update mode to the data register area B once and then write the data For the same number register update mode of file registers refer to S...

Page 273: ...ice number range data is transferred within the possible range While the command input is OFF the transfer destination does not change While the command input is ON the data of the transfer source does not change Operand Type Description Data Type Transfer source data or device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Head word device number of transfer destination Same data is transferred from the...

Page 274: ...e contents will be the same among all of n 32 bit devices If the number of points specified by n exceeds the device number range data is transferred within the possible range While the command input is OFF the transfer destination 1 does not change While the command input is ON the data of the transfer source 1 does not change When a constant K is specified as the transfer source 1 it is automatic...

Page 275: ... Specified the Device Constant 6 Before Programming 7 Basic Instruction 8 FNC00 FNC09 Program Flow 9 FNC10 FNC19 Move Compare 10 FNC20 FNC29 Arith Logic Operation Program example 1 When writing specified data to two or more devices X000 FNC 16 FMOV K 0 D 0 K 5 n S D K 0 K 0 D 0 K 0 D 1 K 0 D 2 K 0 D 3 K 0 D 4 Before execution After execution K 3 K 0 K 5 K 0 K 65 K 0 K 7 K 0 K100 K 0 Values before ...

Page 276: ... 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 DXCH DXCHP Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction 5 steps XCH XCHP Mnemonic Operation Condition Continuous...

Page 277: ...ction is executed while M8160 is ON high order 8 bits byte and low order 8 bits byte of a word device are exchanged each other Because this instruction works in the same way as SWAP FNC147 instruction use SWAP instruction when programming new exchange In a 32 bit operation high order 8 bits byte and low order 8 bits byte of each word device are exchanged for each other Error An operation error occ...

Page 278: ...nge from K0 to K9999 BCD The table below shows digit specification for and Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing the conversion source binary data 16 or 32 bit binary Word device number of the conversion destination binary coded decimal data 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con s...

Page 279: ...nd outputs Binary data is used in all operations in PLCs including arithmetic operations and increment and decrement instructions When receiving the digital switch information in the binary coded decimal BCD format into a PLC use BIN FNC 19 instruction for converting BCD data into binary data When outputting data to the seven segment display unit handling binary coded decimal BCD data use BCD FNC ...

Page 280: ... the seven segment display unit has 2 to 4 digits 3 When the seven segment display unit has 5 to 8 digits FNC 18 BCD D0 K1Y000 X000 PLC FNC 18 BCD D0 K2Y000 X000 PLC Output destination In the case of 2 digits K2 In the case of 3 digits K3 In the case of 4 digits K4 K4 K3 K2 K1 FNC 18 DBCD D0 K5Y000 X000 Output destination In the case of 5 digits K5 In the case of 6 digits K6 In the case of 7 digit...

Page 281: ...ed decimal BCD data of into binary BIN data and transfers the converted binary data to The data of can be converted if it is within the range from K0 to K9999 BCD The table below shows digit specification for and Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing the conversion source binary coded decimal data 16 or 32 bit binary Word device number of the conversion destination binary 1...

Page 282: ...ing arithmetic operations and increment and decrement instructions When receiving the digital switch information in the binary coded decimal BCD format into a PLC use BIN FNC 19 instruction for converting BCD data into binary data When outputting data to the seven segment display unit handling binary coded decimal BCD data use BCD FNC 18 instruction for converting binary data into BCD data Error M...

Page 283: ...xamples 1 When the digital switch has 1 digit 2 When the digital switch has 2 to 4 digits 3 When the digital switch has 5 to 8 digits FNC 19 BIN K1X000 D0 X000 MOV instruction can be used instead PLC FNC 12 MOV K1X000 D0 X000 6 In the case of 2 digits K2 In the case of 3 digits K3 In the case of 4 digits K4 FNC 19 BIN K2X000 D0 PLC K4 K3 K2 K1 9 7 8 6 Digital switch input Output destination X000 P...

Page 284: ...ion For the floating point operation refer to Chapter 18 FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 20 ADD Addition Section 10 1 21 SUB Subtraction Section 10 2 22 MUL Multiplication Section 10 3 23 DIV Division Section 10 4 24 INC Increment Section 10 5 25 DEC Decrement Section 10 6 26 WAND Logical Word AND Section 10 7 27 WOR Logical Word OR Section 10 8 28 WXOR Logical Exclusive OR Section 10 9 ...

Page 285: ...t operation DADD and DADDP The contents of 1 are added to 1 in the binary format and the addition result is transferred to 1 The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign positive 0 or negative 1 and data are added algebraically 5500 8540 3040 When a constant K is specified in 1 or 1 it is automatically converted into the binary format Operand type Description Data type Data for additio...

Page 286: ...e destination In this case note that the addition result changes in every operation cycle if a continuous operation type instruction ADD or DADD is used Device Name Description M8020 Zero ON When the operation result is 0 OFF When the operation result is not 0 M8021 Borrow ON When the operation result is less than 32768 in 16 bit operation or 2 147 483 648 in 32 bit operation OFF When the operatio...

Page 287: ...truction and INC instruction caused by a program for adding 1 When ADD P is executed 1 is added to the contents of D0 every time X001 turns ON from OFF ADD P instruction is similar to INCP instruction described later except the contents shown in the table below ADD ADDP DADD or DADDP instruction INC INCP DINC DINCP instruction Flag zero borrow or carry Operates Does not operate Operation result 16...

Page 288: ...lt is transferred to 1 The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign positive 0 or negative 1 and data are subtracted algebraically 5500 8540 14040 When a constant K is specified in 1 or 1 it is automatically converted into the binary format Operand type Description Data type Data for subtraction or word device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Data for subtraction or word device ...

Page 289: ...ying the same device in the source and destination The same device number can be specified for both the source and the destination In this case note that the addition result changes in every operation cycle if a continuous operation type instruction SUB or DSUB is used Device Name Description M8020 Zero ON When the operation result is 0 OFF When the operation result is other than 0 M8021 Borrow ON...

Page 290: ...tents of D0 every time X001 turns ON from OFF SUB P instruction is similar to DECP instruction described later except the contents shown in the table below D SUB P instruction D DEC P instruction Flag zero borrow or carry Operates Does not operate Operation result 16 bit operation 1 2 1 0 32768 32 768 32 767 32 766 1 32767 0 1 2 32 bit operation 1 2 1 0 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 2 ...

Page 291: ... is transferred to 32 bit 1 The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign positive 0 or negative 1 and data are multiplied algebraically 5 8 40 When a constant K is specified in or it is automatically converted into the binary format Operand type Description Data type Data for multiplication or word device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Data for multiplication or word device nu...

Page 292: ...ally converted into the binary format When a digit K1 to K8 is specified for 3 2 1 The result is obtained only for low order 32 bits and is not obtained for high order 32 bits Transfer the data to word devices once then execute the operation D D When command contact turns ON S2 S1 K15 H000F K53 H0035 K795 H031B 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 Operation result is output to K2Y000 D Y027 Y026 Y025 Y01...

Page 293: ...pecified in 2 When monitoring the operation result in a programming tool Even if word devices are used the operation result 64 bits cannot be monitored at one time In such a case floating point operation is recommended For the floating point operation refer to Chapter 18 Program examples 1 16 bit operation 2 32 bit operation Function Changes According to Versions Device Name Description M8304 1 Ze...

Page 294: ...tient and remainder Make sure that these two devices are not used for another control When a constant K is specified as or it is automatically converted into the binary format Operand type Description Data type Data for division or word device number storing data dividend 16 or 32 bit binary Data for division or word device number storing data divisor 16 or 32 bit binary Head word device number st...

Page 295: ... all FX3G PLCs and FX3U FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 30 or later Cautions 1 Operation result The most significant bit of the quotient and remainder indicates the sign positive 0 negative 1 respectively The quotient is negative when either the dividend or divisor is negative The remainder is negative when the dividend is negative 2 Device specified as The remainder is not obtained when a bit device is specifie...

Page 296: ...r later Ver 2 30 or later Zero Flag Turns M8304 ON when the operation result of DIV instruction is 0 Carry Flag Turns M8306 ON when the operation result of DIV instruction overflows 16 bit operation Only when the maximum negative value 32 768 is divided by 1 32 bit operation Only when the maximum negative value 2 147 483 648 is divided by 1 X000 D FNC 23 DIV D 0 D 2 D 4 S1 S2 Dividend Divisor Quot...

Page 297: ... 1 Cautions 1 Note that data is incremented in every operation cycle in a continuous operation type instruction 2 Flag operations 1 16 bit operation When 32767 is incremented by 1 the result is 32768 Flags zero carry and borrow are not activated at this time 2 32 bit operation When 2 147 483 647 is incremented by 1 the result is 2 147 483 648 Flags zero carry and borrow are not activated at this t...

Page 298: ...ment Program example X010 M 1 X011 FNC 12 MOVP K 0 Z FNC 18 BCDP C 0Z K4Y000 FNC 24 INCP Z FNC 10 CMPP K 10 Z M 0 0 Z C 0Z K4Y000 BIN BCD Z 1 Z When Z is 10 M1 turns ON The current values of counters C0 to C9 are converted into BCD format and output to K4Y000 Z is cleared by the reset input X010 Every time X011 is set to ON the current values of C0 C1 C9 are output one at a time ...

Page 299: ...ed by 1 and the decremented result is transferred to 1 Cautions 1 Flag operations 1 16 bit operation When 32768 is decremented by 1 the result is 32767 Flags zero carry and borrow are not activated at this time 2 32 bit operation When 2 147 483 648 is decremented by 1 the result is 2 147 483 647 Flags zero carry and borrow are not activated at this time Operand type Description Data type Word devi...

Page 300: ...ogical product operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 ON 0 OFF Operand type Description Data type Data used for logical product or word device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Data used for logical product or word device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Word device number storing the logical product result 16 or 32 bit binary Oper ...

Page 301: ...on is executed to the contents of 1 and 1 in units of bit and the result is transferred to 1 While the command input is OFF the data of the transfer destination 1 does not change While the command input is ON the data of the transfer source 1 1 do not change When a constant K is specified in the transfer source 1 1 it is automatically converted into the binary format The logical product operation ...

Page 302: ...he logical sum operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 ON 0 OFF Operand type Description Data type Data used for logical sum or word device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Data used for logical sum or word device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Word device number storing the logical sum result 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit...

Page 303: ...n is executed to the contents of 1 and 1 in units of bit and the result is transferred to 1 While the command input is OFF the data of the transfer destination 1 does not change While the command input is ON the data of the transfer source 1 1 do not change When a constant K is specified in the transfer source 1 1 it is automatically converted into the binary format The logical sum operation is ex...

Page 304: ...ical exclusive sum operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 ON 0 OFF Operand type Description Data type Data used for exclusive logical sum or word device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Data used for exclusive logical sum or word device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Word device number storing the exclusive logical sum result 16 ...

Page 305: ... to 1 While the command input is OFF the data of the transfer destination 1 does not change While the command input is ON the data of the transfer source 1 1 do not change When a constant K is specified in the transfer source 1 1 it is automatically converted into the binary format The exclusive logical sum operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1...

Page 306: ...d then the result is stored in the original device Caution Note that the complement is obtained in every operation cycle in a continuous operation type instruction Operand type Description Data type Word device number which stores data for obtaining complement and will store the operation result The operation result will be stored in the same word device number 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bi...

Page 307: ...nt When the most significant bit is 1 it is a negative value and its absolute value can be obtained by NEG instruction M 0 FNC 29 NEGP D 10 M8000 FNC 44 BON D 10 M 0 K 15 RUN monitor In BON ON bit check instruction M0 turns ON when the bit 15 b15 among b0 to b15 of D10 is 1 NEGP instruction is executed for D10 only when M0 turns ON D10 D10 X000 M 10 M 11 M 12 FNC 21 SUB D 10 D 20 D 30 FNC 21 SUB D...

Page 308: ... Function Reference 30 ROR Rotation Right Section 11 1 31 ROL Rotation Left Section 11 2 32 RCR Rotation Right with Carry Section 11 3 33 RCL Rotation Left with Carry Section 11 4 34 SFTR Bit Shift Right Section 11 5 35 SFTL Bit Shift Left Section 11 6 36 WSFR Word Shift Right Section 11 7 37 WSFL Word Shift Left Section 11 8 38 SFWR Shift write FIFO FILO control Section 11 9 39 SFRD Shift read FI...

Page 309: ...M8022 In a device with digit specification K4 16 bit instruction is valid Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing data to be rotated rightward 16 or 32 bit binary n Number of bits to be rotated n 16 16 bit instruction n 32 32 bit instruction 1 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con s...

Page 310: ... the 32 bit value n 1 n is valid when D or R is specified as n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DROR D100 R0 n is R1 R0 Device Name Description M8022 Carry Turns ON when the bit shifted last from the lowest position is 1 D D Command input FNC 30 DRORP n D 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 Carry flag M8022 Low order Carry flag b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Before shift b3 t...

Page 311: ...M8022 In a device with digit specification K4 16 bit instruction is valid Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing data to be rotated leftward 16 or 32 bit binary n Number of bits to be rotated n 16 16 bit instruction n 32 32 bit instruction 1 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con st...

Page 312: ...Note that the 32 bit value n 1 n is valid when D or R is specified as n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DROL D100 R0 n is R1 R0 Device Name Description M8022 Carry Turns ON when the bit shifted last from the highest position is 1 D D Command input FNC 31 DROLP n D High order 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Low order High order Low order Leftward rotation b31b...

Page 313: ...lag is transferred to the destination Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing data to be rotated rightward 16 or 32 bit binary n Number of bits to be rotated n 16 16 bit instruction n 32 32 bit instruction 1 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String P...

Page 314: ... instruction In the case of DRCR D100 R0 n is R1 R0 Device Name Description M8022 Carry Turns ON when the bit shifted last from the lowest position is 1 D D Before shift b3 Carry flag M8022 When M8022 is OFF 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 Carry flag M8022 Low order b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 After the instruction is executed once High order 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 315: ...ag is transferred to the destination Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing data to be rotated leftward 16 or 32 bit binary n Number of bits to be rotated n 16 16 bit instruction n 32 32 bit instruction 1 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Poi...

Page 316: ... In the case of DRCL D100 R0 n is R1 R0 Device Name Description M8022 Carry Turns ON when the bit shifted last from the highest position is 1 D D Command input FNC 33 DRCLP n D Carry flag When M8022 is ON 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 Low order b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 After the instruction is executed once High order 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 b31b30b29b28b27b26b2...

Page 317: ... 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 1 Do not set a negative value to the number of bits to be shifted rightward 3 Applicable devices S D b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs However index modifiers V and Z are not available Operand Type Description Data Type Head bit device number to be stored to the shift data after rightward shift Bit Head bit device number to be shifted rightward Bit n1 Bit ...

Page 318: ...shifted every time the command input turns ON from OFF in SFTRP instruction but that n2 bits are shifted in each scan time operation cycle in SFTR instruction Error If the transfer source is equivalent to the shifted device in FX3U FX3UC PLCs an operation error occurs error code K6710 An operation error does not occur in FX3G PLCs D S D Command input FNC 34 SFTRP n1 n2 D S 2 8 Before execution Aft...

Page 319: ...t 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 1 Do not set a negative value to the number of bits to be shifted leftward 3 Applicable devices S D b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs However index modifiers V and Z are not available Operand Type Description Data Type Head bit device number to be stored to the shift data after leftward shift Bit Head bit device number to be shifted leftward Bit n1 Bit le...

Page 320: ...e shifted every time the command input turns ON from OFF in SFTLP instruction but that n2 bits are shifted in each operation cycle in SFTL instruction Error If the transfer source is equivalent to the shifted device in FX3U FX3UC PLCs an operation error occurs error code K6710 An operation error does not occur in FX3G PLCs D S D 8 2 n2 in the case of n2 3 n1 in the case of n1 9 1 Overflow data to ...

Page 321: ... 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Program example conditional stepping of 1 bit data By setting X000 to X007 to ON in turn Y000 to Y007 are activated in turn If the order is wrong activation is disabled X000 S 0 M8046 S 1 S 7 M8000 X000 M8046 X001 X002 X000 FNC 35 SFTL M 0 S 0 K 8 K 1 M 0 Head data Data input FNC 12 MOV K2S 0 K2Y000 END S 7 to S 0 Y007 to Y000 Bit 1 of M0 is regarded as the he...

Page 322: ...LCs M100 Input data M101 to M117 octal number 15 step shift register 2 FX3G FX3U and FX3UC PLCs X000 X001 X002 OUT SFT RST M100 M117 data input shift input reset input LD OUT LD SFT LD RST Circuit program List program 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 X000 M100 X001 M100 X002 M100 X000 FNC 35 SFTLP M100 M101 K 15 K 1 X001 X002 FNC 40 ZRST M101 M115 M100 data input shift input reset input M101 to M115 ...

Page 323: ...ion and operation 1 16 bit operation WSFR and WSFRP For n1 word devices starting from n2 words are shifted rightward 1 and 2 shown below After shift n2 words starting from are shifted to n2 words starting from n1 n2 3 shown below Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number to be stored to the shift data after rightward shift 16 bit binary Head word device number storing data to be shifte...

Page 324: ... code K6710 Program example 1 Shifting devices with digit specification 2 8 2 n2 in the case of n2 3 n1 in the case of n1 9 1 Overflow data to be deleted 1 D 7 6 5 4 3 D 1 8 D 7 6 5 D 4 3 2 1 8 to 3 before shift n2 3 D 3 Copy 2 n2 bits are shifted rightward n2 3 2 to before shift n2 3 S Before execution After execution S S S D D D D D D D D D D D D D D S D S D 3 2 1 X007 X006 X005 X004 X003 X002 X...

Page 325: ...n of function and operation 1 16 bit operation WSFL and WSFLP For n1 word devices starting from n2 words are shifted leftward 1 and 2 shown below After shift n2 words starting from are shifted to n2 words starting from 3 shown below Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number to be stored to the shift data after leftward shift 16 bit binary Head word device number storing data to be shif...

Page 326: ...curs error code K6710 Program example 1 Shifting devices with digit specification 8 2 n2 in the case of n2 3 n1 in the case of n1 9 1 Overflow data to be deleted 1 D 7 6 5 4 3 8 7 6 D 5 4 3 2 D 1 5 to before shift n2 3 D 3 Copy 2 n2 bits are shifted leftward n2 3 2 to before shift n2 3 2 1 D Before execution After execution S S S D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D S S S D 3 2 1 X007 X006 X005 X004 X003...

Page 327: ...control 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 1 1 is required for the pointer 3 Applicable devices S This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing data to be put in first 16 bit binary Head word device number storing data The first word device works as the pointer and data is stored in 1 and later 16 bit binary n Number of store points p...

Page 328: ...e the pulse operation type SFWRP instruction in programming 3 Data are stored from the right end in the same way and the number of stored data is specified by the contents of the pointer Related device For the carry flag use method refer to Subsection 6 5 2 Related instructions Caution 1 In the case of continuous operation type SFWR instruction Note that data are stored overwritten in each scan ti...

Page 329: ...mber is hexadecimal and up to 4 digits Up to 99 products can be stored in the warehouse 2 Program X020 FNC 12 MOVP K4X000 D256 FNC 38 SFWRP D256 D257 K100 X021 FNC 39 SFRDP D257 D357 K100 FNC 12 MOV D357 K4Y000 M8000 RUN monitor Button for request to take a product out of warehouse Button for request to put a product into warehouse The product number is input from X000 to X017 and transferred to D...

Page 330: ...ord 1 is subtracted from the number of data stored in Operand Type Description Data Type Head word device number storing data The first word device works as the pointer and data is stored in 1 and later 16 bit binary Word device number storing data taken out first 2 n 512 16 bit binary n Number of store points plus 1 1 2 n 512 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User...

Page 331: ... Related device For the zero flag use method refer to Subsection 6 5 2 Related instructions Caution 1 Data after reading was executed The contents of n do not change by reading 2 In the case of continuous operation type SFRD instruction Data is read in turn in each scan time operation cycle but the contents of n do not change 3 When pointer is 0 Data is not processed and the contents of do not cha...

Page 332: ...ting special processing FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 40 ZRST Zone Reset Section 12 1 41 DECO Decode Section 12 2 42 ENCO Encode Section 12 3 43 SUM Sum of Active Bits Section 12 4 44 BON Check Specified Bit Status Section 12 5 45 MEAN Mean Section 12 6 46 ANS Timed Annunciator Set Section 12 7 47 ANR Annunciator Reset Section 12 8 48 SQR Square Root Section 12 9 49 FLT Conversion to F...

Page 333: ...tion 1 16 bit operation ZRST and ZRSTP Same type of devices from to are reset at one time When and are bit devices 1 OFF reset is written to the entire range from to at one time Operand type Description Data type Head bit or word device number to be reset at one time Specify same type of devices 16 bit binary Last bit or word device number to be reset at one time 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit De...

Page 334: ...tion 0 can be written to word devices KnY KnM KnS T C D and R at one time Cautions 1 Caution on specifying devices Specify same type of devices in and The device number of should be smaller than or equal to the device number of If the device number of is larger than the device number of only one device specified in is reset D1 D1 D1 D2 D1 D1 D1 D2 FNC 40 ZRST Devices through are reset at one time ...

Page 335: ... can be specified in and However it is not possible to specify a 16 bit counter in and specify a 32 bit counter in and should be a same type Example Program example 1 When using devices in the latch area as non latch type devices In the program shown below when the power of the PLC is turned ON or when the PLC mode is changed to RUN the specified ranges of bit devices and word devices are reset at...

Page 336: ...ing result 16 bit binary n Number of bits of device storing the decoding result n 1 to 8 No processing is executed in the case of n 0 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ...

Page 337: ...ressed in 2n on the low order side of is decoded to When all bits of are 0 b0 of the word device turns ON In the case of n 3 all of high order bits of become 0 turn OFF Caution While the command input is OFF the instruction is not executed The activated decode output is held in the previous ON OFF status When n is 0 the instruction executes no processing D1 D D1 S D1 D D1 S D1 D D1 D Turns ON when...

Page 338: ...word devices according to the contents of bit devices The value expressed by X000 to X002 is decoded to D0 X000 and X001 are ON and X002 is OFF in this example When the values expressed by X000 to X002 are 3 1 2 0 b3 which is the 4th from b0 becomes 1 turns ON When all of X000 to X002 are 0 OFF b0 becomes 1 turns ON M8000 FNC 41 DECO D 0 M 0 K 4 S D n Turns ON when D0 is K0 D0 b4 to b15 0 0 0 0 1 ...

Page 339: ...sitions among 2n bits 1 n 8 from are encoded to When n is 8 28 256 bits which is the maximum value are occupied The encoding result of is 0 OFF from the most significant bit to the low order bit n Operand type Description Data type Data to be encoded or word device number storing data 16 bit binary Word device number storing the encoding result 16 bit binary n Number of bits of device storing the ...

Page 340: ...e low order bit n Cautions 1 When two or more bits are ON in the data The low order side is ignored and only the ON position on the high order side is encoded 2 While the command input is OFF The instruction is not executed Activated encode outputs are latched in the previous ON OFF status D1 S D1 S D1 D D1 D Command input FNC 42 ENCO n S D When it is T C D R U G V or Z 1 n 4 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1...

Page 341: ...ON Operand type Description Data type Word device number storing the source data 16 or 32 bit binary Word device number storing the result data 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ...

Page 342: ... 1 0 6 0006 2 OFF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7 0007 3 OFF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8 0008 1 OFF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 9 0009 2 OFF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 10 000A 2 OFF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 11 000B 3 OFF OFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 5 FFFB 15 OFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 4 FFFC 14 OFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 3 FFFD 15 OFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1...

Page 343: ...NC139 Floating Point 19 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Caution While the command input is OFF the instruction is not executed The output of the number of bits in the ON status is latched in the previous status Program example When X000 is ON the number of bits in the ON status in D0 is counted and stored to D2 X000 S D The number of 1 in D0 is stored to D2 FNC ...

Page 344: ...ype Description Data type Word device number storing the source data 16 or 32 bit binary Bit device number to be driven 16 or 32 bit binary n Bit position to be checked n 0 to 15 16 bit instruction 0 to 31 32 bit instruction 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointe...

Page 345: ... When the bit n is OFF is set to OFF When a constant K is specified as the transfer source 1 it is automatically converted into the binary format Caution Note that the 32 bit value n 1 n is valid when D or R is specified as n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DBON D0 M0 R0 n is R1 R0 Program example When the bit 9 n 9 in D10 is 1 ON M0 is set to 1 ON D1 S D1 S D1 D D1 D D1 D D1 S D1 S 1 Comma...

Page 346: ...d Operand type Description Data type Head word device number storing data to be averaged 16 or 32 bit binary Word device number storing the mean value result 16 or 32 bit binary n Number of data to be averaged 1 n 64 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M ...

Page 347: ...Data Transfer 2 18 FNC110 FNC139 Floating Point 19 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Caution When a device number is exceeded n is handled as a smaller value in the possible range Note that the 32 bit value n 1 n is valid when D or R is specified as n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DMEAN D0 D100 R0 n is R1 R0 Error When n is any value outside the range fro...

Page 348: ...Timer number for evaluation time 16 bit binary m Evaluation time data m 1 to 32767 unit 100 ms 16 bit binary Annunciator device to be set 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P S1 3 m 3 3 3 3 S2 3 Device N...

Page 349: ...monitor Y005 Forward movement X000 FNC 46 ANS Forward end X001 Upper limit X002 Lower limit FNC 46 ANS X003 Continuous X004 Cycle FNC 46 ANS M8049 Y005 X005 Forward movement M8048 Annunciator ON Y006 Fault display X007 Reset FNC 47 ANRP END T 0 K 10 S900 T 1 K 20 S901 T 2 K100 S902 0 3 3 12 21 30 32 34 36 When M8049 turns ON monitoring becomes valid If the forward end detection input X000 does not...

Page 350: ...ciators in the ON status are reset in turn in each operation cycle When ANRP instruction is used an annunciator in the ON status is reset only in one operation cycle only once Program example Refer to ANS FNC 46 instruction For a program example refer to Section 12 7 Operand type Description Data type There is no set data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specificatio...

Page 351: ...calculated and stored to 2 32 bit operation DSQR and DSQRP The square root of the data stored in 1 is calculated and stored to 1 Caution 1 Operation result 1 The obtained square root is an integer because the decimal point is ignored When the calculated value is ignored M8021 borrow flag turns ON 2 When the calculated value is true 0 M8020 zero flag turns ON Operand type Description Data type Word...

Page 352: ...llers Programming Manual Basic Applied Instruction Edition 12 Data Operation FNC 40 to FNC 49 12 9 FNC 48 SQR Square Root Program example X000 S D D 10 D 12 FNC 48 SQR D 10 D 12 100 10 The square root of D10 is stored to D12 The value of D10 is 100 ...

Page 353: ...nt K or H into floating point value The value of a K or H specified in each instruction for binary floating point real number operation is automatically converted into binary floating point real number It is not necessary to convert such a constant using by FLT instruction K and H cannot be specified in RAD DEG EXP and LOGE instructions Operand type Description Data type Data register number stori...

Page 354: ...ating point operation 4 6 D 13 D 12 Scientific notation operation for monitoring D 15 D 14 32 bit binary integer 7 8 M8000 FNC 49 FLT D 0 D 20 FNC 19 BIN K2X010 D 22 FNC 49 FLT D 22 D 24 FNC 123 DEDIV D 20 D 24 D 28 FNC 122 DEMUL D 28 D 26 D 10 FNC 118 DEBCD D 10 D 12 FNC 129 DINT D 10 D 14 D 0 D21 D20 BIN Binary floating point operation X017 to X010 D22 BCD BIN D22 D25 D24 BIN Binary floating poi...

Page 355: ... interrupt processing type high speed instructions that execute sequence control using the latest I O information and utilize the high speed processing performance of the PLC FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 50 REF Refresh Section 13 1 51 REFF Refresh and filter adjust Section 13 2 52 MTR Input Matrix Section 13 3 53 HSCS High speed counter set Section 13 4 54 HSCR High speed counter rese...

Page 356: ... S3 FX3U FX3UC PLCs K8 H8 or K16 H10 Up to K256 H100 which is a multiple of 8 FX3G PLC K8 H8 or K16 H10 Up to K128 H80 which is a multiple of 8 Operand Type Description Data Type Head bit device X or Y number to be refreshed Bit n Number of bit devices to be refreshed FX3U FX3UC multiple of 8 in the range from 8 to 256 FX3G multiple of 8 in the range from 8 to 128 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit D...

Page 357: ...evice n must be a multiple of 8 If the input information is turned ON approximately 10 ms response delay time of the input filter before the instruction is executed the input image memory turns ON when the instruction is executed In X000 to X017 1 the response delay time of the input filter can be changed 1 X000 to X007 in the FX3G FX3U 16M and FX3UC 16M For details refer to 13 1 1 What should be ...

Page 358: ...east significant digit number is 0 such as X000 X010 X020 or Y000 Y010 Y020 Program examples 1 When refreshing inputs Only X010 to X017 8 points in total are refreshed 2 When refreshing outputs Y000 to Y007 Y010 to Y017 and Y020 to Y027 24 points in total are refreshed ON ON 20ms 5ms 10ms 10ms Does not turn ON ON 10ms Input signal X Filter time Input refresh REF instruction END processing END inst...

Page 359: ...ber 1 Relay output type The output contact is activated after the response time of the output relay Y000 and higher Approximately 10 ms 2 Transistor output type a FX3U FX3UC D DSS PLC Y000 Y001 and Y002 5µs or less load current 10 mA or more 5 to 24V DC Y003 and higher 0 2ms or less load current 100 mA 24V DC b FX3UC 32MT LT 2 PLC Y000 Y001 Y002 and Y003 5µs or less load current 10 mA or more 5 to...

Page 360: ...ruction is executed the image memory is set to ON When the input turns OFF n 1 ms before the instruction is executed the image memory is set to OFF When the command input is ON the REFF instruction is executed in each operation cycle When the command input is OFF the REFF instruction is not executed and the input filter of X000 to X017 1 uses the set value of D8020 which is the value used during i...

Page 361: ... FX3UC 16M 2 When setting the input filter time to 5 µs perform the following actions Make sure that the wiring length is 5 m or less Connect a bleeder resistor of 1 5 kΩ 1 W or more to the input terminal and make sure that the load current in the open collector transistor output of the external equipment is 20 mA or more including the input current of the main unit 3 The filter time is fixed to 1...

Page 362: ... which is used during execution of the END instruction can be changed 2 X000 to X007 in the FX3U 16M FX3UC 16M 2 Instruction in which the digital filter is automatically changed Regardless of the change in the filter time executed by the REFF instruction when the following functions and instruction are executed the input filter value is automatically changed to 5 µs in X000 to X005 and 50 µs in X0...

Page 363: ...very 20 ms under consideration of the input filter response delay of 10 ms Operand Type Description Data Type Input device X number of matrix signal input X000 X010 X020 final input device number Only 0 is allowed in the least significant digit of device numbers Bit Head device Y number of matrix signal output Y000 Y010 Y020 final output device number Only 0 is allowed in the least significant dig...

Page 364: ...ut device number specified in When specifying the output in make sure that n output numbers specified in does not overlap the output specified in 2 Wiring One diode of 0 1 A 50 V is required for each switch 3 Output format Use the transistor output format Device Name Description M8029 Instruction execution complete Turns ON after the first cycle operation Command contact M8029 execution complete 1...

Page 365: ... and stored to M30 to M37 M40 to M47 and M50 to M57 respectively In this program example the FX3U series main unit sink input sink output is used For writing details refer to the following manuals of the PLC used FX3G Hardware Edition FX3U Hardware Edition FX3UC Hardware Edition X021 M 51 X022 M 52 X023 M 53 X024 M 54 X025 M 55 X026 M 56 X027 M 57 M 50 M 40 COM Y020Y021Y022Y023Y024Y025Y026Y027 S S...

Page 366: ...ruction For pull up resistors use the power supply shown in the table below The figure below shows an example of the FX3U Series main unit sink input sink output 1 X000 to X007 in the FX3G FX3U 16M and FX3UC 16M 3 ON OFF duration of input signals Because 64 input points 8 rows 8 columns are received in a cycle of 80 or 160 ms the ON OFF duration of each input signal should be greater than or equal...

Page 367: ...pt using HSCS instruction refer to Section 36 6 Explanation of function and operation 1 32 bit operation DHSCS When the current value of a high speed counter C235 to C255 specified in becomes the comparison value 1 for example when the current value changes from 199 to 200 or from 201 to 200 if the comparison value is K200 the bit device is set to ON without regard to the operation cycle This inst...

Page 368: ...uction or general purpose comparison instruction a Case to select DHSCS instruction When the output should be given when the counting result becomes equivalent to the comparison value without regard to the scan time of the PLC b Cases to select a general purpose comparison instruction When the frequency is beyond the counting performance of software counters and below the counting performance of h...

Page 369: ... be ignored in operations according to the counting result When an instruction is used 6 times or more 2 Device specification range Only high speed counters C235 to C255 can be specified as 3 Only 32 bit operation instructions are available Because instructions for high speed counters are dedicated to 32 bits make sure to input DHSCS FNC 53 4 Priority order in operation among HSCS FNC 53 HSCR FNC ...

Page 370: ...uency of high speed counters is limited For the maximum response frequency and total frequency in FX3U FX3UC PLCs refer to Subsection 4 7 10 For the total frequency in FX3G PLCs refer to Subsection 4 8 7 3 Specification of output numbers Y When using the same instruction for high speed counter repeatedly or when driving two or more other instructions for high speed counter at the same time specify...

Page 371: ...the condition for setting the output to ON or OFF is given as the comparison result the comparison result does not change when an instruction is simply driven 5 Reset operation by an external terminal M8025 1 HSC external reset mode For a high speed counter equipped with an external reset terminal R such as C241 an instruction is executed and the comparison result is output at the rising edge of t...

Page 372: ...output may not operate within the short time before the counter s present value is reset to 0 Program sequence Processing sequence FX3U FX3UC FX2N FX2NC FX3G FX1N FX1S FX1NC DHSCS 1 DHSCR 6 self reset DHSCS 1 DHSCS 1 DHSCS 2 DHSZ 4 DHSCS 2 DHSCS 2 DHSCR 3 DHSCS 1 DHSCR 3 DHSCR 3 DHSZ 4 DHSCS 2 DHSZ 4 DHSZ 4 1 DHSCR 5 DHSCR 3 DHSCR 5 DHSCR 5 DHSCR 6 self reset DHSCR 5 DHSCR 6 self reset DHSCR 6 sel...

Page 373: ... 1 32 bit operation DHSCR When the current value of a high speed counter C235 to C255 specified in becomes the comparison value 1 for example when the current value changes from 199 to 200 or from 201 to 200 if the comparison value is K200 the bit device is reset set to OFF regardless of the operation cycle In this instruction the comparison processing is executed after the counting processing in ...

Page 374: ...CR instruction or general purpose comparison instruction a Case to select DHSCR instruction When the output should be given when the counting result becomes equivalent to the comparison value regardless of the scan time of the PLC b Cases to select a general purpose comparison instruction When the frequency is beyond the counting performance of software counters and below the counting performance ...

Page 375: ...regarded as important but the effect of the scan time can be ignored in operations according to the counting result When an instruction is used 6 times or more 2 Only 32 bit operation instructions are available Because instructions for high speed counters are dedicated to 32 bits make sure to input DHSCR FNC 54 3 Priority order in operation among HSCS FNC 53 HSCR FNC 54 and HSZ FNC 55 instructions...

Page 376: ... and 2 is set to ON regardless of the operation cycle In this instruction the comparison processing is executed after the count processing in the high speed counter Operand Type Description Data Type Data to be compared with the current value of a high speed counter or word device number storing data to be compared comparison value 1 32 bit binary Data to be compared with the current value of a hi...

Page 377: ...2 Related instructions The following instructions can be combined with high speed counters Comparison point Contents 32 bits Comparison value 1 1 Comparison value 2 1 Comparison pattern Current value of C251 Change of output contact Y Y000 Y001 Y002 1000 ON OFF OFF 999 1000 ON OFF OFF ON OFF 999 1000 OFF ON ON OFF OFF 999 1000 ON OFF OFF ON OFF 999 1000 OFF ON ON OFF OFF 1000 2000 OFF ON OFF 2000 ...

Page 378: ...d below the counting performance of hardware counters When counting is important but the effect of the scan time can be ignored in operations depending on the counting result When the number in an instruction is more than 32 2 FX3G PLCs When the HSZ instruction is used in FX3G PLCs the total frequency of each counter is affected Refer to the counting operation described below and select according ...

Page 379: ...DHSZ instruction executes comparison and outputs the result only when a counting pulse is input to a high speed counter When is 1000 and is 1999 the output is set to ON as soon as the current value of C235 changes from 999 to 1000 or from 1999 to 2000 2 Because the comparison result cannot be obtained when restoring the power or when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN the result is not output ...

Page 380: ...OFF if the current value of a high speed counter C235 in the example below is 0 when restoring the power 1 For initializing Y010 the current value of C235 is compared with K1000 and K1200 and Y010 is driven using the DZCPP instruction for general zone comparison as pulse operation only upon startup 2 The comparison result in Y010 is latched until an input pulse is input and the comparison output i...

Page 381: ...NC49 Data Operation 13 FNC50 FNC59 High Speed Processing 14 FMC60 FNC69 Handy Instruction 15 FNC70 FNC79 External FX I O Device 16 FNC80 FNC89 External FX Device 17 FNC100 FNC109 Data Transfer 2 18 FNC110 FNC139 Floating Point 19 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control input pulse for C235 X000 smaller than zone X010 inside zone Y010 larger than zone Y011 present value ...

Page 382: ...e as Because one line in the comparison table uses four devices 4 devices are occupied from 2 Specify the number of lines in the comparison table as The created table starts from the head register and has the number of lines specified in 3 Comparison data Make sure that the comparison data is 32 bits Operand Type Description Data Type Head word device number storing the data table only data regist...

Page 383: ...ctly controlled as interrupt 2 Operation Contents of setting Set ON K1 H1 Reset OFF K0 H0 FNC 12 DMOV K123 D200 FNC 12 MOV H10 D202 M8002 FNC 12 MOV K1 D203 FNC 12 DMOV K234 D204 FNC 12 MOV H10 D206 FNC 12 MOV K0 D207 FNC 12 DMOV K345 D208 FNC 12 MOV H11 D210 FNC 12 MOV K1 D211 FNC 12 DMOV K456 D212 FNC 12 MOV H11 D214 FNC 12 MOV K0 D215 FNC 12 DMOV K567 D216 FNC 12 MOV H11 D218 FNC 12 MOV K1 D219...

Page 384: ... the number of DHSZ instruction This instruction can be programmed only once in a program With regard to the DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ and DHSCT instructions used for other purposes up to 32 instructions including the DHSZ instruction can be driven at one time 2 When the command input is set to OFF in the middle of execution Execution of the instruction is aborted and the table counter D8130 is reset to K0...

Page 385: ...ency control mode is specified as in the DHSZ instruction the special function shown below is provided if DPLSY instruction is combined At this time only a data register D can be specified as and a constant K or H can be specified as The available range is limited to 1 K H 128 A high speed counter C235 to C255 can be specified as This function is different from the zone comparison described above ...

Page 386: ...0 specifies continuous output Pulse output M10 FNC 12 DMOVP K20 D300 FNC 12 DMOVP K300 D302 FNC 12 DMOVP K600 D304 FNC 12 DMOVP K500 D306 FNC 12 DMOVP K700 D308 FNC 12 DMOVP K200 D310 FNC 12 DMOVP K800 D312 FNC 12 DMOVP K100 D314 FNC 12 DMOVP K0 D316 FNC 12 DMOVP K0 D318 Comparison data Frequency Comparison data Frequency Comparison data Frequency Comparison data Frequency Comparison data Frequenc...

Page 387: ...the pulse output turns OFF and the table counter D8131 is reset 7 After DHSZ instruction is first executed creation of the table is completed at the END instruction The DHSZ instruction becomes valid after that 8 Accordingly the contact of PLS M10 is used so that the PLSY instruction is executed from the second scan after the command input has been set to ON Data can be written to the table in a p...

Page 388: ... in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Operand Type Description Data Type Device number of pulse input X Bit Time data ms or word device number storing the data 16 or 32 bit binary Head word device number storing the pulse density data 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Constant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T...

Page 389: ...ored in the present value is stored in 1 and the remaining time is stored in 2 ms By repeating this operation the measured value will store the pulse density which is proportional to the rotation speed 1 Timing chart 2 The measured value is in proportion to the number of rotations as shown below S1 S2 D D D D FNC 56 SPD S1 D S2 Command input Measured value The command contact is set to ON Command ...

Page 390: ...t 2 The measured value 1 is in proportion to the number of rotations as shown below S1 S2 S2 D D D D D D D D FNC 56 DSPD S1 D S2 Command input Command input Measured value ms S1 Current value ms Remaining time ms The command contact is set to ON 3 2 counts OFF ON operation of 1 ms later the counting result is stored to 1 Accompanied by this operation 3 2 is reset and then counting of the OFF ON op...

Page 391: ...g actions Make sure that the wiring length is 5 m or less Connect a bleeder resistor of 1 5 kΩ 1 W or more to the input terminal and make sure that the load current in the open collector transistor output of the external equipment is 20 mA or more FX3G PLCs 2 Occupied devices 1 When using the 16 bit operation Three devices are occupied from a device specified in 2 When using the 32 bit operation S...

Page 392: ...ncy in Allowable setting range 1 to 32767 Hz Specify the generated pulse quantity in Allowable setting range 1 to 32767 PLS Specify the output Y number from which pulses are to be output in Allowable setting range Y000 Y001 Operand Type Description Data Type Output pulse frequency 16 or 32 bit binary Number of output pulses 16 or 32 bit binary Device number Y from which pulses are output Bit Oper ...

Page 393: ...ing range Y000 Y001 For the method to output pulses without any limitation refer to the program example later Related devices 1 Instruction execution complete flag The instruction execution complete flag M8029 used for PLSY instruction can be used also for other instructions When using other instructions setting the M8029 flag to ON or OFF or using two or more PLSY instructions make sure to use ea...

Page 394: ...e main unit set the output frequency to 100 000 Hz or less If the load is operated using pulses at a frequency higher than 100 000 Hz the PLC may be damaged 3 Pulse output Only a transistor output on the main unit or Y000 or Y001 on a special high speed output adapter 1 can be specified in When using the PLSY FNC 57 instruction with a relay output type FX3U PLC a special high speed output adapter ...

Page 395: ... manipulate the pulse output form setting switch while pulses are being output 4 When special high speed output adapters are connected the same output numbers in the main unit are assigned as shown in the table below Only wire the appropriate output terminals Outputs in special high speed output adapters and the main unit operate as shown below Assignment of output numbers in special high speed ou...

Page 396: ...e same output relay cannot be executed Before executing such an instruction wait until the pulse output monitor flag turns OFF and one or more operation cycles pass 3 Frequency control mode in which DHSZ FNC 55 and PLSY FNC 57 instructions are combined can be used only once in a program Program example when outputting pulses without any limitation When is set to K0 pulses are output without any li...

Page 397: ...d 24 point type FX3G PLCs 2 High speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit operation PWM Pulses whose ON pulse width is ms are output in periods of ms Specify the pulse width t in Allowable setting range 0 to 32767 ms Specify the period T0 in Allowable setting range 1 to 32767 ms Specify the output Y number from which pulses are ...

Page 398: ...hen specifying Y002 or Y003 on a special high speed output adapter a second special high speed output adapter is required 3 Y002 is not available in 14 point and 24 point type FX3G PLC The pulse output is controlled by interrupt processing not affected by the sequence program operation cycle If the command input is set to OFF the output from turns OFF While a pulse output monitor BUSY READY flag i...

Page 399: ...ulse chain FPxRP side normal operations are not possible The pulse output destination changes depending on the output status as shown in the table below 3 Set the pulse output type setting switch while the PLC is stopped or while the power is OFF Do not adjust the pulse output type setting switch while pulses are being output Pulse output destination Output affecting operation Operation Y000 Y004 ...

Page 400: ...nt of the filter should be considerably larger than the pulse cycle T0 The ripple value e in the mean output current e is approximately e e T0 τ Setting status of output form setting switch Signal name Setting name in each positioning instruction Output number 1st unit 2nd unit 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis FPxRP side Forward rotation pulse chain FP Pulse output destination Y000 Y001 Y002 Y0...

Page 401: ... frequency Hz Allowable setting range 10 to 32767 Hz Total number of output pulses PLS Allowable setting range FX3G 110 to 32767 PLS FX3U X3UC 1 to 32767 PLS Acceleration deceleration time ms Allowable setting range 50 to 5000 ms Pulse output number Allowable setting range Y000 Y001 Operand Type Description Data Type Maximum frequency Hz 16 or 32 bit binary Total number of output pulses PLS 16 or ...

Page 402: ...t specifications Simple positioning with the acceleration deceleration function The operation pattern is as shown below Output processing The pulse output is controlled by the dedicated hardware regardless of the operation cycle Data change while the instruction is executed Even if operands are overwritten while the instruction is executed such changes are not reflected immediately The changes bec...

Page 403: ...ss If the load is operated using pulses at a frequency higher than 100 000 Hz from transistor outputs in the main unit the PLC may be damaged 2 Pulse output Only a transistor output on the main unit or Y000 or Y001 on a special high speed output adapter 1 can be specified in 1 High speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC When using the PLSR FNC 59 instruction with a relay o...

Page 404: ...anipulate the pulse output type setting switch while pulses are being output 4 When special high speed output adapters are connected the same output numbers in the main unit are assigned as shown in the table below Only wire the appropriate output terminals Outputs in special high speed output adapters and the main unit operate as shown below Assignment of output numbers in special high speed outp...

Page 405: ...output relay cannot be executed While a pulse output monitor flag is ON even after the instruction drive contact is set to OFF a pulse output or positioning instruction for the same output relay cannot be executed Before executing a pulse output or positioning instruction wait until the pulse output monitor flag turns OFF and one or more operation cycles pass Output operation Relay output type mai...

Page 406: ...ce 60 IST Initial State Section 14 1 61 SER Search a Data Stack Section 14 2 62 ABSD Absolute drum sequencer Section 14 3 63 INCD Incremental drum sequencer Section 14 4 64 TTMR Teaching Timer Section 14 5 65 STMR Special Timer Section 14 6 66 ALT Alternate State Section 14 7 67 RAMP Ramp Variable Value Section 14 8 68 ROTC Rotary Table Control Section 14 9 69 SORT SORT Tabulated Data Section 14 1...

Page 407: ...below it is necessary to set X020 to X024 as rotary switches so that they do not turn ON at the same time It is not necessary to wire unused switches but they cannot be used for any other purpose because they are occupied by IST instruction Specify the smallest device number of practical state relays in for the automatic mode Specify the largest device number of practical state relays in for the a...

Page 408: ...ary to use all switches for mode selection When some switches are not used leave the corresponding numbers in the unused status Such numbers cannot be used for any other purpose 2 Programming order of IST instruction and STL instruction IST instruction should be programmed earlier than a series of STL circuit such as state relays S0 to S2 3 State relays used for the zero return operation Use the s...

Page 409: ...operation X023 Cycle operation X024 Continuous operation Transfer start X026Automatic start X026 Automatic start X020 Individual operation Start pulse X025Zero return start M8042 X020 M8040 Individual operation STL transfer disable X021 Zero return X027 M8042 Start pulse Stop X022Stepping operation X023Cycle operation X027Stop M8002 Initial pulse M8040 Self holding M8000 M8047 RUN monitor Enable S...

Page 410: ...achine performs the continuous operation from the last position and automatically stops at the zero point Continuous operation mode When the start button is pressed while the machine is located at the zero point the machine starts continuous operation When the stop button is pressed the machine finishes the current cycle until the zero point and then stops at the zero point Unclamping Y001 Pushbut...

Page 411: ... transfers a workpiece from the left to the right in the order moving down clamping moving up rightward travel moving down unclamping moving up leftward travel Double solenoid type solenoid valves with two inputs for driving and non driving are adopted for moving down moving up leftward travel and rightward travel Single type solenoid valves which operate only while the power is ON are adopted for...

Page 412: ...peration X034 M 5 Zero return start X026 M 6 Automatic mode start X041 M 7 Stop M 0 Does not operate X030 M 1 Zero return operation mode M 2 Does not operate M 3 X031 M 4 Continuous operation X032 M 5 Zero return start M 6 Automatic mode start X033 M 7 Stop M8000 RUN monitor M8000 M 0 X030 M 1 M 2 M 3 X031 M 4 Continuous operation X032 M 5 M 6 Automatic mode start X033 M 7 Stop M8000 M8000 Individ...

Page 413: ...tus the operation is held for outputs in the states b M8041 Transfer start This special auxiliary relay allows transfer from the initial state S2 to the next state Individual operation mode and zero return operation mode M8041 is not effective Stepping operation mode and cycle operation mode M8041 is effective only while the start button is pressed and held Continuous operation mode The operation ...

Page 414: ...ll outputs are reset once to assure safety after which the following mode becomes valid While M8045 All output reset disable is ON outputs are not reset at all b Individual operation mode Programming is not required when the individual operation mode is not provided X004 X002 M8044 Left limit Upper limit Unclamping Detects that the machine is located at the zero point and regards it as the conditi...

Page 415: ...2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control c Zero return operation mode Programming is not required when the zero return operation mode is not provided It is necessary to set M8043 zero return complete to ON before starting the automatic mode Unclamping RST Y000 RST Y001 Zero return complete Y002 Moving down reset Leftward travel Rightward travel reset Moving up Zero return start RST Y003 Y004 SET M80...

Page 416: ... mode Y000 Moving down K 10 Clamping Moving up SET Y001 T 0 RET S 2 Initial state for automatic mode Y002 Y003 Rightward travel Moving down Y000 K 10 Moving up RST Y001 T 1 Y002 Y004 Leftward travel END Unclamping SFC block 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Transfer start M8041 TRAN Zero point condition M8044 Down limit X001 TRAN T0 TRAN Upper limit X002 TRAN Right limit X003 TRAN Down limit X001 TRAN T1 TR...

Page 417: ...ANI Y 000 20 OUT Y 002 21 LD X 010 22 ANI Y 002 23 OUT Y 000 24 LD X 006 25 AND X 002 26 ANI Y 003 27 OUT Y 004 28 LD X 011 29 AND X 002 30 ANI Y 004 31 OUT Y 003 RET 32 STL S 1 33 LD X 025 34 SET S 10 36 STL S 10 37 RST Y 001 38 RST Y 000 39 OUT Y 002 40 LD X 002 41 SET S 11 43 STL S 11 44 RST Y 003 45 OUT Y 004 46 LD X 004 47 SET S 12 49 STL S 12 50 SET M8043 52 LD M8043 53 RST S 12 RET 55 STL S...

Page 418: ...ed in three devices starting from which store the number of same data first position and last position Operand type Description Data type Head device number in which same data maximum value and minimum value are searched 16 or 32 bit binary Data to be searched for or device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Head device number storing number of same data maximum value and minimum value detect...

Page 419: ... the number of same data first position last position maximum value position and minimum value position b When same data was not detected Five 32 bit devices starting from 1 store the number of same data first position last position maximum value position and minimum value position In this case however 0 is stored in three devices starting from 1 which store the number of same data first position ...

Page 420: ...vices 1 2 3 and 4 are occupied 2 In the case of 32 bit operation Ten devices 1 3 2 5 4 7 6 and 9 8 are occupied Note that the 32 bit value n 1 n is valid when D or R is specified as n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DSER D0 D100 D200 R0 n is R1 R0 Searched device 1 Searched data value example Comparison data Data position Search result Maximum value 4 Same Minimum value 3 1 K100000 K100000 ...

Page 421: ...n 0 to 360 using the rotation angle signal of 1 pulse The current value of the counter is compared with the data table with n lines starting from which occupies n lines 2 devices and consecutive n outputs starting from are controlled to ON or OFF during one rotation Operand type Description Data type Head device number storing the data table with rising and faling point data 16 or 32 bit binary Co...

Page 422: ...iting the data in to n 2 2 32 bit operation DABSD In this example outputs are controlled to ON or OFF by one rotation 0 to 360 using the rotation angle signal of 1 pulse The present value of the counter is compared with the data table having n lines starting from 1 which occupies n lines 4 devices and consecutive n outputs starting from are controlled to ON or OFF during one rotation Rising point ...

Page 423: ...ons 1 Specifying a high speed counter C235 to C255 In DABSD instruction a high seed counter can be specified as In this case however the output pattern contains response delay caused by the scan cycle with regard to the current value of a counter When high responsitivity is required in FX3U FX3UC PLCs use the table high speed comparison function offered by the HSZ instruction or use the HSCT instr...

Page 424: ...lent to the table data the current output is reset and the next output is set to ON In this way the ON OFF status of specified outputs is controlled in turn Operand type Description Data type Head word device number storing the set value 16 bit binary Head number of counters whose current value is monitored 16 bit binary Head bit device number to be output Bit n Number of output bit devices 1 n 64...

Page 425: ...4 The next output M1 turns ON 5 When the current value of C0 reaches the comparison value D301 the output M1 is reset 1 is added to the count value of the process counter C1 and the current value of the counter C0 is reset 6 The current value is compared for up to n K4 outputs in the same way 1 n 64 7 When the final process specified by n is finished the execution complete flag M8029 turns ON and ...

Page 426: ...nit 1 sec Related instruction There is a handy instruction as follows Operand type Description Data type Device number storing the teaching data 16 bit binary n Magnification by which the teaching data is multiplied K0 to K2 H0 to H2 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Poi...

Page 427: ...evices are not used in other controls for the machine Teaching time 1 Current value of the pressing and holding time Program example 1 Writing the teaching time to 10 types of data registers Suppose that the set value is written to D400 to D409 in advance D1 D D1 D D1 D D1 D D1 D M8000 RUN monitor T 0 D 400 T 1 D 401 T 9 D 409 X010 Teaching button M 0 X010 FNC 19 BIN K1X000 Z FNC 64 TTMR D300 K 0 ...

Page 428: ...F with delay of the timer set value after the command contact turned OFF M1 1 One shot timer which turns ON after the command contact turned OFF from ON and turns OFF after the timer set value M2 2 Occupied and can be used for flicker M3 3 Occupied Operand type Description Data type Used timer number T0 to T199 100 ms timer 16 bit binary m Set value of the timer 1 to 32 767 16 bit binary Head bit ...

Page 429: ... 2 Flicker NC contact which turns ON and OFF repeatedly at the interval of timer set value M3 3 Occupied Cautions 1 Handling of a specified timer The timer number specified in this instruction cannot be used in other general circuits such as OUT instruction If the timer number is used in other general circuits the timer malfunctions 2 Number of occupied devices Four devices are occupied from a dev...

Page 430: ...ON to OFF or from OFF to ON Dividing output by 2 step alternating output Multi step dividing outputs are achieved by combination of two or more ALTP instructions Operand type Description Data type Bit device number whose output is alternated Bit Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Point...

Page 431: ...gram examples 1 Start and stop by one input 1 When the pushbutton switch X000 is pressed the start output Y001 is set to ON 2 When the pushbutton switch X000 is pressed again the stop output Y000 is set to ON 2 Flicker operation 1 When the input X006 is set to ON the contact of the timer T2 turns ON instantaneously every 5 seconds 2 Every time the contact of T2 turns ON the output Y007 is set to O...

Page 432: ...mber of scans 0 to n is stored in 1 The time from start to the end value is the operation cycle multiplied by n times Operand type Description Data type Device number storing the initial value of ramp 16 bit binary Device number storing the target value of ramp 16 bit binary Device number storing the current value of ramp 16 bit binary n Ramp transfer time scan 1 to 32 767 16 bit binary Oper and T...

Page 433: ...onger than the actual scan time to D8039 and set M8039 to ON to select the constant scan mode in the PLC For example when 20 ms is written to D8039 and n is set to 100 the value will change from to in 20 seconds 2 Operation of the mode flag M8026 In FX3U FX3UC PLCs the contents of 1 are changed as follows depending on the ON OFF status of the mode flag M8026 In FX3G PLCs the contents of 1 are same...

Page 434: ...h index registers V and Z Operand type Description Data type Data register for counting 16 bit binary m1 Number of divisions 16 bit binary m2 Number of low speed sections 16 bit binary Head bit device number to be driven 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T ...

Page 435: ...ections as shown in the figure below 1 Register word device specifying the calling condition 2 Register bit device specifying the calling condition Works as a register for counting Set them in advance using a transfer instruction 1 Sets the port No to be called 2 Sets the product No to be called A phase signal Construct an internal contact circuit in advance which is driven by the input signal X 1...

Page 436: ...to 3 to 7 specified by the head device Cautions 1 Operations caused by the command input ON OFF status When the command input is set to ON and this instruction is executed the result will be automatically output to 3 to 7 When the command input is set to OFF 3 to 7 are set to OFF accordingly 2 Multiple activation of the rotation detection signal to 2 in one division For example when the rotation d...

Page 437: ...pplicable devices Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit operation SORT In the data table sorting source having m1 m2 points from data lines are sorted in the ascending order based on the group data in the column No n and the result is stored in the data table sorting result having m1 m2 points from For operation examples refer to the next page Operand type Description Data type Head devic...

Page 438: ...data the operations shown below are acquired It is recommended to put a serial number such as a control number in the first column so that the original line number can be estimated based on the contents Sorting source data 1 Sorting result when the instruction is executed with n K2 column No 2 Column No Number of groups m2 K4 1 2 3 4 Line No Control number Height Weight Age Number of data m1 3 1 3...

Page 439: ...ion execution complete flag use method refer to Subsection 6 5 2 Cautions Do not change the contents of operands and data while the instruction is executed Before executing the instruction again set the command input to OFF Limitation in the number of instructions Only one instruction can be used in a program When the same device is specified in and The source data is overwritten by the data acqui...

Page 440: ...sential for controlling special units and special blocks are included in this group In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs transfer can be executed also by MOV instruction FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 70 TKY Ten Key Input Section 15 1 71 HKY Hexadecimal Input Section 15 2 72 DSW Digital switch thumbwheel input Section 15 3 73 SEGD Seven Segment Decoder Section 15 4 74 SEGL Seven Segment With Latch Se...

Page 441: ...Output informations for key pressing and key sensing are output to to 10 1 Input numeric value When an input value is larger than 9999 it overflows from the most significant digit An input numeric value is stored in the binary format When the ten keys are pressed in the order 1 2 3 4 in the figure shown on the next page 2130 is stored in Operand Type Description Data Type Head bit device number fr...

Page 442: ...ignificant digit An input numeric value is stored in the binary format 2 Key pressing information to 10 For the key pressing information to 9 turn ON or OFF according to the pressed keys For the key sensing output 10 turns ON when any key is pressed For the ten key connection example and key pressing information refer to the 16 bit operation TKY shown above Cautions 1 When two or more keys are pre...

Page 443: ...leven bit devices are occupied from for outputting the key pressing information Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine to 9 Turn ON or OFF according to input of the ten keys 0 to 9 10 Is ON while either one among 0 to 9 keys is pressed key sensing output 4 Limitation in the number the instruction TKY or DTKY instruction can be used only once in a program When T...

Page 444: ... input value is larger than 9999 it overflows from the most significant digit An input numeric value is stored in the binary format in D0 2 When X002 is pressed M12 turns ON and remains ON until another key is pressed Other keys work in the same way In this way M10 to M19 turn ON and OFF according to the inputs X000 to X011 3 When pressing a key the key sensing output M20 is ON only while it is pr...

Page 445: ... of function and operation 1 16 bit operation HKY signals to 3 and to 3 connected to the 16 key input 0 to F are scanned When a key 0 to 9 is pressed the corresponding numeric value is shifted into from the least significant byte and 7 turns ON When a key A to F is pressed the corresponding key press information bit to 5 turns ON and 6 turns ON Operand Type Description Data Type Head X device numb...

Page 446: ...arger than 99 999 999 it overflows from the most significant digit The numeric value input is stored to 1 in binary The key sensing output 7 turns ON when any key 0 to 9 is pressed 2 Key pressing information for the keys A to F Six devices starting from corresponding to keys A to F turn ON The key sensing output 6 turns ON when any key A to F is pressed Extension function When M8167 is set to ON m...

Page 447: ...In such a case the first key pressed is valid 3 When the command contact turns OFF Though the contents of do not change to 7 turn OFF 4 Number of devices occupied 1 Four devices are occupied from the head X device for connecting 16 keys 2 Four devices are occupied from the head Y device for connecting 16 keys 3 Eight devices are occupied from the head device for outputting the key pressing informa...

Page 448: ...Y Hexadecimal Input Program example The figure below shows an example of the FX3U series main unit sink input sink output For wiring details refer to the following manual FX3U Hardware Edition X004 FNC 71 HKY X000 Y000 D 0 M 0 D1 S D2 D3 S S X000 X001 X002 X003 COM1 Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F External wiring Transistor output PLC 24V 0V ...

Page 449: ...he time division method in which the value is input from the 1st digit in turn by the output signal at the interval of 100 ms and stored to 1 Data A numeric value from 0 to 9999 up to 4 digits can be read A numeric value is stored in the binary format The first set is stored to and the second set is stored to 1 Operand Type Description Data Type Head device X number connected to a digital switch F...

Page 450: ...e set of 4 digits is used four devices are occupied starting from When two sets of 4 digits is used eight devices are occupied starting from 3 When connecting a digital switch of up to 3 digits It is not necessary to wire the strobe signal output for digit specification to unused digits Because unused digits are occupied also by this instruction however they cannot be used for any other purpose Ma...

Page 451: ...tion complete flag M8029 turns ON 4 How to use this instruction in a relay output type PLC By providing a digital switch read input this instruction can be used in a relay output type PLC When the push button switch X000 is pressed DSW FNC 72 instruction executes a series of operations Accordingly with regard to this program it is not necessary to consider the relay contact life even if Y010 to Y0...

Page 452: ... seven segment display unit and stored the low order 8 bits of Operand Type Description Data Type Head word device to be decoded 16 bit binary Word device number storing the data to be displayed in the seven segment display unit 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer ...

Page 453: ...segment decoding table Caution 1 Number of occupied devices Low order 8 bits of are occupied and high order 8 bits do not change Seven segment configuration Display data Hexadeci mal num ber b3 b2 b1 b0 B15 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 3 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 4 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 5 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 6 0 1 1 0 ...

Page 454: ...strobe signal A 4 digit numeric value stored in is converted from binary into BCD and each digit is output in turn from to 3 in the time division method The strobe signal is output in turn from 4 to 7 in the time division method also to latch one set of 4 digit seven segment display unit 2 For binary data in the range from 0 to 9999 is valid Operand Type Description Data Type Head word device conv...

Page 455: ...t in turn from to 3 in the time division method The strobe signal is output in turn from 4 to 7 in the time division method also to latch the first set of 4 digit seven segment display unit b 2nd set of 4 digits A 4 digit numeric value stored in 1 is converted from binary into BCD and its each digit is output in turn from 10 to 13 in the time division method The strobe signal is output in turn fro...

Page 456: ...4 digits is used 1 device is occupied from the head device specified in 8 devices are occupied from the head device specified in Even if the number of digits is smaller than 4 unused devices cannot be used for any other purpose When two sets of 4 digits are used 2 devices are occupied from the head device specified in Twelve devices are occupied from the head device specified in Even if the number...

Page 457: ...and latch functions 15 5 2 How to select parameter n based on seven segment display specifications The value set to the parameter n varies depending on the signal logic of the seven segment display Select n as described below The check column is provided at the bottom of the table Check a corresponding type of logic positive or negative and utilize it for parameter setting 1 Role of the parameter ...

Page 458: ...ming chart Description BCD data at low level BCD data at high level Check Logic Negative logic Positive logic Timing chart Description Data latched at low level is held Data latched at high level is held Check PLC output logic Data input Strobe signal Parameter n 4 digits 1 set 4 digits 2 sets Negative logic Negative logic match Negative logic match 0 4 Positive logic mismatch 1 5 Positive logic m...

Page 459: ... the numeric value in each digit 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 3 Applicable devices S D b cannot be indexed with index registers V and Z Operand Type Description Data Type Head bit device number to be input 16 bit binary Word device number storing data converted into BCD 16 bit binary Head bit device Y number connected to seven segment display unit 16 bit binary n Number of digits of seven segme...

Page 460: ... digit selection switches 2 and 3 Operation when the lower digit input 2 turns ON Every time the lower digit switch is pressed the digit specification changes in the way 103 102 101 100 103 Operation when the higher digit input 3 turns ON Every time the higher digit switch is pressed the digit specification changes in the way 103 100 101 102 103 3 Operation of the LED for displaying a selected dig...

Page 461: ...The contents can be displayed in the seven segment display unit As described above a target numeric value can be written to using a series of operation while looking at the seven segment display unit Cautions 1 Setting of the parameter n Refer to the explanation of parameter setting in SEGL FNC 74 instruction The setting range is from 0 to 3 for ARWS instruction For the parameter setting refer to ...

Page 462: ...f the timer using the arrow switches Explanation of operation Every time the read write key is pressed the read write LED lights alternately In reading Set the timer number using the digital switch and then press the set switch X003 In writing Set a numeric value using the arrow switches while looking at the seven segment display unit and then press the switch X003 X013 X010 X011 X012 101 1 8 4 Y0...

Page 463: ...9 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Program M8000 T0 D300 T1 D301 T99 D399 Practical timer circuit X000 M0 Decrement X001 M1 Increment X002 M2 Higher digit RUN monitor M3 Lower digit X004 FNC 66 ALTP M100 Read write M100 Y014 Read indication M100 Y015 Write indication Y014 X003 FNC 72 DSW X010 Y010 Z K1 Read Set Digital switch Z 4 digits 1 set Y014 FNC 74 SEGL T0Z...

Page 464: ...Z 0 to 9 and symbols but cannot handle regular width characters A character string is entered when a program is created with a programming tool stores converted ASCII codes in the order of low order 8 bits and high order 8 bits by 2 characters byte at one time Operand Type Description Data Type Eight half width alphanumeric characters input from a personal computer Character string only ASCII code...

Page 465: ...s as the number of characters divided by 2 The decimal point is rounded up 2 While the extension function is ON occupies as many devices as the number of characters in the character string 2 When using RS FNC 80 ASCI FNC 82 HEX FNC 83 and or CCD FNC 84 instructions The extension function flag M8161 is also used for other instructions When using an instruction described above and the ASC instructio...

Page 466: ...ich the following ASCII codes are stored in to 7 Eight bytes are sent from A at first to 7 H at the end Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing ASCII code data Character string only ASCII codes Head output Y number to which ASCII code data is output Bit Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real ...

Page 467: ...e number of characters output by one time execution of the instruction varies While M8027 is OFF 8 byte serial output fixed to 8 characters is executed While M8027 is ON 16 byte serial output 1 to 16 characters is executed In the example shown below up to 16 characters 1 character byte are output to the display unit external display unit A6FD for example It is supposed that data to be displayed is...

Page 468: ... time If the scan time is short the constant scan mode can be used If the scan mode is too long the timer interrupt function can be used 3 Output type of the PLC Use a transistor output type PLC 4 When 00H NUL code is contained in the data while M8027 is ON The instruction is executed completely and the data after 00H is not output M8029 remains ON during one operation cycle 5 This instruction can...

Page 469: ...n items between FROM instruction and TO instruction refer to Subsection 15 9 1 Special extension unit block BFM PLC word device n point 16 bit data starting from the buffer memory BFM m2 inside a special extension unit block No m1 are transferred read to n point 16 bit data starting from inside a PLC Operand Type Description Data Type m1 Unit number of a special extension unit block K0 to K7 from ...

Page 470: ...e 32 bit operation instruction specify K1 to K8 Note that the 32 bit values m1 1 1 m2 1 m2 and n 1 n are valid when D or R is specified as m1 m2 or n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DFROM D0 D2 D100 R0 m1 is D1 D0 m2 is D3 D2 and n is R1 R0 Device Name Description M8028 Enable interrupt flag Disables or enables interrupts while FROM TO instruction is executed For details refer to Acceptance...

Page 471: ...ation using the FROM instruction and direct specification of buffer memories 1 1 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Example When the BFM 4 abnormal station information in the CC Link LT master unit whose unit number is fixed to 0 built in the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 is read to D0 In case of FROM instruction In case of MOV instruction Example When the BFMs 0 to 3 remote station connection i...

Page 472: ...mber m2 Up to 32767 16 bit RAM memories are built into a special extension unit block and they are called buffer memories Buffer memory numbers range from 0 to 32766 and their contents vary depending on the function of the extension equipment Setting range K0 to K32766 When BFMs are handled in a 32 bit instruction a specified BFM stores low order 16 bits and a consecutive BFM stores high order 16 ...

Page 473: ...hen many special extension equipment such as positioning units cam switches link units and analog units are connected considerable time may be required to initialize buffer memories when the PLC mode is set to RUN the operation time may be long and a watchdog timer error may occur 2 When many FROM TO instructions are driven at the same time When many FROM TO instructions are driven at the same tim...

Page 474: ... written to n point buffer memories starting from the buffer memory BFM m2 inside a special extension unit block No m1 Operand Type Description Data Type m1 Unit number of a special extension unit block K0 to K7 from the right side of the main unit 16 or 32 bit binary m2 Transfer destination buffer memory BFM number 16 or 32 bit binary Device number storing the transfer source data 16 or 32 bit bi...

Page 475: ...ion In the case of DTO D0 D2 D100 R0 m1 is D1 D0 m2 is D3 D2 and n is R1 R0 Program examples In programs the contents of data registers D extension registers R auxiliary relays M with digit specification and constants K and H are written transferred to buffer memories BFMs in special extension units blocks using the TO instruction and direct specification of buffer memories 1 1 This function is su...

Page 476: ...in this group FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 80 RS Serial Communication Section 16 1 81 PRUN Parallel Run Octal Mode Section 16 2 82 ASCI Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion Section 16 3 83 HEX ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion Section 16 4 84 CCD Check Code Section 16 5 85 VRRD Volume Read Section 16 6 86 VRSC Volume Scale Section 16 7 87 RS2 Serial Communication 2 Section 16 8 88 PID PID Co...

Page 477: ... This instruction sends and receives data in no protocol communication by way of serial ports in accordance with RS 232C or RS 485 provided in the main unit For detailed explanation refer to the Data Communication Edition manual Operand type Description Data type Head device of data registers storing data to be sent 16 bit binary or character string m Number of bytes of data to be sent setting ran...

Page 478: ... FNC303 FLCMD FNC304 FLSTRD FNC305 instruction for the same port Device Name Device Name M8063 1 Serial communication error 1 D8120 3 Communication format setting M8121 2 Sending wait flag D8122 4 Remaining number of data to be sent M8122 2 Sending request D8123 4 Monitor for number of received data M8123 2 Receiving complete flag D8124 Header M8124 Carrier detection flag D8125 Terminator M8129 Ti...

Page 479: ... 0 3 Applicable devices Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit operation PRUN and PRUNP Octal bit device Decimal bit device Operand type Description Data type Digit specification 1 16 or 32 bit binary Device number of transfer destination 1 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number ...

Page 480: ... Y2 Y1 Y0 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0 M17 M16 M10 Decimal bit device M Not transferred M0 to M7 M10 to M17 Y0 to Y17 Command input FNC 81 DPRUN K6X000 K6M0 S D X000 to X027 M0 to M7 M10 to M17 M20 to M27 Octal bit device X X27 X20 X17 X10 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0 M19 M18 M17 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0 M27 M18 and M19 do not change Decimal bit device M M10 M20 Command input ...

Page 481: ... function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit operation ASCI and ASCIP n hexadecimal code characters digits stored in and later are converted into ASCII code and then stored to the devices and later The 16 bit mode and 8 bit mode options are available for this instruction For operation in each mode refer to the proceeding pages Operand type Descripti...

Page 482: ...rsion is executed as follows Devices after D100 0ABCH D101 1234H D102 5678H Number of specified digits characters and conversion result Bit configuration in the case of n K4 When outputting data in the BCD format for a printer for example it is necessary to convert binary data into BCD data before executing this instruction n K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9 Low order 8 bits of D200 C B A 0 4 3 2 1 8 Hi...

Page 483: ...sing the 8 bit mode set M8161 to normally ON M8161 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP Operation In the following program conversion is executed as follows Devices after D100 0ABCH D101 1234H D102 5678H Number of specified digits characters and conversion result Bit configuration in the case of n K2 When outputting data in the BCD format for a printer for example it is necessa...

Page 484: ... codes stored in and later n characters are converted into hexadecimal codes and then stored to the devices and later The 16 bit mode and 8 bit mode are available for this instruction For operation in each mode refer to the proceeding pages Operand type Description Data type Head device number storing ASCII code to be converted Character string only ASCII code 1 Head device number storing converte...

Page 485: ... RUN to STOP Operation In the following program conversion is executed as follows Conversion source data Number of specified characters and conversion result indicates 0 When the input data is in BCD format it is necessary to convert BCD data into binary data after executing this instruction If ASCII code is not stored in in the HEX instruction an operation error occurs and conversion into hexadec...

Page 486: ...C mode is changed from RUN to STOP Operation In the following program conversion is executed as follows Conversion source data Number of specified characters and conversion result indicates 0 When the input data is in BCD format it is necessary to convert BCD data into binary data after executing this instruction ASCII code Hexadecimal code D 200 30H 0 D 201 41H A D 202 42H B D 203 43H C D 204 31H...

Page 487: ...s function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit operation CCD and CCDP The addition data and horizontal parity value of data stored in to n 1 are calculated The addition data is stored to and the horizontal parity value is stored to 1 The 16 bit mode and 8 bit mode are available in this instruction For the operation in each mode refer to the proceedin...

Page 488: ... following program conversion is executed as follows Example of data contents Low order 8 bits of D100 K100 01100100 High order 8 bits of D100 K111 0110111 1 Low order 8 bits of D101 K100 01100100 High order 8 bits of D101 K 98 01100010 Low order 8 bits of D102 K123 0111101 1 High order 8 bits of D102 K 66 01000010 Low order 8 bits of D103 K100 01100100 High order 8 bits of D103 K 95 0101111 1 Low...

Page 489: ...tored to and 1 respectively M8161 is also used for the RS ASCI HEX and CRC instructions When using the 8 bit mode set M8161 to normally ON M8161 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP Example of 8 bit conversion In the following program conversion is executed as follows Example of data contents D 100 K100 01100100 D 101 K111 0110111 1 D 102 K100 01100100 D 103 K 98 01100010 D 104...

Page 490: ... potentiometer No 0 is converted into binary 8 bit data and the value in the range from 0 to 255 is transferred to D0 The value of D0 is used as the set value of a timer When a value larger than 255 is required as the set value of a timer the read value multiplied by a constant by the FNC22 MUL instruction can be set indirectly as the timer constant Operand type Description Data type Volume number...

Page 491: ... analog potentiometer board can be connected to the option connector 1 and occupies the communication channel ch1 In this case the communication function using the communication channel ch1 is not available when the VRRD or VRSC instruction is used In 40 point and 60 point type FX3G PLCs the variable analog potentiometer board can be connected only to the option connector 2 and occupies the commun...

Page 492: ...cale value does not always correspond to the switching position of the variable analog potentiometer scale 0 to 10 This instruction converts into a binary value the scale value of a variable analog potentiometer specified in and transfers the converted binary value to Operand type Description Data type Volume number setting range 0 to 7 16 bit binary Device to which the read analog value is transf...

Page 493: ...analog potentiometer Cautions In 14 point and 24 point type FX3G PLCs the variable analog potentiometer board can be connected to the option connector 1 and occupies the communication channel ch1 In this case the communication function using the communication channel ch1 is not available when the VRRD or VRSC instruction is used In 40 point and 60 point type FX3G PLCs the variable analog potentiom...

Page 494: ...S 232C or RS 485 provided in the main unit For detailed explanation refer to the Data Communication Edition Operand type Description Data type Head device of data registers storing data to be sent 16 bit binary or character string m Number of bytes of data to be sent setting range 0 to 4 096 16 bit binary Head device of data registers storing received data when receiving is completed 16 bit binary...

Page 495: ...maining number of data to be sent 2 M8404 M8424 Carrier detection flag M8373 D8403 D8423 Monitor for number of received data 2 M8405 M8425 Data Set Ready DSR Flag 3 M8375 D8405 D8425 Communication parameter display M8379 D8409 D8429 Time out time setting M8379 M8409 M8429 Time out check flag M8380 D8410 D8430 Header 1 2 M8381 D8411 D8431 Header 3 4 M8382 D8412 D8432 Terminator 1 2 M8383 D8413 D843...

Page 496: ...T FNC300 FLDEL FNC301 FLWR FNC302 FLRD FNC303 FLCMD FNC304 FLSTRD FNC305 instruction for the same port When using a header and terminator set the data in the header and terminator to corresponding devices D before executing the RS2 instruction Do not change the values of the header and terminator while the RS2 instruction is being executed Function Changes According to Versions Compatible Versions...

Page 497: ...function and operation 1 16 bit operation PID When the target value measured value and parameters to 6 are set and a program is executed the operation result MV is stored to the output value at every sampling time Operand type Description Data type Data register number storing the target value SV 16 bit binary Data register number storing the measured value PV 16 bit binary Data register number st...

Page 498: ...he ULV or LLV value is output automatically When auto tuning is finished the specified MV value is set 3 Auto tuning In the case of step response method Before driving PID instruction the user should set the initial output value During auto tuning PID instruction does not change the MV output 1 1 When auto tuning is not used the number of points is the same as the number in the step response metho...

Page 499: ...tion setting ACT 23 1 Output variation decremental alarm set value 0 to 32767 It is valid when bit 2 is set to 1 and bit 5 is set to 0 in 1 for the operation setting ACT Output lower limit set value 32768 to 32767 It is valid when bit 2 is set to 0 and bit 5 is set to 1 in 1 for the operation setting ACT 24 1 Alarm output bit0 0 Input variation incremental is not exceeded 1 Input variation increme...

Page 500: ... and 5 are not all 0 Twenty five devices are occupied from the head device specified in Operation setting ACT When bits 1 2 and 5 are all 0 Twenty devices are occupied from the head device specified in 3 When specifying a device in the latched area backed up against power failure For the output value MV in the PID instruction specify a data register D outside the latched area Program example When ...

Page 501: ...ternal FX Device 17 FNC100 FNC109 Data Transfer 2 18 FNC110 FNC139 Floating Point 19 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control 17 Data Transfer 2 FNC100 to FNC109 FNC100 to FNC109 provide an instruction for executing complicated processing for fundamental applied instructions and for executing special processing FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 100 101 102 ZPUSH ...

Page 502: ...data use ZPOP FNC103 instruction Use ZPUSH FNC102 and ZPOP FNC103 instruction as a pair 3 By specifying a same device to ZPUSH FNC102 and ZPOP FNC103 instructions can be used in the nest structure In this case the occupied points are added by 16 after every time ZPUSH FNC102 instruction is executed Secure in advance sufficient area for the number of the next structure Operand Type Description Data...

Page 503: ...nts used after in ZPUSH FNC102 instruction exceeds the corresponding device range error code K6706 When the number of batch storage times stores a negative value while the ZPUSH FNC102 instruction is executed error code K6706 Instruction Description ZPOP FNC103 Restores the index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 which were batch stored temporarily by the ZPUSH FNC102 instruction D When the nest str...

Page 504: ...registers Z0 to Z7 and V0 to V7 before execution of subroutine program are batch stored in D0 and later when index registers are used in the subroutine after the pointer P0 X005 M8002 Label P 0 M8000 RUN monitor M8000 K 5 D 0 RST FNC102 ZPUSH D 0 END FNC103 ZPOP FNC 02 SRET FNC 12 MOVP X005 K10 FNC 12 MOVP X000 V0 Y000 FNC 06 FEND X000 FNC 01 CALL P 0 Program using index registers X006 K 5 FNC 12 ...

Page 505: ... restored the number of times of batch storage is decremented by 1 2 For temporarily batch storing the data use ZPUSH FNC102 instruction Use ZPUSH FNC102 and ZPOP FNC103 instruction as a pair Related instruction Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When the number of times of batch storage D stores 0 or a neg...

Page 506: ...17 EVAL Character String to Floating Point Conversion Section 18 5 118 EBCD Floating Point to Scientific Notation Conversion Section 18 6 119 EBIN Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion Section 18 7 120 EADD Floating Point Addition Section 18 8 121 ESUB Floating Point Subtraction Section 18 9 122 EMUL Floating Point Multiplication Section 18 10 123 EDIV Floating Point Division Section 18...

Page 507: ...ation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control 129 INT Floating Point to Integer Conversion Section 18 17 130 SIN Floating Point Sine Section 18 18 131 COS Floating Point Cosine Section 18 19 132 TAN Floating Point Tangent Section 18 20 133 ASIN Floating Point Arc Sine Section 18 21 134 ACOS Floating Point Arc Cosine Section 18 22 135 ATAN Floating Point Arc Tangent Section 18 23 136 RAD Floating Po...

Page 508: ...f function and operation 1 32 bit operation DECMP and DECMPP The comparison value 1 is compared with the comparison source 1 as floating point data and either bit among 1 and 2 turns ON according to the result smaller same or larger Operand Type Description Data Type Device number storing binary floating point data to be compared Real number binary 1 Device number storing binary floating point dat...

Page 509: ...on 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control When a constant K or H is specified as 1 or 1 it is automatically converted from binary into binary floating point real number when the instruction is executed Caution 1 Number of occupied devices Three devices are occupied from 1 and 2 Make sure that these devices are not used for any other purpose S1 S1 S2 S2 Command input FNC110 DECMP Even if the comman...

Page 510: ... with index registers V and Z Operand Type Description Data Type Data register number storing binary floating point data to be compared Real number binary 1 Data register number storing binary floating point data to be compared Data register number storing binary floating point data to be compared Head bit device number to which the comparison result is output Three devices are occupied Bit Oper a...

Page 511: ...1 and 2 turns ON according to the result smaller same or larger When a constant K or H is specified as 1 1 or 1 it is automatically converted into binary floating point when the instruction is executed Cautions 1 Number of occupied devices Three devices are occupied from 1 and 2 Make sure that these devices are not used for any other purpose 2 Comparison values 1 and 1 Make sure that two compariso...

Page 512: ...hen X007 turns ON 2 In the program shown below a real number 1 23 is transferred to D11 and D10 when X007 turns ON Operand Type Description Data Type Binary floating point data transfer source or device number storing data Real number binary Device number receiving floating point data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con s...

Page 513: ...he contents binary floating point data of 1 are converted into a character string according to the contents specified by 1 and 2 and then stored to devices and later A real number can be directly specified as The data after conversion varies depending on the display specification stored in Operand Type Description Data Type Binary floating point data to be converted or device storing data Real num...

Page 514: ...of the binary floating point data cannot be accommodated in the number of digits of the decimal part low order digits of the decimal part are rounded Decimal point format Total number of digits Number of digits of decimal part Sign 1 2 ASCII code in specified total number of digits 1 th digit ASCII code in specified total number of digits 3 th digit ASCII code in specified total number of digits 5...

Page 515: ... of the decimal part is 0 Total number of digits 6 When the number of digits of the decimal part is any value other than 0 Total number of digits Number of digits of decimal part 7 1 2 3 Low order digits of decimal part 0 Decimal point format 8 Total number of digits 2 Number of digits of decimal part 1 2 Total number of digits Automatically added 1 1 23456 S1 S1 S2 S2 S2 1 2 3 Low order digits of...

Page 516: ...e decimal part low order digits of the decimal part are rounded When the number of digits of the decimal part is set to any value other than 0 2EH is automatically stored in specified number of digits of decimal part 1 th digit When the number of digits of the decimal part is 0 2EH is not stored For the sign of the exponent part 2BH is stored when the exponent is positive and 2DH is stored when th...

Page 517: ...706 In the case of decimal point format When the number of digits of the decimal part is 0 Total number of digits 2 When the number of digits of the decimal part is any value other than 0 Total number of digits Number of digits of decimal part 3 In the case of exponent format When the number of digits of the decimal part is 0 Total number of digits 6 When the number of digits of the decimal part i...

Page 518: ...later when X000 turns ON X000 FNC116 DESTRP R0 R10 END D0 Total number of digits 0 3 3 0 Space Number of digits of decimal part 0 7 3 R11 R1 R10 R12 Conversion format Total number of digits Number of digits of decimal part R0 0 0327457 20H space 2EH b15 b8 b7 b0 00H is automatically stored at the end of the character string 33H 3 00H 20H space 30H 0 30H 0 33H 3 D1 D0 D2 D3 X000 FNC116 DESTRP R0 R1...

Page 519: ...er string stored in and later is converted into binary floating point and stored to 1 A specified character string may be in the decimal point format or exponent format A character string in either format can be converted into binary floating point data Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing character string data to be converted into binary floating point data Character stri...

Page 520: ...rsion result may contain rounding error a In the case of decimal point format 31H 1 b15 b8 b7 b0 1 2 3 4 30H 0 38H 8 32H 2 2DH 2EH 37H 7 31H 1 7 8 1 0 1 2 1 Binary floating point real number 1 07812 D S S S S S D 00H b15 b8 b7 b0 1 2 3 4 20H space 2EH 32H 2 31H 1 2DH 31H 1 33H 3 30H 0 2BH 30H 0 31H 1 45H E 5 6 3 2 0 1 1 1 0 E 1 Binary floating point real number 1 3201E 10 D S D S S S S S S 00H S b...

Page 521: ...sign is omitted a character string is converted into a positive exponent When 2DH is specified as the sign a character string is converted into a negative exponent When 20H space or 30H 0 exists between numbers except the first 0 in a character string specified by 20H or 30H is ignored during conversion When 30H 0 exists between a number and E in a character string in the exponent format 30H is ig...

Page 522: ...error code K6706 Program examples 1 In the program example shown below a character string stored in R0 and later is converted into binary floating point and stored to D0 and D1 when X000 turns ON Device Name Description Condition Operation M8020 Zero flag The conversion result is true 0 The mantissa part is 0 The zero flag M8020 turns ON M8021 Borrow flag The absolute value of the conversion resul...

Page 523: ...ng stored in D10 and later is converted into binary floating point and stored to D100 and D101 when X000 turns ON Operations at overflow underflow and zero Condition Operation The absolute value of the conversion result is less than 2 126 The value of is the minimum value 2 126 of 32 bit real numbers and the borrow flag M8021 turns ON The absolute value of the conversion result is not less than 21...

Page 524: ...cientific notation Real number decimal Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 P FNC 118 EBCD D Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction DEBCD DEBCDP Mnemonic Operation Condition 32 bit Instruction...

Page 525: ... 16 FNC80 FNC89 External FX Device 17 FNC100 FNC109 Data Transfer 2 18 FNC110 FNC139 Floating Point 19 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Caution 1 Handling of floating point In floating point operations all data is handled in binary floating point Because binary floating point is difficult to understand requiring a dedicated monitoring method it is converted into ...

Page 526: ...nverted binary floating point Real number binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 P FNC 119 EBIN D Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction DEBIN DEBINP Mnemonic Operation Condition 32 bit I...

Page 527: ...9 External FX Device 17 FNC100 FNC109 Data Transfer 2 18 FNC110 FNC139 Floating Point 19 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Program example By DEBIN instruction a numeric value containing the decimal point can be directly converted into binary floating point Example Converting 3 14 into binary floating point 3 14 314 10 2 scientific notation For program examples of...

Page 528: ...t Caution 1 When a same device is specified The same device number can be specified in 1 1 and 1 In this case note that the addition result changes in every operation cycle when the continuous operation type instruction DEADD is used Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing binary floating point data used in addition Real number binary 1 Word device number storing binary float...

Page 529: ...ubtraction result in the binary floating point format is transferred to 1 When a constant K or H is specified as 1 or 1 it is automatically converted into binary floating point Caution 1 When a same device is specified A same device number can be specified in 1 1 and 1 In this case note that the subtraction result changes in every operation cycle when the continuous operation type instruction DESU...

Page 530: ...d to 1 When a constant K or H is specified as 1 or 1 it is automatically converted into binary floating point Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing binary floating point data used in multiplication Real number binary 1 Word device number storing binary floating point data used in multiplication Data register number storing the multiplication result Oper and Type Bit Devices...

Page 531: ...d DESDIVP Binary floating point data 1 is divided by binary floating point data 1 and the division result in the binary floating point format is transferred to 1 When a constant K or H is specified as 1 or 1 it is automatically converted into binary floating point Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing binary floating point data used in division Real number binary 1 Word dev...

Page 532: ...g case The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When the operation result is outside the following range error code K6706 2 126 Operation result 2128 Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing binary floating point data used in exponential operation Real number binary Head device number storing the operation result Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Device...

Page 533: ...D value set in X020 to X027 is 88 or less because of loge2128 88 7 If a value 89 or more is set an operation error occurs To prevent this operation error when a value more than 89 is set M0 is set to ON so that the exponential operation is not executed 2 Conversion from natural logarithm into common logarithm In the CPU operations are executed in natural logarithm For obtaining a value in common l...

Page 534: ... operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When a negative value is specified in error code K6706 When 0 is specified in error code K6706 Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing binary floating point data used in the natural logarithm operation Real number binary Head device number storing the operatio...

Page 535: ...FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Program example In the program example shown below natural logarithm of 10 set in D50 is calculated and stored to D30 and D31 when X000 turns ON X000 FNC 49 FLT D50 Data used in the natural logarithm operation is set 1 The data to be used is converted into binary floating point real number 2 The natural logarithm operation is executed 3 ...

Page 536: ...ration error occurs in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When a negative value is specified in error code K6706 When 0 is specified in error code K6706 Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing binary floating point data used in the common logarithm operation Real number binary Head device number storing the operation result...

Page 537: ...FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Program example In the program example shown below common logarithm of 15 set in D50 is calculated and stored to D30 and D31 when X000 turns ON X000 FNC 49 FLT D50 Data used in the common logarithm operation is set 1 The data to be used is converted into binary floating point real number 2 The common logarithm operation is executed 3 D40...

Page 538: ...d refer to Subsection 6 5 2 Error The contents of 1 are valid only when a positive value is set When a negative value is set the operation error flag M8067 turns ON and the instruction is not executed Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing binary floating point data whose square root is calculated Real number binary 1 Data register number storing the square root of binary fl...

Page 539: ...tion and operation 1 32 bit operation DENEG and DENEGP The sign of binary floating point stored in 1 is inverted and the negation result is stored to 1 Program example In the program example shown below the sign of floating point data stored in D100 and D101 is inverted and the negation result is stored to D100 and D101 when X000 turns ON Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number stori...

Page 540: ...d DINTP Binary floating point stored in 1 is converted into a binary integer and transferred to 1 Instruction for inverse conversion The inverse conversion is executed by DFLT FNC 49 instruction For FLT FNC 49 instruction refer to Section 12 10 Operand Type Description Data Type Data register number storing binary floating point data to be converted into a binary integer Real number binary Data re...

Page 541: ...139 Floating Point 19 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Related devices For the methods of zero borrow and carry flags refer to Subsection 6 5 2 Caution 1 Caution in the operation Values after the decimal point are rounded Device Name Description M8020 Zero flag Turns ON when the operation result is 0 M8021 Borrow flag Turns ON when the conversion result is cut in...

Page 542: ...tion Data Type Device number storing an angle in radians in binary floating point Real number binary Device number storing the sine value in binary floating point Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3...

Page 543: ...ce 17 FNC100 FNC109 Data Transfer 2 18 FNC110 FNC139 Floating Point 19 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Program example X001 FNC 12 MOVP K 45 D 0 K45 D 0 X002 FNC 12 MOVP K 90 D 0 K90 D 0 M8000 FNC 49 FLTP D 0 D 4 D 0 D5 D4 Binary floating point value RUN monitor FNC123 DEDIV K31415926 K1800000000 D 20 π 180 D21 D20 Binary floating point FNC122 DEMUL D 4 D 20 D 3...

Page 544: ...iption Data Type Device number storing an angle in radians in binary floating point Real number binary Device number storing the cosine value in binary floating point Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3...

Page 545: ...peration 1 32 bit operation DTAN and DTANP A value of angle binary floating point specified in 1 is converted into the tangent value and transferred to 1 Operand Type Description Data Type Device number storing an angle in radians in binary floating point Real number binary Device number storing the tangent value in binary floating point Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Di...

Page 546: ...NC136 instruction refer to Section 18 24 For DEG FNC137 instruction refer to Section 18 25 Error An operation error is caused in the following case The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When a value specified in is outside the range from 1 0 to 1 0 error code K6706 Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing a sine value used in the SIN 1 arc sine op...

Page 547: ...D1 is calculated and the angle is output in 4 digit BCD to Y040 to Y057 when X000 turns ON Operation when 0 5 is stored in D0 and D1 The angle in radians is calculated by the SIN 1 operation 1 The value in radians is converted into the value in degrees 2 The angle expressed in binary floating point real number is converted into an integer binary 3 X000 FNC137 DDEG D10 D20 FNC133 DASIN D0 D10 FNC12...

Page 548: ...FNC136 instruction refer to Section 18 24 For DEG FNC137 instruction refer to Section 18 25 Error An operation error is caused in the following case The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When a value specified in is outside the range from 1 0 to 1 0 error code K6706 Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing a cosine value used in the COS 1 arc cosi...

Page 549: ...1 is calculated and the angle is output in 4 digit BCD to Y040 to Y057 when X000 turns ON Operation when 0 5 is stored in D0 and D1 The angle expressed in the binary floating point real number is converted into an integer binary 3 X000 FNC137 DDEG D10 The angle in radians is calculated by the COS 1 operation 1 The value in radians is converted into the value in degrees 2 D20 FNC134 DACOS D0 D10 FN...

Page 550: ...ans and degrees refer to RAD FNC136 and DEG FNC137 instructions For RAD FNC136 instruction refer to Section 18 24 For DEG FNC137 instruction refer to Section 18 25 Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing a tangent value used in the TAN 1 arc tangent operation Real number binary Head device number storing the operation result Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others Syste...

Page 551: ...and D1 is calculated and the angle is output in 4 digit BCD to Y040 to Y057 when X000 turns ON Operation when 1 is stored in D0 and D1 The angle expressed in binary floating point real number is converted into an integer binary 3 X000 FNC137 DDEG D10 The angle in radians is calculated by the TAN 1 operation 1 The value in radians is converted into the value in degrees 2 D20 FNC135 DATAN D0 D10 FNC...

Page 552: ...ecified as The conversion from degrees into radians is executed as follows Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing a value in degrees to be converted into a value in radians Real number binary Head device number storing a value in radians acquired by conversion Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con sta...

Page 553: ...0 FNC159 Positioning Control Program example In the program example shown below a 4 digit BCD value set in degrees in X020 to X037 is converted into a binary floating point value in radians and stored to D20 and D21 when X000 turns ON Operation when 120 is specified in X020 to X037 X000 FNC 49 FLT D0 Angle to be converted into radians is input 1 The input angle is converted into binary floating po...

Page 554: ...sion from radians into degrees is executed as follows Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing a value in radians to be converted into a value in degrees Real number binary Head device number storing a value in degrees acquired by conversion Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac...

Page 555: ...mple In the program example shown below a binary floating point value set in radians in D20 and D21 is converted into a BCD value in degrees and stored to Y040 and Y057 when X000 turns ON Operation when 1 435792 is specified in D20 and D21 X000 FNC129 INT D10 A value in radians is converted into a value in degrees 1 The angle in binary floating point real number is converted into an integer 2 The ...

Page 556: ...applied instructions and for executing special processing FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 140 WSUM Sum of Word Data Section 19 1 141 WTOB WORD to BYTE Section 19 2 142 BTOW BYTE to WORD Section 19 3 143 UNI 4 bit Linking of Word Data Section 19 4 144 DIS 4 bit Grouping of Word Data Section 19 5 145 146 147 SWAP Byte Swap Section 19 6 148 149 SORT2 Sort Tabulated Data 2 Section 19 7 WSUM ...

Page 557: ...Set data 3 Applicable devices Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit operation WSUM and WSUMP The sum of n 16 bit data starting from is stored as 32 bit data in 1 Operand type Description Data type Head device number storing data whose sum is calculated 16 or 32 bit binary Head device number storing sum 32 or 64 bit binary n Number of data 0 n 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices ...

Page 558: ...ction In the case of DWSUM D0 D100 R0 n is R1 R0 Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When n points starting from are outside the specified device range error code K6706 When n is smaller than or equivalent to 0 error code K6706 When are outside the specified device range error code K6706 Program example In t...

Page 559: ...its of each device and later storing the separated byte data Operand type Description Data type Head device number storing data to be separated in byte units 16 bit binary Head device number storing result of separation in byte units n Number of byte data to be separated 0 n Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real ...

Page 560: ...ror code K6706 When n is an odd number the number of a rounded up value decides the number of devices error code K6706 When the separated data destination devices to n 1 are outside the specified device range error code K6706 Program example In the program shown below the data stored in D10 to D12 is separated in byte units and stored in D20 to D25 Instruction Description BTOW FNC142 Combines the ...

Page 561: ...vices starting from as shown below 2 The high order byte 8 bits of each combination source 16 bit data and later is ignored Operand type Description Data type Head device number storing data to be combined in byte units 16 bit binary Head device number storing data acquired by combination in byte units n Number of byte data to be combined 0 n Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System Us...

Page 562: ...ation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When the combination source devices to n 1 are outside the specified device range error code K6706 When the combined data destination devices to n 2 are outside the specified device range error code K6706 When n is an odd number the number of a rounded up value decides the numer of devi...

Page 563: ...rnal FX I O Device 16 FNC80 FNC89 External FX Device 17 FNC100 FNC109 Data Transfer 2 18 FNC110 FNC139 Floating Point 19 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Program example In the program shown below the low order byte 8 bits data stored in D20 to D25 is combined and stored in D10 to D12 31H D20 D21 The high order bytes is ignored D22 6 bytes D10 D11 D12 12H 55H 78H...

Page 564: ...pe Description Data type Head device number storing data to be combined 16 bit binary Device number storing combined data n Number of data to be combined 0 to 4 When n is 0 UNI instruction is not executed Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D ...

Page 565: ...re set to 0 Related instruction Errors An operation error occurs in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When to n are outside the specified device range error code K6706 When n is outside the range from 0 to 4 error code K6706 Program example In the program below the low order 4 bits of D0 to D2 are combined and stored in D10 when X000 turns ON I...

Page 566: ...ype Device number storing data to be separated 16 bit binary Head device number storing separated data n Number of data to be separated 0 to 4 When n is 0 DIS instruction is not executed Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K...

Page 567: ...20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Errors An operation error occurs in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When to n are outside the specified device range error code K6706 When n is outside the range from 0 to 4 error code K6706 Program example In the program below D0 is separated into 4 bit units and stored in D10 to D13 when X000 turns ON D ...

Page 568: ...cycle This instruction works in the same way as the extension function of the XCH FNC 17 instruction Operand type Description Data type Word device whose high order 8 bits and low order 8 bits are swapped for each other 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y...

Page 569: ...devices Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit operation SORT2 In the data table sorting source having m1 x m2 points from data lines are sorted in the ascending or descending order based on the group data in column No n and the result is stored in the data table occupying m1 x m2 points from For operation examples refer to Page 523 Operand type Description Data type Head device number sto...

Page 570: ...h the sorting source data table has 3 lines and 4 columns m1 K3 m2 K4 For the sorting result data table understand as Set the sorting order by setting M8165 to ON or OFF When a data register D or extension register R is used for m1 the data length is 32 bits For example when m1 is specified in D0 m1 is 32 bit data stored in D1 D0 When the command input turns ON data sorting is started Data sorting...

Page 571: ...ut a serial number such as a control number in the first column so that the original line number can be estimated based on the contents Sorting source data 1 Sorting result when the instruction is executed with n K2 column No 2 in the case of ascending order 2 Sorting result when the instruction is executed with n K3 column No 3 in the case of descending order Number of groups m2 K4 Column No 1 2 ...

Page 572: ...until execution of SORT2 instruction is completed Ensure that the sorted data does not overlap with the source data Note that the 32 bit values m1 1 m1 and n 1 n are valid when D or R is specified as m1 or n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DSORT2 D0 D50 K4 D100 R0 m1 is D51 D50 and n is R1 R0 Device Name Description M8029 Instruction execution complete Turns ON when data sorting is complete...

Page 573: ...ruction below while pulses are being output the PLC executes the operation shown below 1 Only available for FX3U FX3UC PLC Ver 2 20 or later and FX3G PLC FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 150 DSZR DOG Search Zero Return Section 20 1 151 DVIT Interrupt Positioning Section 20 2 152 TBL Batch Data Positioning Mode Section 20 3 153 154 155 ABS Absolute Current Value Read Section 20 4 156 ZRN Z...

Page 574: ...00 Y001 or Y002 1 transistor output from the main unit or specify Y000 Y001 Y002 3 or Y003 3 from a high speed output special adapter 2 1 Y002 is not available in 14 point and 24 point type FX3G PLC 2 High speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC 3 To use Y002 and Y003 with a high speed output special adapter connected a second high speed output special adapter Points When u...

Page 575: ...on writing during RUN During RUN avoid writing while the DSZR FNC150 instruction is executed that is while a pulse is output Note that if writing is executed during RUN to a circuit block including the FNC150 instruction while pulses are output the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output Function change depending on the version The function of FNC150 instruction is changed depending on the version ...

Page 576: ...3 with a high speed output special adapter connected a second high speed output special adapter Points When using a relay output type FX3U PLC a special high speed output adapter is required Outputs of special high speed output adapters work as differential line drivers Operand type Description Data type Number of output pulses incremental address after interrupt 1 16 or 32 bit binary Output pulse...

Page 577: ...the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output Function change depending on the version The functions of FNC151 instruction are changed depending on the version as shown in the table below For explanation of the instruction and the contents of function change refer to the Positioning Control Edition Special high speed output adapter No Pulse output Rotation direction output No 1 1st unit Y000 Y004 Y00...

Page 578: ...nd Y003 with a high speed output special adapter connected a second high speed output special adapter Points When using a relay output type FX3U PLC a special high speed output adapter is required Outputs of special high speed output adapters work as differential line drivers Explanation of function and operation Caution on writing during RUN Writing is disabled to a circuit block including the TB...

Page 579: ...ition 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 3 Applicable devices S1 Specify a transistor output S2 D b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs However index modifiers V and Z are not available S3 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation Operand type Description Data type Head device number inputting absolute ABS data output signal sent from servo amplifie...

Page 580: ...pecial adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC 3 To use Y002 and Y003 with a high speed output special adapter connected a second high speed output special adapter Points When using a relay output type FX3U PLC a special high speed output adapter is required Outputs of special high speed output adapters work as differential line drivers S3 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Oper...

Page 581: ...executed that is while pulses are output Note that if writing is executed during RUN to a circuit block including the FNC156 instruction while pulses are output the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output Function change depending on the version The function of FNC156 instruction is changed depending on the version as shown in the table below For explanation of the instruction and the contents of f...

Page 582: ... 3 To use Y002 or Y003 with a high speed output special adapter connected a second high speed output special adapter Points When using a relay output type FX3U PLC a special high speed output adapter is required Outputs of special high speed output adapters work as differential line drivers Operand type Description Data type Device number for output pulse frequency 1 16 or 32 bit binary Device num...

Page 583: ...while PLSV FNC157 instruction is executed that is while pulses are output Note that if writing is executed during RUN to a circuit block including FNC157 instruction while pulses are output the PLC executes the operation shown below 1 Only available for FX3U FX3UC PLC Ver 2 20 or later and FX3G PLC Function change depending on the version The function of the FNC157 instruction is changed depending...

Page 584: ...eed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC 3 To use Y002 or Y003 with a high speed output special adapter connected a second high speed output special adapter Points When using a relay output type FX3U PLC a special high speed output adapter is required Outputs of special high speed output adapters work as differential line drivers Operand type Description Data type Number of ou...

Page 585: ... the following table output When using a built in transistor output for the pulse output destination in an FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC the rotation direction signal must use transistor output S3 D b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs However index modifiers V and Z are not available S4 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation Caution on writing during ...

Page 586: ...e connected only to FX3U PLC 3 To use Y002 or Y003 with a high speed output special adapter connected a second high speed output special adapter Points When using a relay output type FX3U PLC a special high speed output adapter is required Outputs of special high speed output adapters work as differential line drivers Operand type Description Data type Number of output pulses absolute address 1 16...

Page 587: ... the following table output When using a built in transistor output for the pulse output destination in an FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC the rotation direction signal must use transistor output S3 D b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs However index modifiers V and Z are not available S4 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation Caution on writing during ...

Page 588: ...nd converts the format of the time data FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 160 TCMP RTC data compare Section 21 1 161 TZCP RTC data zone compare Section 21 2 162 TADD RTC data addition Section 21 3 163 TSUB RTC data subtraction Section 21 4 164 HTOS Hour to second conversion Section 21 5 165 STOH Second to hour conversion Section 21 6 166 TRD Read RTC data Section 21 7 167 TWR Set RTC data ...

Page 589: ...re not available S2 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Operand type Description Data type Specifies hour of the comparison time setting range 0 to 23 16 bit binary Specifies minute of the comparison time setting range 0 to 59 16 bit binary Specifies second of the comparison time setting range 0 to 59 16 bit binary Specifies hour of the time data hour minute and second Three devices...

Page 590: ...ON in the case of Turns ON in the case of Command input FNC160 TCMP S1 S2 S3 S D Even if the command contact turns OFF from ON and TCMP instruction is not executed 1 and 2 hold the status before the command contact turned OFF D 1 D 2 D minute hour second S1 S2 S3 minute hour second S1 S2 S3 minute hour second S1 S2 S3 S 1 minute hour 2 second S S S 1 minute hour 2 second S S S 1 minute hour 2 seco...

Page 591: ...in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs However index modifiers V and Z are not available S2 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Operand type Description Data type Specifies hour of the lower limit comparison time hour minute and second Three devices are occupied 16 bit binary Specifies hour of the upper limit comparison time hour minute and second Three devices are occupied 16 bit binary Specifies ...

Page 592: ...ntrols for the machine 2 When utilizing the time hour minute and second of the real time clock built in a PLC Read the values of special data registers by TRD FNC166 instruction and then specify those word devices as the operands S S S D Turns ON in the case of Turns ON in the case of Turns ON in the case of Command input FNC161 TZCP S1 S2 S D This instruction compares the comparison time zone spe...

Page 593: ... case of The setting range of hour is from 0 to 23 The setting range of minute is from 0 to 59 The setting range of second is from 0 to 59 S1 Specify the lower limit of the comparison time zone in hour minute and second S1 1 and 2 S1 S2 S2 1 and S2 2 Specify the upper limit of the comparison time zone in hour minute and second S S 1 and 2 S Specify the time data in hour minute and second 1 and 2 D...

Page 594: ... Description Data type Specifies hour of the time data hour minute and second used in addition Three devices are occupied 16 bit binary Specifies hour of the time data hour minute and second used in addition Three devices are occupied 16 bit binary Stores the addition result hour minute and second of two time data Three devices are occupied 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Othe...

Page 595: ...ccupied devices Three devices are occupied by and respectively Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine 2 When utilizing the time hour minute and second of the real time clock built in a PLC Read the values of special data registers using the TRD FNC166 instruction and then specify those word devices as the operands Program example When the operation result excee...

Page 596: ...rand type Description Data type Specifies hour of the time data hour minute and second used in subtraction Three devices are occupied 16 bit binary Specifies hour of the time data hour minute and second used in subtraction Three devices are occupied 16 bit binary Stores the subtraction result hour minute and second of two time data Three devices are occupied 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices...

Page 597: ...upied devices Three devices are occupied by and respectively Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine 2 When utilizing the time hour minute and second of the real time clock built in a PLC Read the values of special data registers using TRD FNC166 instruction and then specify those word devices as the operands Program example When the operation result is smaller ...

Page 598: ...as follows Operand type Description Data type Head device number storing the time data hour minute and second before conversion 16 bit binary Device number storing the time data second after conversion 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX K...

Page 599: ...utes 58 seconds is specified the operation is as follows Error An operation error is caused in the following case The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When the data of 1 or 2 is outside the allowable range error code K6706 Program example In the program shown below the time data read from the real time clock built in a PLC is converted into data in units of second an...

Page 600: ...n is as follows Operand type Description Data type Device number storing the time data second before conversion 16 or 32 bit binary Head device number storing the time data hour minute and second after conversion 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b ...

Page 601: ...d stored to three devices 1 and 2 hour minute and second For example when 45 325 seconds is specified the operation is as follows Error An operation error is caused in the following case The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is store in D8067 When the data of is outside the allowable range error code K6706 Program example In the program shown below the time data in units of second store...

Page 602: ...ake sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine Operand type Description Data type Specifies the head device number storing the clock data Seven devices are occupied 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C ...

Page 603: ...uilt in a PLC 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 3 Applicable devices S This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation The clock data stored in to 6 is written to D8013 to D8019 for the real time clock built in a PLC Operand type Description Data type Specifies the head device number to which the clock data is written Seven devices are occupied 16 bit binary ...

Page 604: ...k data time using this instruction it is not necessary to control the special auxiliary relay M8015 time stop and time setting If a numeric value indicating impossible date time is set the clock data is not changed Set the correct clock data and then write it Caution 1 Number of occupied devices Seven devices are occupied by Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machi...

Page 605: ...C mode is changed to RUN A PLC is normally operating in the 2 digit year mode When the above instruction is executed and K2000 fixed value is transferred to D8018 year in only one operation cycle after the PLC mode was changed to RUN the year mode is switched to the 4 digit mode Execute this program every time the PLC mode is changed to RUN Even if K2000 is transferred only the display format is c...

Page 606: ...ed even after the PLC turns OFF If a general type data register is used the current value data is cleared when the power of the PLC is turned OFF or when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN Even after the alarm output turns ON the measurement is continued When the current value reaches the maximum value of 16 bit data the measurement is stopped For continuing the measurement clear the current v...

Page 607: ...F If a general data type register is used the current value data is cleared when the power of the PLC is turned OFF or when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN Even after the alarm output turns ON the measurement is continued When the current value 1 reaches the maximum value of 32 bit data the measurement is stopped For continuing the measurement clear the current value stored in to 2 Caution ...

Page 608: ...ns for gray codes used in absolute type rotary encoders and instructions dedicated to analog blocks FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 170 GRY Decimal to Gray Code Conversion Section 22 1 171 GBIN Gray Code to Decimal Conversion Section 22 2 172 173 174 175 176 RD3A Read form Dedicated Analog Block Section 22 3 177 WR3A Write to Dedicated Analog Block Section 22 4 178 179 D S GRY D S GBIN D...

Page 609: ...ry value can be converted into a gray code of up to 32 bits can store a value from 0 to 2 147 483 647 Caution The data conversion speed depends on the scan time of the PLC Operand Type Description Data Type Conversion source data or word device storing conversion source data 16 or 32 bit binary Word device storing data after conversion 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Oth...

Page 610: ...be converted using the REFF FNC51 instruction or D8020 filter adjustment so that the delay caused by the filter constant is eliminated 1 X000 to X007 in FX3G PLCs Operand Type Description Data Type Conversion source data or word device storing conversion source data 16 or 32 bit binary Word device storing data after conversion 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others Syste...

Page 611: ...K7 FX3UC 32MT LT 2 K1 to K7 K0 indicates the built in CC Link LT master m2 Analog input channel number FX0N 3A 1 K1 ch 1 or K2 ch 2 FX2N 2AD K21 ch 1 or K22 ch 2 Read data A value read from the analog block is stored FX0N 3A 1 0 to 255 8 bits FX2N 2AD 0 to 4095 12 bits 1 The FX0N 3A is available only for the FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Operand Type Description Data Type m1 Special block number FX3G FX3U F...

Page 612: ...o the analog block FX0N 3A 1 0 to 255 8 bits FX2N 2DA 0 to 4095 12 bits 1 The FX0N 3A is available only for the FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Operand Type Description Data Type m1 Special block number FX3G FX3U FX3UC D DSS PLC K0 to K7 FX3UC 32MT LT 2 K1 to K7 16 bit binary m2 Analog output channel number 16 bit binary Data to be written or word device storing data to be written 16 bit binary Oper and Type ...

Page 613: ...vice Inverter Comms 23 Introduction of Alternate Instructions FNC180 23 1 Instruction correspondence table Outline EXTR instruction is provided for FX2N and FX2NC PLCs For FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLCs equipped with the built in inverter communication function dedicated instructions shown below are provided EXTR instruction is not provided Instruction correspondence table 1 This function is supported only ...

Page 614: ...rs executing CRC data operations and processing data in high speed counter operations FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 181 182 COMRD Read device comment data Section 24 1 183 184 RND Random Number Generation Section 24 2 185 186 DUTY Timing pulse generation Section 24 3 187 188 CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check Section 24 4 189 HCMOV High speed counter move Section 24 5 COMRD D S RND D DUTY D n...

Page 615: ...r for which comment to be read is registered Device name Head device number storing read comment Character string Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 P FNC 182 COMRD Mnemonic Operation Con...

Page 616: ...rns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When a comment is not registered for the device error code K6706 When the range of points used from for the comment exceeds the corresponding device range error code K6706 ON OFF status Contents of processing M8091 OFF When M8091 is OFF 0000H is written to in the device following the final character M8091 ON When M8091 is ON the device following the fin...

Page 617: ...219 Data Operation 3 28 FNC220 FNC249 Data Comparison 29 FNC250 FNC269 Data Table Operation 30 FNC270 FNC274 Ex Device Inverter Comms Program example In the program shown below the comment Target Line A registered to D100 is stored in ASCII code in D0 and later when X010 is set to ON And since M8091 is OFF 0000H is written to the device following the last character X010 FNC182 COMRDP D100 D0 RST M...

Page 618: ... source value Pseudo random number calculation equation D8311 D8310 D8311 D8310 1 1103515245 12345 1 D8311 D8310 16 logical product 00007FFFh 1 To D8311 D8310 write a non negative value 0 to 2 147 483 647 only once when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN K1 is written to D8311 D8310 as the initial value when the power is restored Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing a ...

Page 619: ... Comparison 29 FNC250 FNC269 Data Table Operation 30 FNC270 FNC274 Ex Device Inverter Comms Program example In the program example shown below a random number is stored to D100 every time X010 turns ON When the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN the time data converted into seconds and added by the value Year Month Day is written to D8311 and D8310 Data in hour minute and second Data in second X01...

Page 620: ...Specify either one among M8330 to M8334 as the timing clock output destination device Operand Type Description Data Type n1 Number of scans operation cycles to remain ON n1 0 16 bit binary n2 Number of scans operation cycles to remain OFF n2 0 Timing clock output destination Bit Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant R...

Page 621: ...be used up to 5 times points It is not permitted however to use the same timing clock output destination device for two or more DUTY FNC186 instructions Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When n1 and or n2 is less than 0 error code K6706 When any device other than M8330 to M8334 is set to error code K6705 T...

Page 622: ... Edition 24 Others FNC181 to FNC189 24 3 FNC186 DUTY Timing Pulse Generation Program example In the program shown below when X000 is set to ON M8330 is set to ON for 1 scan and OFF for 3 scans X000 FNC186 DUTY K3 M8330 END K1 OFF OFF ON ON X000 M8330 1 scan 3 scans 0 1 2 3 0 1 D8330 current value ...

Page 623: ...evices S Make sure to specify four digits K4 when specifying the digits of a bit device Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit operation CRC value is generated for n 8 bit data unit byte starting from a device specified in and stored to The 8 bit conversion mode and 16 bit conversion mode are available in this instruction and the mode can be switched by turning ON or OFF M8161 For the oper...

Page 624: ...ce Contents of target data 8 bits 16 bits Device storing data for which the CRC value is generated Low order byte Low order bits of D100 01H 0301H High order byte High order bits of D100 03H 1 Low order byte Low order bits of D101 03H 0203H High order byte High order bits of D101 02H 2 Low order byte Low order bits of D102 00H 1400H High order byte High order bits of D102 14H n 2 1 Low order byte ...

Page 625: ...5 X2 1 is used as a polynomial for generating the CRC value CRC 16 There are many other standard polynomials for generating the CRC value Note that the CRC value completely differs if an adopted polynomial is different Reference Major polynomials for generating the CRC value Example D100 D0 n 6 Device Contents of target data Device storing data for which the CRC value is generated Low order byte L...

Page 626: ...stored to D0 when M0 turns ON 1 In the case of 16 bit mode 2 In the case of 8 bit mode Contents of data Target data Device storing data for which CRC value is generated D100 3130H Low order byte 30H High order byte 31H D101 3332H Low order byte 32H High order byte 33H D102 3534H Low order byte 34H High order byte 35H D103 3736H Low order byte 36H Device storing generated CRC value D0 2ACFH Low ord...

Page 627: ...ue of the high speed counter or ring counter is processed as shown in the table below depending on the set value of n 1 Ring counters D8099 and D8398 cannot be specified in FX3UC PLCs before Ver 2 20 Operand Type Description Data Type Device number of high speed counter or ring counter 1 handled as transfer source 32 bit binary Device number handled as transfer destination n Specification to clear...

Page 628: ...he Program example 2 When DHCMOV instruction is used just before a comparison instruction CMP ZCP or comparison contact instruction the latest value of a high speed counter is used in comparison The following points must be kept in mind when using the DHCMOV command When the current value of a high speed counter is compared using CMP ZCP or comparison contact instruction not using a designated hig...

Page 629: ...n programming DHCMOV instruction in the 1st line in an input interrupt program make sure to use the pattern program shown below Make sure to use the command contact M8394 3 If two or more DHCMOV instructions are used in one input interrupt program only the first instruction just after the interrupt pointer is executed when the interrupt is generated The rest of the interrupt including additional D...

Page 630: ...error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When a device specified in or 1 is outside the allowable range error code K6705 Program examples 1 Program example 1 In the program example below the current value of the high speed counter C235 is compared in each operation cycle and then the output Y000 is set to ON if the current value is K500 or more when the current value of C235...

Page 631: ... Table Operation 30 FNC270 FNC274 Ex Device Inverter Comms 2 Program example 2 In the program example shown below the current value of C235 is transferred to D201 and D200 and the current value of C235 is cleared when X001 turns from OFF to ON 1 K0 The current value of the high speed counter is not cleared when DHCMOV instruction is executed K1 The current value of the high speed counter is cleare...

Page 632: ...ference 190 191 192 BK Block Data Addition Section 25 1 193 BK Block Data Subtraction Section 25 2 194 BKCMP Block Data Compare Section 25 3 195 BKCMP Block Data Compare Section 25 3 196 BKCMP Block Data Compare Section 25 3 197 BKCMP Block Data Compare Section 25 3 198 BKCMP Block Data Compare Section 25 3 199 BKCMP Block Data Compare Section 25 3 n D S2 S1 BK n D S2 S1 BK n D S2 S1 BKCMP S1 S2 n...

Page 633: ...can be directly specified in Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing addition data 16 or 32 bit binary Added constant or head device number storing addition data Head device number storing operation result n Number of data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointe...

Page 634: ...instruction Instruction Description BK FNC193 Subtracts binary block data Command input FNC192 DBK P S1 S2 n D S2 S2 S1 S1 D D 1 b31 b0 n points K1234 K40000 K 1234 K 2000 K4000 3 2 5 4 2n 3 2n 4 2n 1 2n 2 1 b31 b0 n points K4000 K1234 K5000 K 1234 K4321 3 2 5 4 2n 3 2n 4 2n 1 2n 2 S2 1 b31 b0 n points K5234 K41234 K3766 K 3234 K8321 3 2 5 4 2n 3 2n 4 2n 1 2n 2 D D D D D D D D D D S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S...

Page 635: ...rror is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When n 2n in 32 bit operation devices starting from and or exceed the corresponding device range error code K6706 When n 2n in 32 bit operation devices starting from overlap n 2n in 32 bit operation devices starting from error code K6706 When n 2n in 32 bit operation devices starting from over...

Page 636: ...toring subtraction data Head device number storing operation result n Number of data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 n 3 3 3 3 DBK DBK P Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instr...

Page 637: ...wing processing is executed At this time the carry flag does not turn ON In the case of 16 bit operation In the case of 32 bit operation Note that the 32 bit value n 1 n is valid when D or R is specified as n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DBK D0 D100 D200 R0 n is R1 R0 Instruction Description BK FNC192 Adds binary block data K 32768 H8000 K2 H0002 K32766 H7FFE K32767 H7FFF K 2 HFFFE K 327...

Page 638: ...ge error code K6706 When n 2n in 32 bit operation devices starting from overlap n 2n in 32 bit operation devices starting from error code K6706 When n 2n in 32 bit operation devices starting from overlap n 2n in 32 bit operation devices starting from error code K6706 Program example In the program shown below the constant 8765 is subtracted from the data stored in D100 to D102 when X010 is set to ...

Page 639: ... 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 n 3 3 3 3 DBKCMP DBKCMP P Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction 9 steps BKCMP BKCMP P Mnemonic Operation Condition Continuous Operation Pulse Single Operation 32 bit Instruction 17 steps Continuous Operation Pulse Single Operation P FNC 194 BKCMP D DBKCMP DBKCMP P Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction 9 steps BKCMP BKCMP P Mnemonic Operation Condition Con...

Page 640: ...Instruction Comparison result ON 1 condition Comparison result OFF 0 condition BKCMP FNC194 BKCMP FNC195 BKCMP FNC196 BKCMP FNC197 BKCMP FNC198 BKCMP FNC199 S1 S2 D FNCOOO 1 BKCMP 2 Command input S1 S2 n D 1 The number out of 194 to 199 is put in OOO 2 The symbol out of or corresponding to the FNC No is put in S1 0 1 2 n 2 n 1 n points S2 0 1 2 n 2 n 1 n points D 0 Comparison result 1 2 n 2 n 1 n ...

Page 641: ...ondition Comparison result OFF 0 condition DBKCMP FNC194 1 1 1 1 DBKCMP FNC195 1 1 1 1 DBKCMP FNC196 1 1 1 1 DBKCMP FNC197 1 1 1 1 DBKCMP FNC198 1 1 1 1 DBKCMP FNC199 1 1 1 1 Device Name Description M8090 Block comparison signal Turns ON when all comparison results are ON 1 in a block data instruction DBKCMP FNC194 DBKCMP FNC195 DBKCMP FNC196 DBKCMP FNC197 DBKCMP FNC198 and DBKCMP FNC199 S1 S1 S2 ...

Page 642: ... DBKCMP D0 D100 M0 R0 n is R1 R0 Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When the range of n 2n in 32 bit operation points starting from and or exceeds the corresponding device range error code K6706 When the range of n points starting from exceeds the corresponding device range error code K6706 When data regist...

Page 643: ...ing from D200 by BKCMP FNC194 instruction when X020 is set to ON and the comparison result is stored in four points starting from M10 When the comparison result is ON 1 in all of the four points starting from M10 Y000 is set to ON 2 In the program shown below the constant K1000 is compared with four data starting from D10 when X010 is set to ON and the comparison result is stored in b4 to b7 of D0...

Page 644: ...Conversion Section 26 1 201 VAL Character String to BIN Conversion Section 26 2 202 Link Character Strings Section 26 3 203 LEN Character String Length Detection Section 26 4 204 RIGHT Extracting Character String Data from the Right Section 26 5 205 LEFT Extracting Character String Data from the Left Section 26 6 206 MIDR Random Selection of Character Strings Section 26 7 207 MIDW Random Replaceme...

Page 645: ...ta into character strings For character strings refer to Section 5 3 For ESTR FNC116 instruction refer to Section 18 4 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 3 Applicable devices Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing the number of digits of a numeric value to be converted 16 bit binary Device number storing binary data to be converted 16 or 32 bit binary Head device number storing...

Page 646: ... to 0 the decimal point is not added When the number of digits of the decimal part 1 is larger than the number of digits of 16 bit binary data stored in 0 30H is automatically added and the data is shifted to the right end during conversion S1 S2 S1 D Command input FNC200 STR S2 S1 D 5 1 1 2 3 S1 0 1 b15 0 2 b8 b7 b0 00H is automatically stored at the end of a character string D S2 1 For number of...

Page 647: ...art 1 and stored in and later 2 Set the number of all digits in the range from 2 to 13 3 Set the number of digits of the decimal part 1 in the range from 0 to 10 Make sure to satisfy Number of digits of decimal part Number of all digits 3 4 32 bit binary data to be converted stored in 1 should be within the range from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 1 2 3 20H space is stored in each digit 8 1 123 N...

Page 648: ...ring is automatically stored at the end of a converted character string When the number of all digits is even 0000H is stored in the device after the last character When the number of all digits is odd 00H is stored in the high order byte 8 bits of the device storing the final character Related instructions Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON an...

Page 649: ...igits 3 Number of digits of decimal part When the number of all digits stored in including the digit for sign and the digit for decimal point is smaller than the number of digits of the binary data stored in 1 error code K6706 When the devices and later storing a character string exceeds the corresponding device range error code K6706 Program example In the program below the 16 bit binary data sto...

Page 650: ...number storing a character string to be converted into binary data Character string Head device number storing the number of all digits of the binary data acquired by conversion 16 bit binary Head device number storing the binary data acquired by conversion 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Rea...

Page 651: ...uding the number sign and decimal point 4 1 stores the number of digits of the decimal part The number of digits of the decimal part indicates the number of all characters after the decimal point 2EH 5 stores 16 bit data bin converted from a character string with the decimalpoint ignored In the character string located in and later space 20H and 0 30H characters between the sign and the first numb...

Page 652: ...its of the decimal part The number of digits of the decimal part indicates the number of all characters after the decimal point 2EH Description Number of all characters digits 2 to 13 Number of characters digits of decimal part 0 to 10 and smaller than number of all digits 3 Numeric range when decimal point is ignored 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Example 12345 678 12345678 Character type Sign Po...

Page 653: ...umber of characters of the character string to be converted and later is outside the following ranges error code K6706 When the number of characters after the decimal point of the character string to be converted and later is outside the following ranges error code K6706 When the relationship between the number of all characters in the character string to be converted and later and the number of c...

Page 654: ... stored in D0 when X000 is set to ON 2 In the program below the character string data stored in D20 to D24 is regarded as an integer value converted into a binary value and stored in D0 when X000 is set to ON Setting range 16 bit operation 32768 to 32767 32 bit operation 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 S X000 FNC201 VALP D10 D0 END D20 1654 6 2 b15 b8 b7 b0 D20 D21 D22 31H 1 2EH 2DH 36H 6 34H 4 35H...

Page 655: ...ing from A character string stored in or or later indicates the data from the specified device to the first 00H in units of byte Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing the link source data character string or directly specified character string Character string Head device number storing the link data character string or directly specified character string Head device number...

Page 656: ...hat is when the number of characters is 0 0000H is stored in Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When the number of devices after a device number specified by is smaller than the number of devices required to store all linked character strings that is when 00H cannot be stored after all character strings and...

Page 657: ...rom until the first device storing 00H is handled as a character string in units of byte For example when ABCDEFGHI is stored in and later as shown below K9 is stored to Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing a character string whose length is to be detected Character string Device number storing the detected character string length number of bytes 16 bit binary Oper and Typ...

Page 658: ...e error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When 00H is not set within the corresponding device range after a device specified by error code K6706 When the detected number of characters is 32768 or more error code K6706 Program example In the program example shown below the length of a character string stored in D0 and later is output in 4 digit BCD to Y040 to Y057 when X000 ...

Page 659: ...ion extracts a specified number of characters from the right end of a specified character string For handling of character strings refer to Section 5 3 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 3 Applicable devices Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing a character string Character string Head device number storing extracted character string n Number of characters to be extracted 16 b...

Page 660: ... length of 1 character is detected as 2 When extracting characters from a character string including character codes in which 2 bytes express 1 character such as shift JIS codes consider the number of characters to be extracted in units of character codes for 1 character Note that the expected character code is not given if only 1 byte is executed out of a 2 byte character code S D D FNC204 RIGHT ...

Page 661: ...067 When 00H is not set within the corresponding device range after a device specified by error code K6706 When n exceeds the number of characters specified by error code K6706 When the number of devices after a device number specified by is smaller than the number of devices required to store extracted n characters that is when 00H cannot be stored after all character strings and the last charact...

Page 662: ...ata 3 Applicable devices Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing a character string Character string Head device number storing extracted character string n Number of characters to be extracted 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D...

Page 663: ... device until 00H is first detected in byte units Cautions When handling character codes other than ASCII codes note the following contents The number of characters is handled in byte units 8 bits Accordingly in the case of character codes in which 2 bytes express 1 character such as shift JIS codes the length of 1 character is detected as 2 When extracting characters from a character string inclu...

Page 664: ...cified by is smaller than the number of devices required to store extracted n characters that is when 00H cannot be stored after all character strings and the last character error code K6706 When n is a negative value error code K6706 Program example In the program example shown below the number of characters which is equivalent to the number stored in D0 are extracted from the left end of the cha...

Page 665: ... a specified character string For handling of character strings refer to Section 5 3 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 3 Applicable devices Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing a character string Character string Head device number storing extracted character string Head device number specifying the head position and number of characters to be extracted Head character positi...

Page 666: ...ng stored in and later indicates data stored in devices from the specified device until 00H is first detected in units of byte When the number of characters to be extracted specified by 1 is 0 the extraction processing is not executed When the number of characters to be extracted specified by 1 is 1 the entire character string stored in and later is stored to and later S2 S2 S1 D S2 S2 46H F 45H E...

Page 667: ...ration error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When 00H is not set within the corresponding device range after a device specified by error code K6706 When the value specified by 1 exceeds the number of characters specified by error code K6706 When the number of characters specified by 1 from the position specified by exceeds the de...

Page 668: ... character string used in overwriting Character string Head device number storing character string to be overwritten Head device number specifying the head position and number of characters to be overwritten Head character position to be overwritten 1 Number of characters to be overwritten 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Speci...

Page 669: ...n and later data is stored up to the last character S2 S1 S2 D 48H H 47H G 35H 5 34H 4 31H 1 30H 0 32H 2 31H 1 30H 0 33H 3 32H 2 35H 5 34H 4 FNC207 MIDW S1 D S2 1 2 4 3 b15 b8b7 b0 012345678 D D 1 2 b15 b8b7 b0 D S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 37H 7 36H 6 00H 38H 8 42H B 41H A 44H D 43H C 46H F 45H E ABCDEFGHI 1 S2 S2 6 3 Position from the left end in the character string stored in and later Number of characters ...

Page 670: ... error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When 00H is not set within the corresponding device range after a device specified by or error code K6706 When the value specified by exceeds the number of characters of the character string stored in and later error code K6706 When the number of characters specified by 1 exceeds the number ...

Page 671: ...x Device Inverter Comms Program example In the program example shown below 4 characters are extracted from the character string data stored in D0 and later and stored to the 3rd character from the left end and later for the character string data stored in D100 and later when X010 turns ON 59H Y 43H C 31H 1 5AH Z 31H 1 32H 2 45H E 46H F 31H 1 32H 2 45H E 46H F X010 D100 FNC207 MIDWP D0 END R0 D1 D2...

Page 672: ...device number storing a character string Character string Head device number storing a character string to be searched Character string Head device number storing search result 16 bit binary n Search start position 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D ...

Page 673: ...tarting from error code K6706 When 00H NULL is not located within the corresponding device range starting from error code K6706 Program example 1 In the program example below the character string CI23 D0 and later is searched from the 5th character from the left end head character of the character string CI2312CIM R0 and later when X000 is set to ON The search result is stored in D100 S1 42H B 41H...

Page 674: ...y specified character string up to 32 characters or head device number storing character string which is handled as the transfer source Character string Head device number storing transferred character string Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T ...

Page 675: ...red to D11 to D14 the transfer is executed as shown below Caution When 00H is stored in the low order byte of n 00H is stored to both the high order byte and low order byte of n Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When 00H does not exist in the range specified from device error code K6706 When the specified ...

Page 676: ...Control FNC200 to FNC209 26 10 FNC209 MOV Character String Transfer Program example In the program example shown below character string data stored in D10 to D12 is transferred to D20 through D22 X000 FNC209 MOV D10 D20 END b15 b8 b7 b0 D10 4DH M D11 D12 45H E 2AH b15 b8 b7 b0 D20 D21 D22 45H E 4DH M 45H E 0000H 2AH 45H E 00H ...

Page 677: ...FNC250 FNC269 Data Table Operation 30 FNC270 FNC274 Ex Device Inverter Comms 27 Data Operation 3 FNC210 to FNC219 FNC210 to FNC219 provide instructions for reading last in data and controlling leftward rightward shift instructions with carry FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 210 FDEL Deleting Data from Tables Section 27 1 211 FINS Inserting Data to Tables Section 27 2 212 POP Shift Last Da...

Page 678: ...indicating the number of stored data Refer to the program example Operand Type Description Data Type Device number storing deleted data 16 bit binary Head device number in data table n Position of deleted data in table Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY ...

Page 679: ...ange of the data table error code K6706 When the FNC210 instruction is executed under the condition n 0 error code K6706 When the amount of data stored specified in is 0 error code K6706 When the data table range exceeds the corresponding device range error code K6706 Program example In the program shown below the 2nd data entry is deleted from the data table stored in D100 to D105 and the deleted...

Page 680: ...g from the next device 1 after indicating the number of stored data Refer to the program example Operand Type Description Data Type Device number storing inserted data 16 bit binary Head device number in data table n Data insertion position in table Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String P...

Page 681: ...ata plus 1 error code K6706 When the value n exceeds the device range of the data table error code K6706 When FNC211 instruction is executed under the condition n 0 error code K6706 When the data table range exceeds the corresponding device range error code K6706 Program example In the program shown below data stored in D100 is inserted into the 3rd position of the data table stored in D0 to D4 Wh...

Page 682: ...rst out control is read to Specify n in the range from 2 to 512 Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing first in data including pointer data 16 bit binary Device number storing last out data n Length of data array Add 1 because pointer data is also included 2 n 512 Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con...

Page 683: ... may not be achieved Usually program this instruction in the pulse operation type or let this instruction be executed by a pulsed command contact When the current value of the pointer is 0 the zero flag M8020 turns ON and the instruction is not executed Check in advance using a comparison instruction whether the current value of satisfies 1 n 1 and then execute this instruction When the current va...

Page 684: ...red data pointer D100 every time X000 turns ON When the first in data are as shown in the table below Pointer D100 K3 Data D101 H1234 D102 H5678 D103 HABCD D104 H0000 D105 H0000 D106 H0000 FNC 38 SFWR D20 K7 END D100 FNC212 POP D100 K7 D10 X000 First in command Last in read command D20 D106 D105 D104 D103 D102 D101 D100 H0000 H0000 H0000 HABCD H5678 H1234 K3 First in command D100 K2 K3 D100 K1 K2 ...

Page 685: ...pecified as n 16 bits are shifted rightward by the remainder of n 16 For example when n is set to 18 16 bits are shifted rightward by 2 bits 18 16 1 2 2 The ON 1 OFF 0 status of the n th bit bit n 1 in the word device is transferred to the carry flag M8022 3 0 is set to n bits from the most significant bit Operand Type Description Data Type Device number storing data to be shifted 16 bit binary n ...

Page 686: ...8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When a negative value is set to n error code K6706 Program example In the program example shown below the contents of Y010 to Y023 are shifted rightward by the number of bits specified by D0 when X020 turns ON Device Name Description M8022 Carry flag Shifts the ON OFF status of bit n 1 FNC213 SFRP K3M0 K4 Command input 1 M11 0 1 0 M8 1 0 1 0 1 0 ...

Page 687: ...ecified as n 16 bits are shifted leftward by the remainder of n 16 For example when n is set to 18 16 bits are shifted leftward by 2 bits 18 16 1 2 2 The ON 1 OFF 0 status of the n 1 th bit bit n in the word device is transferred to the carry flag M8022 3 0 is set to n bits from the least significant bit Operand Type Description Data Type Device number storing data to be shifted 16 bit binary n Nu...

Page 688: ...wing cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When a negative value is set to n error code K6706 Program example In the program example shown below the contents of Y010 to Y017 are shifted leftward by the number of bits specified by D0 when X020 turns ON Device Name Description M8022 Carry flag Shifts the ON OFF status of bit n FNC214 SFL K2M10 K3 Command input 0 0...

Page 689: ...e data comparison instructions which can be handled as contact symbols in programming such as LD AND and OR FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 220 221 222 223 224 LD Load Compare Section 28 1 225 LD Load Compare Section 28 1 226 LD Load Compare Section 28 1 227 228 LD Load Compare Section 28 1 229 LD Load Compare Section 28 1 230 LD Load Compare Section 28 1 231 232 AND AND Compare Section ...

Page 690: ...49 239 240 OR OR Compare Section 28 3 241 OR OR Compare Section 28 3 242 OR OR Compare Section 28 3 243 244 OR OR Compare Section 28 3 245 OR OR Compare Section 28 3 246 OR OR Compare Section 28 3 247 248 249 FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference S2 S1 OR S1 S2 S2 S1 OR S1 S2 S2 S1 OR S1 S2 S2 S1 OR S1 S2 S2 S1 OR S1 S2 S2 S1 OR S1 S2 ...

Page 691: ...r Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3 FNC 224 LD D Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction 5 steps LD Mnemonic Operation Condition Continuous Operation 32 bit Instruction 9 steps LDD Continuous Operation FNC 22...

Page 692: ... If a 32 bit counter is specified in the 16 bit operation such as LD LD and LD a program error or operation error will occur 3 Programming of data comparison instructions When programming in GX Developer symbols and cannot be input Separate into and and separate into and in input The input procedure is described below Operating procedure a Display the circuit program edit window and put the cursor...

Page 693: ... Operation 26 FNC200 FNC209 Character String Control 27 FNC210 FNC219 Data Operation 3 28 FNC220 FNC249 Data Comparison 29 FNC250 FNC269 Data Table Operation 30 FNC270 FNC274 Ex Device Inverter Comms Program example C10 FNC224 LD K200 S1 S2 Y10 K 30 FNC225 LD D200 X001 SET Y11 C200 FNC225 LDD K678493 M50 M3 When the current value of the counter C10 is 200 Y010 is driven When the contents of D200 a...

Page 694: ... 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3 FNC 232 AND D Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction 5 steps AND Mnemonic Operation Condition Continuous Operation 32 bit Instruction 9 steps ANDD Continuous Operation FNC 233 AND D Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction 5 steps AND Mnemonic Operation Condition Continuous Operation 32 bit Instruction 9 steps ANDD Continuous Operation FNC 234 AND D Mnemonic Operat...

Page 695: ...it 31 2 When using 32 bit counters including 32 bit high speed counters Make sure to execute the 32 bit operation such as ANDD ANDD and ANDD when comparing 32 bit counters C200 to C255 If a 32 bit counter is specified in the 16 bit operation such as AND AND and AND a program error or operation error will occur 3 Programming of data comparison instructions When programming in GX Developer symbols a...

Page 696: ...ple C10 FNC232 AND K200 Y10 D0 FNC236 AND K 10 X000 SET Y11 D10 FNC233 ANDD K678493 M50 M3 X001 X002 S1 S2 When X000 is ON and the current value of the counter C10 is 200 Y010 is driven When X001 is OFF and the contents of the data register D0 are not 10 Y011 is set When X002 is ON when the contents of the data registers D11 and D10 are less than K678 493 or when M3 turns ON M50 is driven ...

Page 697: ...ation System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3 FNC 240 OR D Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction 5 steps OR Mnemonic Operation Condition Continuous Operation 32 bit Instruction 9 steps ORD Continuous Operation FNC 241 OR D Mnemonic ...

Page 698: ...0 to C255 If a 32 bit counter is specified in the 16 bit operation such as ORD OR and OR a program error or operation error will occur 3 Programming of data comparison instructions When programming in GX Developer symbols and cannot be input Separate into and and separate into and The input procedure is described below Operating procedure a Display the circuit program edit window and put the curso...

Page 699: ...190 FNC199 Block Data Operation 26 FNC200 FNC209 Character String Control 27 FNC210 FNC219 Data Operation 3 28 FNC220 FNC249 Data Comparison 29 FNC250 FNC269 Data Table Operation 30 FNC270 FNC274 Ex Device Inverter Comms Program example Y000 X001 K100000 FNC246 ORD D100 M60 M30 X002 C10 FNC240 OR K200 S1 S2 When X001 turns ON or when the current value of the counter C10 is 200 Y000 is driven When ...

Page 700: ... 256 LIMIT Limit Control Section 29 1 257 BAND Dead Band Control Section 29 2 258 ZONE Zone Control Section 29 3 259 SCL Scaling Coordinate by Point Data Section 29 4 260 DABIN Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion Section 29 5 261 BINDA BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion Section 29 6 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 SCL2 Scaling 2 Coordinate by X Y Data Section 29 7 D LIMIT S3 S2 S1 D BAND S3 S2 S1 D ZONE ...

Page 701: ...data 3 Applicable devices Operand Type Description Data Type Lower limit value minimum output value 16 or 32 bit binary Upper limit value maximum output value Input value controlled by the upper and lower limit values Head device number storing the output value controlled by the upper and lower limit values Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User S...

Page 702: ...controlling the output value using only the upper limit value set 32768 to the lower limit value specified in When controlling the output value using only the lower limit value set 32767 to the upper limit value specified in S3 S1 S2 D FNC256 LIMIT S1 S2 D S3 Input value Output value Input value Output value Command input In the case of Lower limit value Input value Lower limit value Output value ...

Page 703: ...48 to the lower limit value specified in 1 When controlling the output value using only the lower limit value set 2 147 483 647 to the upper limit value specified in 1 Error An operation error is caused when the instruction is executed in the setting status shown below The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code K6706 is stored in D8067 Relationship 16 bit operation 32 bit operation 1 1 S3 S3...

Page 704: ...put to D1 In the case of D0 5000 5000 is output to D1 2 Program example 2 In the program example shown below the BCD data set in X020 to X057 is controlled by the limit values 10000 and 1 000 000 and the controlled value is output to D11 and D10 when X000 turns ON Operation In the case of D1 D0 10000 10000 is output to D11 D10 In the case of 10000 D1 D0 1 000 000 the value of D1 D0 is output to D1...

Page 705: ... 32 bit binary Upper limit value of the dead band no output band Input value controlled by the dead band Device number storing the output value controlled by the dead band Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 ...

Page 706: ...rror is caused when the instruction is executed in the setting status shown below The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code K6706 is stored in D8067 Relationship 16 bit operation 32 bit operation 1 1 S3 S3 S1 S1 S2 S2 D D FNC257 DBAND 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 S1 S2 S3 D Command input In the case of Lower limit value Input value Input value Lower limit value Output value In the case of Up...

Page 707: ...to 1000 and a controlled value is output to D1 when X000 turns ON Operation In the case of D0 1000 D0 1000 is output to D1 In the case of 1000 D0 1000 0 is output to D1 In the case of D0 1000 D0 1000 is output to D1 2 Program example 2 In the program example shown below the BCD data set in X020 to X057 is controlled by the dead band from 10000 to 10000 and a controlled value is output to D11 and D...

Page 708: ...Head device number storing the output value controlled by the zone Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 P FNC 258 ZONE D Mnemonic O...

Page 709: ... with sign Accordingly if the output value is outside the range from 32768 to 32767 it is handled as follows In the 32 bit operation The output value is a 32 bit binary value with sign Accordingly if the operation result is outside the range from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 it is handled as follows S1 S1 S2 S2 S3 S3 D D In the case of Input value 0 Input value Negative bias value Output value I...

Page 710: ...se of D 0 0 is output to D1 In the case of D0 0 D0 1000 is output to D1 2 Program example 2 In the program example shown below the BCD data set in X020 to X057 is controlled by the zone from 10000 to 10000 and the controlled value is output to D11 and D10 when X000 turns ON Operation In the case of D1 D0 0 D1 D0 10000 is output to D11 D10 In the case of D1 D0 0 the 0 is output to D11 D10 In the ca...

Page 711: ... configuration for scaling For SCL2 FNC269 instruction refer to Section 29 7 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 3 Applicable devices Operand Type Description Data Type Input value used in scaling or device number storing the input value 16 or 32 bit binary Head device number storing the conversion table used in scaling Device number storing the output value controlled by scaling Oper and Type Bit Dev...

Page 712: ...er in the first decimal place is rounded Conversion setting data table for scaling Set item Device assignment in setting data table Number of coordinate points 5 in the case shown in the left figure Point 1 X coordinate 1 Y coordinate 2 Point 2 X coordinate 3 Y coordinate 4 Point 3 X coordinate 5 Y coordinate 6 Point 4 X coordinate 7 Y coordinate 8 Point 5 X coordinate 9 Y coordinate 10 Conversion...

Page 713: ...he following configuration For a setting example refer to the next page Setting example of the conversion table for scaling A setting example for the 16 bit operation is shown below For the 32 bit operation set each item using a 32 bit binary value In the case of the conversion characteristics for scaling shown in the figure below set the following data table Set item Device assignment in setting ...

Page 714: ...oints Set item Setting device and setting contents Remarks When R0 is specified in Setting contents Number of coordinate points R0 K10 Point 1 X coordinate 1 R1 K5 Y coordinate 2 R2 K7 Point 2 X coordinate 3 R3 K20 Y coordinate 4 R4 K30 Point 3 X coordinate 5 R5 K50 Y coordinate 6 R6 K100 Point 4 X coordinate 7 R7 K200 When coordinates are specified using three points in this way the output value ...

Page 715: ...ample shown below the value input to D0 is processed by scaling based on the conversion table for scaling set in R0 and later and output to D10 Program Operation Conversion setting data table for scaling Set item Device Setting contents Number of coordinate points R0 K6 Point 1 X coordinate R1 K0 Y coordinate R2 K0 Point 2 X coordinate R3 K10 Y coordinate R4 K50 Point 3 X coordinate R5 K30 Y coord...

Page 716: ...ach digit is within the range from 30H to 39H 5 When an ASCII code for each digit is 20H space or 00H null it is handled as 30H Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing data ASCII codes to be converted into binary data Character string Device number storing conversion result 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification Syste...

Page 717: ...ror flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When the sign data stored in is any value other than 20H space or 2DH error code K6706 When an ASCII code for each digit stored in to 2 5 is any value other than 30H to 39H 20H space or 00H NULL error code K6706 When the numeric range of to 2 5 is outside the following range error code K6706 When to 2 5 exceeds the device range error co...

Page 718: ...ABIN Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion Program example In the program below the sign and decimal ASCII codes in five digits stored in D20 to D22 are converted into a binary value and stored in D0 when X000 is set to ON D20 b15 b8 b7 b0 276 D0 Binary value 36H 6 37H 7 20H space 32H 2 2DH 20H space END X000 FNC260 DABINP D20 D0 D21 D22 It is regarded as 00276 276 ...

Page 719: ... order byte of 20H space is set when the 16 bit binary data stored in is positive and 2DH is set when 16 bit binary data stored in is negative Operand Type Description Data Type Device number storing binary data to be converted into ASCII codes 16 or 32 bit binary Head device number storing conversion result Character string Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specifica...

Page 720: ...n the left side of the effective digits zero suppression c The high order byte of 5 is set as follows depending on the ON OFF status of M8091 ON OFF status Contents of processing M8091 OFF 3 is set to 0000H NULL M8091 ON 3 does not change ON OFF status Contents of processing M8091 OFF The high order byte of 5 is set to 00H NULL M8091 ON The high order byte of 5 is set to 20H space 0 0 3 2 5 20H Ef...

Page 721: ...ror flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When the occupied device point of storing the ASCII code character string exceeds the corresponding device rang error code K6706 Device Name Description M8091 Output character quantity selector signal For 16 bit operation When M8091 is OFF 3 is set to 0000H NULL When M8091 is ON 3 does not change For 32 bit operation When M8091 is OFF t...

Page 722: ...CII codes converted by PR FNC 77 instruction are output one by one in the time division method to Y040 to Y051 By setting to OFF the output character selector signal M8091 and setting to ON PR mode flag M8027 ASCII codes up to 00H are output For PR mode flag and PR FNC 77 instruction refer to Section 15 8 D0 b15 b8 b7 b0 5126 D1000 16 bit binary data 36H 6 32H 2 20H space 31H 1 20H space 35H 5 X00...

Page 723: ...truction is supported in the FX3UC Series Ver 1 30 or later For SCL FNC259 instruction refer to Section 29 4 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 3 Applicable devices Operand Type Description Data Type Input value used in scaling or device number storing the input value 16 or 32 bit binary Head device number storing the conversion table used in scaling Device number storing the output value controlled ...

Page 724: ...1 and later If the output data is not an integer however the number in the first decimal place is rounded Conversion setting data table for scaling Set item Device assignment in setting data table Number of coordinate points 5 in the case shown in the left figure X coordinate Point 1 1 Point 2 2 Point 3 3 Point 4 4 Point 5 5 Y coordinate Point 1 6 Point 2 7 Point 3 8 Point 4 9 Point 5 10 Conversio...

Page 725: ... 29 FNC250 FNC269 Data Table 30 FNC270 FNC274 Ex Device 3 Setting the conversion table for scaling The conversion table for scaling is set based on the data table stored in a device specified in 1 and later The data table has the following configuration For a setting example refer to the next page Set item Device assignment in setting data table 16 bit operation 32 bit operation Number of coordina...

Page 726: ... at the second point is output also 2 When coordinates are specified using two points as shown in the points 8 and 9 the output value is the Y coordinate at the next point In this example the output value is specified by the Y coordinate of the point 9 Set item Setting device and setting contents Remarks When R0 is specified in Setting contents Number of coordinate points R0 K10 X coordinate Point...

Page 727: ... the instruction is executed without operation error up to the area of the data table in which the Xn data is set in the ascending order When is outside the data table error code K6706 When the value exceeds the 32 bit data range in the middle of operation error code K6706 In this case check whether the distance between points is not 65535 or more If the distance is 65535 or more reduce the distan...

Page 728: ...ide instructions for controlling operations and reading writing parameters while two or more FREQROL inverters are connected FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 270 IVCK Inverter Status Check Section 30 1 271 IVDR Inverter Drive Section 30 2 272 IVRD Inverter Parameter Read Section 30 3 273 IVWR Inverter Parameter Write Section 30 4 274 IVBWR Inverter Parameter Block Write Section 30 5 n IVC...

Page 729: ...FX3G PLCs 3 Applicable devices S This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation For detailed explanation of the instruction refer to the Data Communication Edition manual 1 16 bit operation IVCK The operation status corresponding to the instruction code 1 specified in of an inverter connected to communication port n whose station number is specified in is ...

Page 730: ... H7B Operation mode 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 H6F Output frequency number of rotations 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 H70 Output current 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 H71 Output voltage 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 H72 Special monitor 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 H73 Special monitor selection number 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 H74 Abnormal contents 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 H75 Abnormal contents 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 H76 Abnormal contents 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 H77 Abnormal contents 3 3 3 ...

Page 731: ...is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation For detailed explanation of the instruction refer to the Data Communication Edition manual 1 16 bit operation IVDR The control value specified in is written to the instruction code 1 specified in of an inverter connected to a communication port n whose station number is specified in 1 Refer to the instruction code list show...

Page 732: ...erter specified in Written contents Corresponding inverter F700 A700 E700 D700 V500 F500 A500 E500 S500 HFB Operation mode 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 HF3 Special monitor selection number 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 HF9 Operation command extension 3 3 3 3 HFA Operation command 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 HEE Set frequency written to EEPROM 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 HED Set frequency written to RAM 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 HFD Inverter reset 3 3 ...

Page 733: ...ion manual 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 1 Ch2 is not available in 14 point and 24 point type FX3G PLCs 3 Applicable devices S This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation For detailed explanation of the instruction refer to the Data Communication Edition manual 1 16 bit operation IVRD The value of the parameter is read from an inverter connected to a ...

Page 734: ...can be driven for the same port at the same time PLC applicable version The table below shows PLC versions applicable to each inverter Number Description Number Description ch1 ch2 ch1 ch2 M8029 Instruction execution complete D8063 D8438 Error code of serial communication error M8063 M8438 Serial communication error D8150 D8155 Response wait time in inverter communication M8151 M8156 Inverter comm...

Page 735: ...rmat 2 Set data 1 Ch2 is not available in 14 point and 24 point type FX3G PLCs 3 Applicable devices S This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation For detailed explanation of the instruction refer to the Data Communication Edition manual 1 16 bit operation IVWR A value specified in is written to a parameter in an inverter connected to a communication por...

Page 736: ...en a wrong password is written to Pr297 due to a password input error When the writing instruction is executed once a password reset error occurs 3 times When the password cannot be written correctly to Pr297 due to noise etc A password reset error occurs up to 3 times 2 When registering the password When registering the password in the D700 Series inverter using an inverter communication instruct...

Page 737: ... FNC181 FNC189 Others 25 FNC190 FNC199 Block Data Operation 26 FNC200 FNC209 Character String Control 27 FNC210 FNC219 Data Operation 3 28 FNC220 FNC249 Data Comparison 29 FNC250 FNC269 Data Table Operation 30 FNC270 FNC274 Ex Device Inverter Comms PLC applicable version The table below shows PLC versions applicable to each inverter PLC FREQROL V500 F500 A500 E500 S500 FREQROL F700 A700 FREQROL E7...

Page 738: ... format 2 Set data 3 Applicable devices Operand Type Description Data Type Station number of an inverter K0 to K31 16 bit binary Number of parameters in an inverter to be written at one time Head device number of a parameter table to be written to an inverter n Used channel K1 ch 1 K2 ch 2 Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index ...

Page 739: ...ns For other cautions refer to the Data Communication Edition manual It is not permitted to use an RS FNC 80 RS2 FNC 87 FLCRT FNC300 FLDEL FNC301 FLWR FNC302 FLRD FNC303 FLCMD FNC304 FLSTRD FNC305 instruction and an IVCK FNC270 IVDR FNC271 IVRD FNC272 IVWR FNC273 IVBWR FNC274 instruction for the same port Two or more inverter communication instructions FNC270 to FNC274 can be driven for the same p...

Page 740: ...pending on the PLC version Available inverter models are added depending on the version as shown in the table below Applicable version Item Outline of function FX3U FX3UC Ver 2 32 or later Ver 2 32 or later Addition of applicable models Mitsubishi FREQROL E700 Series general purpose inverters are supported Ver 2 20 or later Ver 2 20 or later Addition of applicable models Mitsubishi FREQROL F700 A7...

Page 741: ...U CF ADP 35 SFC STL Programming 36 Interrupt Function 37 Special Device 38 Error Code A Version Up Information B Execution Times 31 Data Transfer 3 FNC275 to FNC279 FNC275 to FNC279 provide instructions for executing more complicated processing for fundamental applied instructions and for special processing FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 275 276 277 278 RBFM Divided BFM Read Section 31 ...

Page 742: ...ion refer to Section 15 9 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 3 Applicable devices S Except special data register D Operand Type Description Data Type m1 Unit number 0 to 7 16 bit binary data m2 Head buffer memory BFM number 0 to 32766 Head device number storing data to be read from buffer memory BFM n1 Number of all buffer memories BFM to be read 1 to 32767 n2 Number of points transferred in one oper...

Page 743: ...n flag M8328 is set to ON and execution of such an instruction is paused When execution of the other target instruction is complete the paused instruction resumes Related devices For the flag use methods for instruction execution complete and instruction execution abnormally complete refer to Subsection 6 5 2 Related instructions Errors An operation error is caused in the following case The error ...

Page 744: ...67 16 bit RAM memories are built in a special extension unit block and they are called buffer memories The buffer memory number is from 0 to 32766 and the contents are determined according to each special function unit block Setting range K0 to K32766 For the contents of buffer memories refer to the manual of the special function block unit used Cautions A watchdog timer error may occur when many ...

Page 745: ...indexing is executed the contents of index registers at the begining of execution are used Even if the contents of index registers are changed after the instruction such changes do not affect the process of the instruction The contents of n1 devices starting from change while RBFM FNC278 instruction is executed After execution of the instruction is completed execute another instruction for n1 devi...

Page 746: ...rt flag is set to ON FNC279 WBFM K2 K1001 D100 K80 K16 BFM write start M0 BFM write start M8029 Instruction execution complete RST M0 M8329 Instruction execution abnormally complete RST M0 X001 SET M5 BFM read start FNC278 RBFM K2 K2001 D200 K80 K16 M5 BFM read start M8029 Instruction execution complete RST M5 M8329 Instruction execution abnormally complete RST M5 END D100 to D179 80 points are wr...

Page 747: ...e time division method TO FNC 79 instruction is also available for writing data to the buffer memory BFM For TO FNC 79 instruction refer to Section 15 10 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 3 Applicable devices S Except special data register D Operand Type Description Data Type m1 Unit number 0 to 7 16 bit binary data m2 Head buffer memory BFM number 0 to 32766 Head device number storing data to be wr...

Page 748: ...plete the paused instruction resumes Related devices For the flag use methods for instruction execution complete and instruction execution abnormally complete refer to Subsection 6 5 2 Related instructions Errors An operation error is caused in the following case The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When the unit number m1 does not exist error code K6708 Device Name ...

Page 749: ...d Processing 2 33 FNC290 FNC299 Extension File Register 34 FNC300 FNC305 FX 3U CF ADP 35 SFC STL Programming 36 Interrupt Function 37 Special Device 38 Error Code A Version Up Information B Execution Times 32 High Speed Processing 2 FNC280 to FNC289 FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 280 HSCT High Speed Counter Compare With Data Table Section 32 1 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 n HSCT ...

Page 750: ...ored in and later and the operation output set value ON or OFF specified in the data table is output to to n 1 Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing the data table 16 or 32 bit binary m Number of comparison points in data table 1 m 128 16 bit binary High speed counter number C235 to C255 32 bit binary Head device number to which the operation status is output Bit n Number o...

Page 751: ... Y make sure that the least significant digit of the device number is 0 Examples Y000 Y010 and Y020 3 Immediately after step 2 1 is added to the current table counter value D8138 4 The next comparison point is set as the comparison target data 5 Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the current value of the table counter D8138 becomes m When the current value becomes m the instruction execution complet...

Page 752: ...D207 D206 K543 D208 H0002 2 3 D210 D209 K764 D211 H0000 3 4 D213 D212 K800 D214 H0003 4 Repeated from 0 Device Name Description M8138 HSCT FNC280 instruction execution complete flag Turns ON when the operation for the final table No m 1 is completed D8138 HSCT FNC280 table counter Stores the comparison point number handled as the comparison target X010 FNC280 DHSCT D200 K5 C235 Y010 K3 FNC 54 DHSC...

Page 753: ...th index all high speed counters are handled as software counters For this instruction only one comparison point one line is handled as the comparison target at one time Processing will not move to the next comparison point until the current counter value becomes equivalent to the comparison point currently selected as the comparison target If the current value of a high speed counter executes up ...

Page 754: ...10 to Y013 Operation example Comparison point Comparison data SET RESET pattern Table counter D8138 Device Comparison value Device Operation output set value 0 R1 R0 K100 R2 H0007 0 1 R4 R3 K150 R5 H0004 1 2 R7 R6 K200 R8 H0003 2 3 R10 R9 K250 R11 H0006 3 4 R13 R12 K300 R14 H0008 4 Repeated from 0 M8000 FNC 12 MOVP H0008 K1Y010 FNC 54 DHSCR C235 C235 FNC280 DHSCT R0 K4 K400 Y010 K5 END C235 is use...

Page 755: ... Programming 36 Interrupt Function 37 Special Device 38 Error Code A Version Up Information B Execution Times 33 Extension File Register Control FNC290 to FNC299 FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 290 LOADR Load From ER Section 33 1 291 SAVER Save to ER Section 33 2 292 INITR Initialize R and ER Section 33 3 293 LOGR Logging R and ER Section 33 4 294 RWER Rewrite to ER Section 33 5 295 INIT...

Page 756: ...Operand Type Description Data Type Device number of extension register transfer destination to which data is to be transferred The extension file register having the same number is handled as the data transfer source 16 bit binary n Number of points to be read transferred FX3G 1 n 24000 FX3U FX3UC 0 n 32767 Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User S...

Page 757: ...es of extension file registers ER stored in a memory cassette flash memory having the same numbers with the extension registers specified by to n 1 are read and transferred to the extension registers specified by to n 1 stored in the PLC s built in RAM Reading and transfer are executed in units of device Up to 32768 devices can be read and transferred Different from SAVER FNC291 INITR FNC292 and L...

Page 758: ...ted In the program example below the contents current value of extension file registers ER which are stored in the EEPROM built in the PLC and have the same device numbers as extension registers to n 1 are read and transferred to extension registers R which are stored in the RAM built in the PLC and have the device numbers to n 1 Reading and transfer are executed in units of device Up to 24000 dev...

Page 759: ...mber of writes In FX3G PLCs Data can be written to the memory cassette EEPROM up to 10 000 times and to the built in memory EEPROM up to 20 000 times Every time the RWER FNC294 instruction is executed it is counted as a write to the memory Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes When a continuous operation type instruction is used data is written to the memory in every operation cyc...

Page 760: ...sferred to extension file registers ER inside a memory cassette flash memory having the same device numbers in 2048 n operation cycles 2048 n 1 cycles if there is the remainder While the instruction is being executed the number of already written points is stored in Operand Type Description Data Type Device number of extension register to which data is to be written Only the head device number of ...

Page 761: ...s longer than about 340ms If the operation cycle is severely affected write data in two or more operation cycles When writing data in two or more operation cycles set n in the range from K1 to K1024 Sector number Head device number Written device range Sector number Head device number Written device range Sector 0 R0 ER0 to ER2047 Sector 8 R16384 ER16384 to ER18431 Sector 1 R2048 ER2048 to ER4095 ...

Page 762: ...n 2 Execute SAVER instruction 2 When storing the contents of an arbitrary number of extension registers R to extension file registers ER Use RWER instruction For RWER FNC294 instruction refer to Section 33 5 When the FX3UC PLC is former than Ver 1 30 1 When storing data of 2048 extension registers R in one sector to extension file registers ER If the extension registers R have data to be stored in...

Page 763: ...ette flash memory up to 10 000 times Every time the INITR FNC292 RWER FNC294 or INITER FNC295 instruction is executed it is counted as a write to the memory Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes When a continuous operation type instruction is used data is written to the memory in every operation cycle of the PLC For preventing this make sure to use a pulse operation type instructi...

Page 764: ...he PLC mode to STOP 2 Create a new project in GX Developer This step is not necessary if it is alright to overwrite the current project 3 Read the contents of extension registers R to GX Developer 1 Select Online Read from PLC to display the Read from PLC window 2 Click PLC parameter and Device data to put a check mark to each of them 3 Click Execute button to execute reading 4 When reading is com...

Page 765: ...00 is set to ON sector 0 head device R0 is written to the extension file registers 128 points at a time 128 points are written in one operation cycle Program Operation M0 X000 R0 K1 SET M0 M8029 RST M0 FNC295 INITERP FNC 07 WDTP END FNC291 SAVER R0 K128 D0 1 Instruction execution complete flag 2 R0 K100 R1 K105 R10 K200 R11 K215 Setting data Device number Current value Extension registers R R12 K4...

Page 766: ... K1000 R100 HFFFF HFFFF R127 1st operation cycle HFFFF R128 HFFFF R255 HFFFF R256 HFFFF R1919 HFFFF R1920 ER0 K100 ER1 K105 ER10 K200 ER11 K215 Device number Current value Extension file registers ER ER12 K400 ER19 K350 ER99 K1000 ER100 HFFFF HFFFF ER127 HFFFF ER128 HFFFF ER255 HFFFF ER256 HFFFF ER1919 HFFFF ER1920 K128 Number of already written points D0 K256 K1920 2nd operation cycle 3rd to 15th...

Page 767: ... are written in one operation cycle Program Operation M0 FNC 15 BMOVP R0 R30720 K100 X000 R0 K1 SET M0 M8029 RST M0 FNC292 INITRP FNC 07 WDTP FNC291 SAVER R0 K128 D0 END Instruction execution complete flag 1 2 FNC 15 BMOVP R30720 R0 K100 3 4 R0 K100 R1 K105 R10 K200 R11 K215 Setting data Device number Current value Extension registers R R12 K400 R19 K350 R99 K1000 R100 HFFFF HFFFF R2047 ER0 K100 E...

Page 768: ...isters R R12 K400 R19 K350 R99 K1000 R100 HFFFF HFFFF R127 HFFFF R128 HFFFF R255 HFFFF R256 HFFFF R1919 HFFFF R1920 ER0 K100 ER1 K105 ER10 K200 ER11 K215 Extension file registers ER ER12 K400 ER19 K350 ER99 K1000 ER100 HFFFF HFFFF ER127 HFFFF ER128 HFFFF ER255 HFFFF ER256 HFFFF ER1919 HFFFF ER1920 K128 K256 K1920 Setting data Device number Current value Setting backup data Setting data Device numb...

Page 769: ...3 instruction refer to Section 33 4 For INITER FNC295 instruction refer to Section 33 6 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 1 When a memory cassette is not used extension file registers ER are not initialized 3 Applicable devices Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit operation INITR and INITRP n sectors of extension registers in the PLC s built in RAM starting from the one specified by and n ...

Page 770: ...95 ER2048 to ER4095 Sector 9 R18432 R18432 to R20479 ER18432 to ER20479 Sector 2 R4096 R4096 to R6143 ER4096 to ER6143 Sector 10 R20480 R20480 to R22527 ER20480 to ER22527 Sector 3 R6144 R6144 to R8191 ER6144 to ER8191 Sector 11 R22528 R22528 to R24575 ER22528 to ER24575 Sector 4 R8192 R8192 to R10239 ER8192 to ER10239 Sector 12 R24576 R24576 to R26623 ER24576 to ER26623 Sector 5 R10240 R10240 to ...

Page 771: ...ction as shown below If the processing time of the INITR command exceeds 200ms set the watchdog timer value D8000 unit ms to the proceessing time or more 2 Allowable number of writes to the memory Note the following cautions on access to extension file registers Data can be written to the memory cassette flash memory up to 10 000 times Every time the INITR FNC292 RWER FNC294 or INITER FNC295 instr...

Page 772: ...am example shown below the extension registers R0 to R2047 in the sector 0 are initialized Note that the extension file registers ER0 to ER2047 are also initialized if a memory cassette is attached Extension registers R inside the built in RAM memory Device number Current value Before execution After execution R0 H1234 HFFFF R1 H5678 HFFFF R2 H90AB HFFFF R2047 HCDEF HFFFF FNC292 INITR R0 K1 FNC 07...

Page 773: ...instruction is driven m devices starting from are logged until n sectors of extension registers R starting from and extension file registers ER in a memory cassette are filled The number of logged data is stored to If a memory cassette is not used data is not written to extension file registers ER Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number to be logged 1 16 bit binary m Number of device...

Page 774: ...0239 ER8192 to ER10239 Sector 12 R24576 R24576 to R26623 ER24576 to ER26623 Sector 5 R10240 R10240 to R12287 ER10240 to ER12287 Sector 13 R26624 R26624 to R28671 ER26624 to ER28671 Sector 6 R12288 R12288 to R14335 ER12288 to ER14335 Sector 14 R28672 R28672 to R30719 ER28672 to ER30719 Sector 7 R14336 R14336 to R16383 ER14336 to ER16383 Sector 15 R30720 R30720 to R32767 ER30720 to ER32767 Destinati...

Page 775: ...y be caused 3 Allowable number of writes to the memory Note the following cautions on access to extension file registers Data can be written to the memory cassette flash memory up to 10 000 times Every time the INITR FNC292 RWER FNC294 or INITER FNC295 instruction is executed it is counted as a write to the memory Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes When a continuous operation t...

Page 776: ...h of the memory cassette is set to ON error code K6770 When the collation result after data writing is mismatch due to omission of initialization or for another reason error code K6770 When this error occurs the current values data of extension registers R may be lost To avoid the data loss back up the data of extension registers R in advance using the following procedure 1 Set the PLC mode to STO...

Page 777: ...p Information B Execution Times 4 Change the current program inside the PLC to the program shown in Cautions on using a memory cassette in Cautions on the previous page 5 To the PLC write the data which was temporarily withdrawn to GX Developer 1 Select Online Write to PLC to display the Write to PLC window 2 Click PLC parameter and MAIN to put a check mark to each of them 3 Click Execute button t...

Page 778: ...3 LOGRP D1 K2 R2048 K2 D100 HFFFF HFFFF R2048 R2049 HFFFF HFFFF R2050 R2051 HFFFF HFFFF R2052 R5899 HFFFF R5900 HFFFF R5901 HFFFF R6143 Initial value H1234 H5678 HFFFF HFFFF HFFFF HFFFC HFFFF HFFFF HFFFF X001 OFF ON 1st time H1234 H5678 D1 D2 H1234 H5678 H9ABC H1122 HFFFF HFFF0 HFFFF HFFFF HFFFF X001 OFF ON 2nd time H9ABC H1122 D1 D2 Because two words are used low order two bits are set to OFF 0 B...

Page 779: ...function and operation 1 16 bit operation RWER 1 In FX3U FX3UC PLCs The contents current values of n extension registers R starting from are written transferred to extension file registers having the same device numbers in a memory cassette flash memory When n is set to 0 it is handled as 32768 when the instruction is executed Operand Type Description Data Type Device number of extension register ...

Page 780: ... values of n extension registers R starting from are written transferred to extension file registers which are stored in the EEPROM built in the PLC and have the same device numbers FNC290 RWERP S n Command input E E 1 E 2 E n 1 1 2 n 1 1 1 All points specified by the instruction are written transferred Write transfer Extension file registers ER inside memory cassette Extension registers R inside ...

Page 781: ...ction may be aborted If execution is aborted the data may be lost Make sure to back up the data before executing this instruction For the backup method refer to the next page 2 Cautions on writing data to a memory cassette EEPROM for FX3G PLCs Memory cassettes adopt the EEPROM Note the following contents when writing data to extension file registers in a memory cassette using the FNC294 instructio...

Page 782: ...ion Execution of the LOADR FNC290 SAVER FNC291 or LOGR FNC293 instruction is not counted as a write to the memory However it is necessary to initialize the writing target sector before executing the SAVER FNC291 or LOGR FNC293 instruction Every time the INITR FNC292 or INITER FNC295 instruction is executed it is counted as a write to the memory Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of write...

Page 783: ...rom PLC to display the Read from PLC window 2 Click Parameter and Device data to put a check mark next to each of them 1 For Ver 8 13P to 8 24A of GX Developer the PLC type is FX3UC 3 Select Ext file register and Ext register on the Device data tab In GX Developer former than Ver 8 18U the extension file register range cannot be set 4 Click Execute button to execute reading 5 When reading is compl...

Page 784: ... file registers ER when X000 turns ON Program Operation M0 MOV D8000 D200 X000 K47 D8000 PLS M0 END FNC294 RWER R10 K10 ADD D8000 MOV D200 D8000 FNC 07 WDT FNC 07 WDT R0 K100 R1 K105 R10 K200 R11 K215 R12 K400 R19 K350 R99 K1000 R100 HFFFF HFFFF R2047 ER0 K100 ER1 K105 ER10 K200 ER11 K215 ER12 K400 ER19 K350 ER99 K1000 ER100 HFFFF HFFFF ER2047 Write when X000 turns ON Setting data Device number Cu...

Page 785: ... shows the head device number in each sector Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number of extension register sector with the same device number as the extension file register to be initialized 16 bit binary n Number of sectors of extension file registers to be initialized Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con st...

Page 786: ...ng the device test function in GX Developer Online Debug Device test Word device buffer memory in Device test dialogbox 3 Set the PLC mode to RUN and execute the program Execute this instruction also 4 Monitor the maximum scan time D8012 unit 0 1ms using the device batch monitoring function in GX Developer 5 Set the watchdog timer to the maximum scan time D8012 or more D8012 stores the maximum sca...

Page 787: ...VER FNC291 or LOGR FNC293 instruction is not counted as a write to the memory However it is necessary to initialize the writing target sector before executing the SAVER FNC291 or LOGR FNC293 instruction Every time the INITR FNC292 or INITER FNC295 instruction is executed it is counted as a write to the memory Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes Errors An operation error is cause...

Page 788: ...FNC300 to FNC305 FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 300 FLCRT File create check Section 34 1 301 FLDEL File delete CF card format Section 34 2 302 FLWR Data write Section 34 3 303 FLRD Data read Section 34 4 304 FLCMD FX3U CF ADP command Section 34 5 305 FLSTRD FX3U CF ADP status read Section 34 6 n FLCRT S3 S2 S1 n FLDEL S2 S1 n FLWR D S3 S2 S1 n FLRD D2 D1 S2 S1 n S FLCMD n FLSTRD D S ...

Page 789: ...K1 to K63 When is K1 to K63 the FLCRT instruction creates a file having the specified file name Sequence programs use the file ID for specifying a file Accordingly each file name saved in the CompactFlashTM card is associated with the file ID and controlled by the file ID table If a file having the specified file name already exists and is registered in the file ID table the PLC finishes the FLCRT...

Page 790: ...ime stamp setting Set whether or not the time stamp is added to the file Specify the format when adding the time stamp K0 None NULL K1 yyyy mm dd hh mm ss K2 yy mm dd hh mm ss K3 dd mm yyyy hh mm ss K4 dd mm yy hh mm ss K5 mm dd yyyy hh mm ss K6 mm dd yy hh mm ss K7 hh mm ss 16 bit binary 1 Data type Set the data type to be saved K0 No data type specification mixed type K1 Bit type K2 Decimal type...

Page 791: ...When the file ID is K0 1 The CF ADP can create up to 1000 files within the CompactFlashTM card capacity 2 The file name is set to FILE0000 CSV to FILE0999 CSV When the file ID is K1 to K63 1 The user can create up to 63 files within the CompactFlashTM card capacity 2 The FLCRT instruction is completed abnormally if different file names are specified for the same file ID or if the same file name is...

Page 792: ...hod K0 The FLDEL instruction deletes the specified file K1 The FLDEL instruction deletes the association between the file name and the file ID but does not delete the file itself However when the file ID specified in is 0 the FLDEL instruction deletes the file without regard to the setting of When is K512 H200 specify the format type K256 H100 The FLDEL instruction formats the CompactFlashTM card ...

Page 793: ... IVDR FNC271 IVRD FNC272 IVWR FNC273 IVBWR FNC274 instruction and an FLCRT FNC300 FLDEL FNC301 FLWR FNC302 FLRD FNC303 FLCMD FNC304 FLSTRD FNC305 instruction for the same port Setting items Description Data Type File ID K 1 H0FFFF The FLDEL instruction deletes all files K0 to K63 The FLDEL instruction deletes a file associated with the specified file ID K512 H200 The FLDEL instruction formats the ...

Page 794: ...Data write parameter Refer to Subsection 34 3 1 16 bit binary Position after data writing Refer to Subsection 34 3 1 16 bit binary n Used channel number contents of setting K1 ch1 K2 ch2 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U ...

Page 795: ...ion after writing Written line position K1 Column position after writing K1 When a line having existing data is overwritten Line position after writing Written line position if data is not written to the final column position of specified the line position Line position next to the written line position if data is written to the final column position of the line Column position after writing Colum...

Page 796: ...cified in and the data type is set to bit the FLWR instruction acquires data to be written from the least significant bit of the specified device When is K7 or K8 00H which indicates the end of the string must be added to the end of the character string It is not permitted to use an RS FNC 80 RS2 FNC 87 IVCK FNC270 IVDR FNC271 IVRD FNC272 IVWR FNC273 IVBWR FNC274 instruction and an FLCRT FNC300 FL...

Page 797: ... and stores the read data to a device specified in Operand Type Description Data Type File ID Refer to Subsection 34 4 1 16 bit binary Data read parameter Refer to Subsection 34 4 1 16 bit binary Device which stores the read data Refer to Subsection 34 4 1 Number of data points existing in the specified line Refer to Subsection 34 4 1 16 bit binary n Used channel number contents of setting K1 ch1 ...

Page 798: ...ength is unknown The PLC stores as much read data as possible When reading is not completed even after the final device is reached an error occurs It is not permitted to use an RS FNC 80 RS2 FNC 87 IVCK FNC270 IVDR FNC271 IVRD FNC272 IVWR FNC273 IVBWR FNC274 instruction and an FLCRT FNC300 FLDEL FNC301 FLWR FNC302 FLRD FNC303 FLCMD FNC304 FLSTRD FNC305 instruction for the same port Setting items D...

Page 799: ...3 the FLCMD instruction forcibly writes the buffered data of the specified file ID stored in the buffer inside the CF ADP to the CompactFlashTM card When is K256 H100 the FLCMD instruction sets the CompactFlashTM card to the mounted status if it is in the unmounted status When is K512 H200 the FLCMD instruction sets the CompactFlashTM card to the unmounted status if it is in the mounted status Whe...

Page 800: ...S2 FNC 87 IVCK FNC270 IVDR FNC271 IVRD FNC272 IVWR FNC273 IVBWR FNC274 instruction and an FLCRT FNC300 FLDEL FNC301 FLWR FNC302 FLRD FNC303 FLCMD FNC304 FLSTRD FNC305 instruction for the same port Setting items Description Data Type Contents of instruction for operation K0 to K63 Forcibly writes the buffered data of the specified file ID to the CompactFlashTM card K 1 Forcibly writes all buffered ...

Page 801: ...ed in the CompactFlashTM card When is K512 H200 the FLSTRD instruction reads the data capacity When is K768 H300 the FLSTRD instruction reads the version information of the CF ADP When is K1024 H400 the FLSTRD instruction reads the error information error flag for errors having occurred in the CF ADP When is K1280 H500 the FLSTRD instruction reads error codes and error code details Up to 5 of the ...

Page 802: ...ed in the CompactFlashTM card K512 H200 Capacity of the CompactFlashTM card K768 H300 Version of the CF ADP K1024 H400 Error information error flag K1280 H500 Error codes 16 bit binary Head device to which the read status is written The number of data points stored in varies depending on the contents of the read status 16 bit binary n Channel number used by the CF ADP K1 ch1 K2 ch2 16 bit binary S...

Page 803: ...ils for errors having occurred in the CF ADP Up to 5 of the latest error codes and error code details can be stored Cautions It is not permitted to use an RS FNC 80 RS2 FNC 87 IVCK FNC270 IVDR FNC271 IVRD FNC272 IVWR FNC273 IVBWR FNC274 instruction and an FLCRT FNC300 FLDEL FNC301 FLWR FNC302 FLRD FNC303 FLCMD FNC304 FLSTRD FNC305 instruction for the same port Setting items Description Stores the ...

Page 804: ...rded as one control process and the input conditions and output control sequence are programmed in each process Because the preceding process is stopped when the program execution proceeds to the next process a machine can be controlled using simple sequences for each process Operation of state relay State S and driven instruction In SFC programs each process performed by the machine is expressed ...

Page 805: ...n the truck reaches the forward limit Other limit switches function in the same way 2 When the truck moves backward and the limit switch LS2 turns ON the truck stops for 5 seconds and then starts to move forward again When the limit switch LS3 turns ON the truck immediately starts to move backward 3 When LS2 turns ON after that the truck driving motor stops 4 When the start pushbutton switch is pr...

Page 806: ...erforming repeated operations indicate with an arrow the process the truck will return to after a series of operations finish 3 Write the operation performed in each process on the right side of each rectangle indicating a process Initial process 1st process 2nd process Stop process 3rd process 4th process When the start switch is pressed again the truck performs the same operations again LS2 LS1 ...

Page 807: ...ore transfer conditions AND circuit or OR circuit is available 3 Assign a device output terminal number connected to external equipment timer number etc used for an operation performed in each process Many devices such as timers counters and auxiliary relays are provided in a PLC and can be used arbitrarily The timer T0 is used here Because T0 works by the 0 1 sec clock the output contact turns ON...

Page 808: ...C block Programs expressing operations in state relays and transfer conditions are handled as internal circuits of the state relays and transfer conditions Create each one using a relay ladder For details of programming procedure in GX Developer refer to GX Developer Operating Manual Y023 Y021 Write a circuit not belonging to SFC to a ladder block using a relay ladder Write an SFC program to an SF...

Page 809: ...itial state relays should be driven by another state relay They cannot be driven by any other device The state relay which may be driven by a contact other than the STL instruction is there by defined as the initial state relay and should be described at the top of the flow Role of the initial state relay 1 Used as an identification device for inverse conversion In inverse conversion from an instr...

Page 810: ...n When there are ladder blocks and SFC blocks put RET instruction at the end of each SFC program 35 1 7 Preliminary knowledge for creating SFC program List of sequence instructions available in states STL instruction cannot be used in interrupt programs and subroutine programs When using SFC programs STL instruction do not drive state relays S using SET or OUT instructions in an interrupt program ...

Page 811: ... Function and application M8000 RUN monitor This relay is normally ON while the PLC is in the RUN mode Use this relay as the program input condition requiring the normally driven status or for indicating the PLC operation status M8002 Initial pulse This relay turns ON and remains ON only instantaneously when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN Use this relay for the initial setting of a progr...

Page 812: ...ent state relays If the same timer coil is programmed in adjacent state relays the timer coil is not set to OFF at process transfer so the current value is not reset Output driving method It is not permitted to write program an instruction not requiring a contact after LD or LDI instruction from a bus line in a state relay Change such a circuit as shown below 41 42 40 T1 T1 T1 K10 K20 Not allowed ...

Page 813: ...ower position jump or transfer to a state relay in another separate flow Use V to express reset of a state relay 1 Transfer source program 2 Transfer destination program In GX Developer z is automatically displayed in the transfer destination state relay 3 Reset circuit program In the program example shown below S65 is reset from S65 by way of X007 Reset of another state relay S70 for example from...

Page 814: ... but all output relays Y turn OFF These output relays are in the ON status in the monitor Position of MPS MRD and MPP instructions MPS MRD or MPP instruction cannot be used directly from a bus line in a state relay inside the STL Program MPS MRD or MPP instruction after LD or LDI instruction as shown below Ladder block SFC block Reset FNC 40 ZRST S0 S50 S0 State relays from S0 to S50 are reset at ...

Page 815: ...NB ORB MPS MRD and MPP instructions are not available Program the circuit as shown below Processing of state relay whose transfer condition is already satisfied In some cases it is necessary to execute the next transfer after the limit switch X030 working as the transfer condition in the ON status is set to OFF once and then set to ON again In such a case make the transfer condition into pulses as...

Page 816: ...1 By using an auxiliary relay M2800 to M3071 in a rising falling edge detection instruction LDP LDF ANDP ANDF ORP or ORF the ON status can be efficiently transferred by the same signal When M2800 or later is specified as a device in a rising falling edge detection instruction only the first rising falling edge detection instruction after a coil instruction is executed Accordingly when X001 is set ...

Page 817: ... ORP or ORF instruction is used in a state relay the contact whose status was changed while the state relay was OFF is detected when the state relay turns ON the next time When it is necessary to immediately detect the rising edge or falling edge for a condition which may change while a state relay is OFF change the program as shown below When the ON status is transferred to S70 at the falling edg...

Page 818: ...e combined in SFC programs 1 Jump and repeat flows 1 Jump Direct transfer to a state relay in a lower position or transfer to a state relay in a different flow is called jump and the transfer destination state relay is indicated by 2 Repeat Transfer to a state relay in an upper position is called repeat and the transfer destination state relay is indicated by in the same way as jump 20 21 22 23 20...

Page 819: ...gram having two or more initial state relays separate the blocks for each initial state relay The ON status can be transferred among SFC programs created by block separation jump to a different flow A state relay in a program created in a different block can be used as a contact for the internal circuit or transfer condition of another state relay 1 Separation of flow 2 Jump to another flow 3 Usin...

Page 820: ...put conditions and operator manipulations intervene however complicated conditions can be easily handled by using selective branches and parallel branches A branch for selectively processing many processes depending on a condition is called selective branch A branch for processing many processes at the same time is called parallel branch 1 Selective branch Either one among many flows is selected a...

Page 821: ... Special Device 38 Error Code A Version Up Information B Execution Times 35 1 9 Program of branch recombination state relays Selective branch After making a branch create a transfer condition Selective recombination After creating a transfer condition recombine Parallel branch After creating a transfer condition make a branch Parallel recombination After recombining create a transfer condition 21 ...

Page 822: ...ided When there are many parallel branches and selective branches however the total number of circuits per initial state is limited to 16 or less It is not permitted to execute transfer or reset from a recombination line or state relay before recombination to a branch state relay Make sure to provide a dummy state then execute transfer or reset from a branch line to a separate state relay 4 3 1 1 ...

Page 823: ...ranches recombination and dummy state 1 When a recombination line is directly connected to a branch line without a state relay When a recombination line is directly connected to a branch line without a state relay as shown below it is recommended to provide a dummy state relay between the lines There are no dedicated numbers for dummy state relays Use a state relay number not used in a program as ...

Page 824: ... the number of branches X000 20 1 2 X001 21 3 22 4 5 29 X003 X007 6 X004 23 7 24 8 X006 9 10 25 11 26 12 13 X013 X017 X010 X011 14 27 15 28 16 X014 X016 20 1 X000 21 2 22 3 24 4 23 5 24 6 7 25 8 26 9 10 27 11 28 12 TRAN X001 TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN X003 TRAN X007 X000 TRAN X004 X006 TRAN X007 X010 TRAN X011 X013 TRAN X017 X010 TRAN X014 X016 TRAN X017 Transform ...

Page 825: ...00 FNC305 FX 3U CF ADP 35 SFC STL Programming 36 Interrupt Function 37 Special Device 38 Error Code A Version Up Information B Execution Times 3 It is not permitted to provide a selective transfer condition after parallel branches or to recombine parallel branches after a transfer condition 4 In the flow shown below it is not determined whether a selective or parallel branch is provided Change it ...

Page 826: ...t In flow A however note that an operation is paused at a point where parallel branches are recombined 6 It is not permitted to cross flows in SFC programs Change a flow on the left to a flow on the right This change enables inverse conversion from a program on the instruction word basis into an SFC program The flow on the left cannot be converted into an SFC program A B B A Cross is not allowed C...

Page 827: ... Error Code A Version Up Information B Execution Times 35 1 11 Program examples Examples of single flows 1 Example of flicker circuit 1 When the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN the state relay S3 is driven by the initial pulse M8002 2 The state relay S3 outputs Y000 One second later the ON status transfers to the state relay S20 3 The state relay S20 outputs Y001 1 5 seconds later the ON stat...

Page 828: ...ach output is switched in turn every 2 seconds by a timer 2 Continuous operation X001 ON Y001 to Y007 turn ON in turn repeatedly 3 Stepping operation X002 ON Every time the start button is pressed each output turns ON in turn M8000 Ladder block 20 3 1 0 TRAN X000 Y000 Y001 T1 TRAN T1 K20 M8047 RUN monitor X002 M8040 Stepping M8002 Initial pulse X000 Start S3 SET Enable STL monitoring STL transfer ...

Page 829: ...valid If either one among S0 to S899 and S1000 to S4095 is ON M8046 turns ON after the END instruction is executed This SFC program adopts latched battery backed type state relays so that the operation is restarted from this process when the start button is pressed even after the power is interrupted in the middle of operation However all outputs except Y020 are disabled until the start button is ...

Page 830: ...er position 20 M8002 0 1 Ladder block SFC block 0 TRAN X000 S0 SET T0 TRAN T0 K20 Initial pulse Start Y000 SET Motor M1 is started X001 21 T1 K30 Y001 SET Motor M2 is started 27 TRAN X001 Stop 9 2 TRAN T1 X001 22 T2 K40 Y002 SET Motor M3 is started 26 X001 Stop 10 TRAN 3 TRAN T2 X001 23 Y003 SET Motor M4 is started 25 X001 Stop 11 TRAN 24 T4 K40 Y003 RST Motor M4 is stopped 4 TRAN X001 5 TRAN T4 2...

Page 831: ...d that a flow does not cross except branch lines and recombination lines 20 M8002 0 1 Ladder block SFC block 0 TRAN X000 S0 SET T0 T0 K20 Initial pulse Start Y000 SET X001 21 T1 K30 Y001 SET 2 T1 X001 22 T2 K40 Y002 SET 3 T2 X001 23 Y003 SET 24 T4 K40 Y003 RST 4 X001 Stop 5 T4 25 T5 K30 Y002 RST 6 T5 26 T6 K20 Y001 RST 7 T6 27 Y000 RST 8 Y000 0 RET END TRAN X001 Stop 9 30 TRAN S30 10 31 TRAN X001 ...

Page 832: ... carrying large and small balls The figure below shows a mechanism which selects and carries large and small balls using conveyors The upper left position is regarded as the origin and the mechanism performs in the order moving down suction moving up moving rightward moving down release moving up moving leftward When the arm moves down and the electromagnet pushes a large ball the lower limit swit...

Page 833: ...ghtward TRAN X004 Right limit switch small bucket Y000 Moving down 5 31 TRAN X002 Lower limit switch T2 Y001 RST Release K10 6 TRAN T2 Y002 Moving up TRAN X003 Upper limit switch 32 7 X004 33 8 Y004 Moving leftward TRAN X001 X001 Left limit switch 0 9 25 10 26 11 27 12 Origin TRAN T0 X002 Lower limit switch OFF large ball T1 K10 Y001 SET Suction T1 TRAN TRAN Y002 Moving up X003 Y003 Moving rightwa...

Page 834: ...low Y001 Red The SFC program for a pushbutton type crosswalk is as shown below In this example a partial flow jump to a state relay located in an upper position is repeated for blinking the green lamp on the crosswalk When the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN the initial state relay S0 turns ON Normally the green lamp is ON for the road and the red lamp is ON for the sidewalk When the crossing...

Page 835: ...e A Version Up Information B Execution Times M8002 Ladder block SET Initial pulse 0 SFC block 0 21 1 T0 RET END TRAN 0 X000 X001 Crossing button Y003 Road Green T0 K300 22 2 T1 TRAN Y002 Road Yellow T1 K100 23 Y001 T2 K50 Road Red 30 3 T2 31 4 T3 32 5 T4 33 6 C0 T5 34 8 T6 TRAN TRAN Y005 Sidewalk Red TRAN Y006 Sidewalk Green T3 K150 T4 K5 TRAN Y006 C0 K5 T5 K5 TRAN 7 C0 TRAN T5 32 Y005 T6 C0 RST K...

Page 836: ...ine can be controlled using simple sequences for each process Operation of step ladder instructions In a step ladder program each process performed by the machine is expressed by a state relay A state relay consists of a drive coil and contact STL contact in the same way as other relays Use SET or OUT instruction to drive a coil and use STL instruction for a contact When a state relay turns ON a c...

Page 837: ...s SET S0 X000 SET S20 STL S20 Process of S0 STL S0 M8002 Start Y021 Moving forward Y023 X001 SET S21 STL S21 Y023 Moving backward Y021 X002 SET S22 STL S22 T0 K50 T0 SET S23 STL S23 Y021 Y023 X003 SET S24 STL S24 Y023 Y021 S0 X002 RET END It is necessary to input RET instruction in a program Y023 Y021 Ladder block SFC block M8002 SET S0 Program for setting to ON an initial state relay State number...

Page 838: ... refer to Subsection 35 1 3 For the handling and role of initial state relays refer to Subsection 35 1 4 For latched battery backed type state relays refer to Subsection 35 1 5 For RET instruction refer to Subsection 35 1 6 1 SET and RST instructions for a state relay are two step instructions When every state relay used in an SFC program is defined programming is complete Program a step ladder pr...

Page 839: ... be used in interrupt programs and subroutine programs When using SFC programs STL instruction do not drive state relays S using SET or OUT instructions in an interrupt program It is not prohibited to use jump instructions in state relays But it is not recommended to use jump instructions because complicated movements will be resulted 1 MPS instruction cannot be used immediately after an STL instr...

Page 840: ...antaneously when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN Use this relay for the initial setting of a program or for setting the initial state relay M8040 STL transfer disable When this relay is set to ON transfer of the ON status is disabled among all state relays Because programs in state relays are operating even in the transfer disabled status output coils do not turn OFF automatically M8046 1...

Page 841: ...fer source and has the self holding function OUT instructions can be used only for transfer to a separate state relay in an SFC program Replacing and V Replace the symbol used in SFC programs to express repeat jump or transfer to a state relay in another separate flow with the OUT instruction Replace the symbol V used to express reset of a state relay with the RST instruction Y001 Change Y002 Y003...

Page 842: ...ches and recombination Even in a load driving circuit MPS instructions cannot be used immediately after STL instructions In the same way as programs for general state relays program the drive processing first and then program the transfer processing Continuously program all transfer processing STL OUT LD SET LD SET LD SET 21 20 1 X001 X000 Y000 STL S20 SET S21 S20 Y000 X000 S21 X001 S31 X002 S41 Y...

Page 843: ... a load driving circuit MPS instructions cannot be used immediately after STL instructions Pay attention to the programming order so that a branch line does not cross a recombination line Before recombination first program the drive processing of state relays After that program only the transfer processing to recombination state relays This rule should be observed to enable inverse conversion into...

Page 844: ...ombination Even in a load driving circuit MPS instructions cannot be used immediately after STL instructions Pay attention to the programming order so that a branch line does not cross a recombination line Before recombination first program the drive processing of state relays After that program only the transfer processing to recombination state relays List program STL OUT LD SET SET SET 21 20 Y0...

Page 845: ...ctive recombination and selective branch 2 Parallel recombination and parallel branch 3 Selective recombination and parallel branch STL LD SET STL LD SET STL LD SET LD SET 100 20 1 X000 X000 TRAN 2 X001 STL S20 SET S100 S20 X000 S100 S30 X001 S100 S100 X003 S50 X004 S60 30 3 50 60 X001 TRAN X003 TRAN 4 X004 TRAN Dummy state SET S100 STL S30 X003 SET S50 STL S100 X004 SET S60 Step ladder SFC progra...

Page 846: ...20 The state relay S20 outputs Y001 1 5 seconds later the ON status returns to the state relay S3 List program STL STL LD SET STL LD SET LD SET 103 20 1 X000 TRAN X000 STL S20 SET S103 S20 S30 X000 S103 S103 X001 S40 X002 S50 30 2 40 50 X001 TRAN 3 X002 TRAN STL S30 X001 SET S40 STL S103 X002 SET S50 Step ladder SFC program Dummy state 1 second 1 5 seconds Y000 Y001 LD SET STL OUT OUT LD SET STL O...

Page 847: ... in turn repeatedly 3 Stepping operation X002 ON Every time the start button is pressed each output turns ON in turn LD OUT LD ANI OUT LD SET STL OUT LD SET STL OUT OUT LD SET STL OUT OUT LD SET STL OUT OUT LD SET STL OUT OUT LD AND OUT LD ANI OUT RET END M8000 M8047 X002 X000 M8040 M8002 S3 S3 Y000 X000 S20 S20 Y001 T1 K20 T1 S21 S21 Y002 T2 K20 T2 S22 S22 Y003 T3 K20 T3 S27 S27 Y007 T7 K20 T7 X0...

Page 848: ...echanism performs in the order moving down suction moving up moving rightward moving down release moving up moving leftward When the arm moves down and the electromagnet pushes a large ball the lower limit switch LS2 turns OFF When the electromagnet pushes a small ball LS2 turns ON M Small Large X004 LS4 X005 LS5 X001 LS1 Left limit X003 LS3 Upper limit Origin indication Y007 Moving rightward Y003...

Page 849: ...03 S27 S24 X004 Y004 Y003 S27 X005 Y004 Y003 S24 X004 S30 S27 X005 SET OUT LD SET STL OUT LD SET STL OUT LD SET STL LDI ANI OUT STL LDI ANI OUT STL LD SET STL LD 34 35 38 39 41 42 43 44 46 47 48 49 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 63 64 S30 S30 Y000 X002 S31 S31 Y001 T2 K10 T2 S32 S32 Y002 X003 S33 S33 X001 Y003 Y004 X001 S0 SET STL OUT LD SET STL RST OUT LD SET STL OUT LD SET STL LDI ANI OUT LD O...

Page 850: ... RUN the initial state relay S0 turns ON Normally the green lamp is ON for the road and the red lamp is ON for the sidewalk When the crossing button X000 or X001 is pressed the state relay S21 specifies road green and the state relay S30 specifies sidewalk red The signal lamp status is not changed Thirty seconds later the yellow lamp turns ON for the road Ten seconds later after that the red lamp ...

Page 851: ...4 S33 S33 Y006 C0 K5 OUT OUT LD SET STL OUT OUT LD SET STL OUT OUT STL OUT LD SET STL OUT OUT 26 27 30 31 33 34 35 38 39 41 42 43 46 47 50 51 53 54 55 T5 K5 C0 T5 S34 C0 T5 S32 S34 Y005 C0 T6 K50 S23 S34 T6 S0 OUT LD AND SET LDI AND OUT STL OUT RST OUT STL STL LD OUT RET END 58 61 62 63 65 66 67 69 70 71 73 76 77 78 79 81 82 X000 X001 6 13 21 T2 26 33 30 T1 61 C0 T5 C0 T5 T6 12 25 41 38 T3 42 47 4...

Page 852: ...le of 10 to 99 ms and an interrupt routine program is executed with priority For details refer to Section 36 5 4 High speed counter interrupt function interrupt function given at counting up When the current value of a high speed counter reaches a specified value the main sequence program is paused and an interrupt routine program is executed with priority For details refer to Section 36 6 5 Pulse...

Page 853: ...nge interrupt function and pulse catch function 1 Programming method Program the FNC 05 DI instruction to set the interrupt disabled zone Even if an interrupt is generated between the DI instruction and EI instruction interrupt disabled zone the interrupt is executed after the EI instruction 2 Program example 3 Cautions a The interrupt inputs with special auxiliary relay for interrupt disable M805...

Page 854: ...operation is executed as follows depending on the ON OFF status of the special auxiliary relay M8028 1 While M8028 is OFF While FROM TO instructions are being executed interrupts are automatically disabled Input interrupts and timer interrupts are not executed Interrupts generated during this period are immediately executed when the execution of FROM TO instructions are completed FROM TO instructi...

Page 855: ...ake sure that counting using a general timer is disabled even a 1ms retentive type timer In an interrupt routine use timers for routine program T192 to T199 4 Non overlap of input input interrupt with without delay function and pulse catch function The inputs X000 to X007 can be used for high speed counters input interrupts pulse catch SPD ZRN DSZR and DVIT instructions and for general purpose inp...

Page 856: ...of C0 remains unchanged even if a pulses are input C0 remains reset Y007 is being output Outputs are latched RST C0 Y007 Interrupt program RST C0 X002 FNC 06 FEND RST C0 RST Y007 Program to reset Y007 at an arbitrary time Program to deactivate the preceding C0 reset instruction inside the subroutine B M8001 RUN monitor normally OFF A Y007 X001 C0 K10 M8000 FNC 05 IRET I001 FNC 04 EI Step 0 X001 Cu...

Page 857: ... is suitable to high speed control and receiving of short pulses 3 Basic program programming procedure Interrupt routine 1 interrupt program Interrupts are enabled FNC 04 EI FNC 06 FEND FNC 03 IRET I001 Interrupt pointer When the rising edge of X000 is detected FNC 03 IRET Step 0 End of main program Main program Interrupt return I100 Interrupt pointer When the falling edge of X001 is detected END ...

Page 858: ...put relay not being used as an input interrupt pointer operates at 10 ms initial value 3 Pulse width of input interrupt For executing input interrupt by an external signal it is necessary to input the ON or OFF signal having the duration shown in the table below or more 1 When using the input filter at the filter value of 5 µs or when receiving a pulse whose response frequency is 50 k to 100 kHz u...

Page 859: ...puts outputs to be refreshed by REF FNC 50 instruction If any value other than a multiple of 8 is specified an operation error occurs and REF FNC 50 instruction is not executed Step 0 I001 Interrupt pointer When the rising edge of X000 is detected M8000 RUN monitor FNC 06 FEND FNC 04 EI Y000 K8 1 FNC 50 REF FNC 03 IRET END SET Y000 Interrupts are enabled by EI instruction The main program is descr...

Page 860: ...C 03 IRET Interrupts are enabled by EI instruction The main program is described The main program is finished by FEND instruction When X002 turns ON 1 is added to the value of D0 INC instruction executes increment in every operation cycle but the interrupt routine is executed only once by an input signal Accordingly it is not necessary to use INCP pulse operation type instruction Pulse input X003 ...

Page 861: ...g a retentive type 1ms timer 0V S S X000 X001 SW ex FX3U PLC sink input 24V This period of time is measured X010 Preparation for measurement SW X000 X001 Step 0 I001 Interrupt pointer M8000 X010 K32767 I100 Interrupt pointer When the falling edge of X001 is detected X010 M0 K1 M8000 The reset status is cleared Timer is driven Measurement is completed Timer is stopped Timer is reset Measurement dat...

Page 862: ...age Step 0 I001 Interrupt pointer X010 I100 Interrupt pointer X010 X010 Measurement data When the rising edge of X000 is detected When the falling edge of X001 is detected D8099 is set to ON Measurement is completed FNC 04 EI M8099 FNC 06 FEND FNC 03 IRET FNC 12 M0V FNC 03 IRET END RST D8099 RST M0 D8099 D0 SET M0 When X001 turns OFF The ring counter value is transferred to D0 and measurement is c...

Page 863: ... using the pattern program shown below By using the delay function the mounting position of a sensor used for input interrupts can be adjusted electrically without changing the actual position 2 Programming procedure 3 Timing chart M8393 FNC 12 MOV K Delay time specification program Make sure to describe the delay time specification program shown on the left at the head of an interrupt routine pro...

Page 864: ... is set to 9ms or less the timer interrupt processing may not be executed in an accurate cycle in the following cases Therefore using a time that is over 10 ms is recommended When the interrupt program processing time is long When the main program contains an applied instruction which processing time is long Input number Interrupt cycle ms Interrupt disable Flag I6 An integer in the range from 10 ...

Page 865: ...r interrupt programs using applied instruction RAMP FNC 67 HKY FNC 71 SEGL FNC 74 ARWS FNC 75 and PR FNC 77 instructions execute a series of operations in synchronization with the scan time Because the total time may be too long or time fluctuation may cause a problem in these instructions it is recommended to execute these instructions at a constant time interval using the timer interrupt functio...

Page 866: ... refer to Section 15 2 Step 0 I620 Interrupt pointer When interrupt is given every 20 ms M8000 RUN monitor FNC 04 EI FNC 06 FEND FNC 50 REF FNC 71 HKY FNC 03 IRET FNC 50 REF END Y000 K8 X000 Y000 D0 M0 K8 X000 Interrupts are enabled by EI instruction The main program is described The main program is finished by FEND instruction The latest input information is received from X000 to X007 FNC 71 HKY ...

Page 867: ...d While M8026 is OFF 10 sec While M8026 is ON X000 Start FNC 04 EI FNC 12 MOV K 1 D 1 FNC 12 MOV K255 D 2 PLS M 0 M 0 SET M 1 FNC 06 FEND M 1 FNC 67 RAMP D 1 D 2 D 3 K1000 Initial value Target value Current value Number of times of transfer M 1 M8029 FNC 03 IRET END I610 M8026 Interrupt pointer Step 0 When interrupt is given every 10 ms RST Interrupts are enabled by EI instruction The main program...

Page 868: ...om RUN to STOP 5 When setting an interrupt output Y or M to ON or OFF using a high speed counter When only controlling the ON OFF status of an output relay Y or auxiliary relay M according to the current value of a high speed counter a required program can be easily created using DHSCS FNC 53 DHSCR FNC 54 or DHSZ FNC 55 instruction Pointer No Interrupt disable flag I010 I020 I030 I040 I050 I060 M8...

Page 869: ...urns ON from OFF after the FNC 04 EI instruction is executed the special auxiliary relay M8170 to M8177 is set for interrupt processing The FNC04 EI instruction is not required in FX3G PLCs 1 Assignment of input numbers and special auxiliary relays 1 Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN 2 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs 2 Program example Pulse catch input Pulse ...

Page 870: ...ure that the load current of the open collector transistor output in the counterpart equipment is 20 mA or more including the input current in the main unit 3 Cautions on use 1 When receiving an input again it is necessary to reset the device which was once set using a program Accordingly until a device is reset a new input cannot be received 2 When it is necessary to receive continuous short puls...

Page 871: ...erminal to be used When the pulse width pulse period measurement function is valid it always operates while the PLC mode is RUN Assignment of special auxiliary relays and special data registers 1 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN 2 The measurable pulse width is 10 µs minimum and 100 s maximum The measurable pulse period is 20 µs minimum 1 Program example 1 Pulse width measurement...

Page 872: ...nuing the pulse input If M8080 does not remain OFF for 1 operation cycle or more the a period shown below is stored as the pulse period X000 OFF ON This duration is measured FNC 04 EI FNC 03 IRET END Step 0 FNC 06 FEND I001 interrupt pointer X000 Rising edge interrupt Interrupt return Interrupts are enabled after EI FNC 04 instruction The main program is described X000 is used for the pulse width ...

Page 873: ...ng edge of the input signal from X001 stored in D8080 and D8081 is transferred to D3 and D2 The value Ring counter value at the rising edge of the input signal from X001 Ring counter value at the rising edge of the input signal from X000 is stored in D9 and D8 The interrupt routine is executed at the rising edge of the input signal from X001 Pulse width Pulse period measurement setting flag FNC 03...

Page 874: ...erminal When a same input terminal is used by the pulse width pulse period measurement function and the SPD FNC56 DSZR FNC150 or ZRN FNC156 instruction an operation error occurs when the instruction is executed The input terminal used for the pulse width pulse period measurement function cannot be used for the pulse catch function When a same input terminal is used by the pulse width pulse period ...

Page 875: ...FX3U FX3UC Correspond ingspecial device FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC PLC Status M 8000 RUN monitor NO contact Refer to Subsection 37 2 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8001 RUN monitor NC contact 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8002 Initial pulse NO contact 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8003 Initial pulse NC contact 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8004 Error occurrence FX3G FX3U FX3UC ON when either M8060 M8061 M8064 M8065 M8066 or M8067 is ON FX1S FX...

Page 876: ...3 Flag M 8020 Zero ON when the result of addition subtraction is 0 Refer to Subsection 6 5 2 for usage 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8021 Borrow ON when the result of subtraction is less than the min negative number Refer to Subsection 6 5 2 for usage 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8022 Carry ON when carry occurs in result of addition or when an overflow occurs in result of shift operation Refer to Subsection 6 5 2 for us...

Page 877: ... 3 3 3 M 8032 1 Latch memory all clear 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8033 Memory hold STOP When PLC is switched from RUN to STOP image memory and data memory are retained Refer to Subsection 37 2 12 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8034 1 All outputs disable All external output contacts of PLC are turned OFF Refer to Subsection 37 2 13 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8035 Forced RUN mode Refer to Subsection 37 2 14 for details 3 3 3 3 3 ...

Page 878: ... STOP 2 Executed at END instruction 3 S1000 to S4095 are available only in the FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLC Interrupt Disable Refer to Subsection 36 2 1 for details M8050 input interrupt I00 disable 4 If an input interrupt or timer interrupt occurs while a special auxiliary relay for that interrupt M8050 M8058 is ON the interrupt will not operate For example turning M8050 ON disables the I00 interru...

Page 879: ...13 3 3 3 3 3 M 8069 4 I O bus check 3 3 3 3 3 1 The operation varies according to PLC Cleared in an FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC or FX2NC when PLC switches from STOP to RUN Cleared in an FX3G FX3U or FX3UC PLC when the power is turn off and on 2 Serial communication error 2 ch2 is detected by M8438 in FX3G FX3U and FX3UC PLCs 3 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 4 When M8069 is ON I O bus check is...

Page 880: ... D8085 M 8082 X003 Pulse period measurement mode 3 1 D8086 to D8091 M 8083 X004 Pulse period measurement mode 3 1 D8092 to D8097 M 8084 to M 8089 Not used 1 Available in Ver 1 10 or later Flag M 8090 BKCMP FNC194 to FNC199 instructions Block comparison signal 3 3 2 M 8091 COMRD FNC182 and BINDA FNC261 instructions Output character quantity selector signal 3 3 2 M 8092 Not used M 8093 M 8094 M 8095...

Page 881: ...112 3 3 M 8113 FX1N 4EX BD BX1 input 3 3 FX1N 2AD BD ch2 input mode change D8113 3 3 M 8114 FX1N 4EX BD BX2 input 3 3 FX1N 1DA BD output mode change D8114 3 3 M 8115 FX1N 4EX BD BX3 input 3 3 M 8116 FX1N 2EYT BD BY0 output 3 3 M 8117 FX1N 2EYT BD BY1 output 3 3 M 8118 Not used M 8119 RS FNC 80 and Computer Link ch1 Refer to Data Communication Edition for details M 8120 Not used M 8121 2 RS FNC 80 ...

Page 882: ...6 Y001 Pulse output stop command 3 3 3 3 M 8147 Y000 Pulse output monitor BUSY READY 3 3 3 3 M 8148 Y001 Pulse output monitor BUSY READY 3 3 3 3 M 8149 Not used Inverter Communication Function Refer to Data Communication Edition for details M 8150 Not used M 8151 1 Inverter communication in execution ch1 3 3 3 3 D8151 M 8152 1 Inverter communication error ch1 3 3 3 3 D8152 M 8153 1 Inverter commun...

Page 883: ...and CRC FNC188 instructions 8 6 Available in Ver 2 00 or later 7 Available in Ver 2 20 or later 8 CRC FNC188 instruction is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Pulse Catch Refer to Section 36 7 for details M 8170 1 Input X000 pulse catch 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8171 1 Input X001 pulse catch 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8172 1 Input X002 pulse catch 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8173 1 Input X003 pulse catch 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ...

Page 884: ...ion No 4 3 3 3 M508 3 3 4 3 3 M 8188 3 Data communication error Slave station No 5 3 3 3 M509 3 3 4 3 3 M 8189 3 Data communication error Slave station No 6 3 3 3 M510 3 3 4 3 3 M 8190 3 Data communication error Slave station No 7 3 3 3 M511 3 3 4 3 3 M 8191 3 Data communication in execution 3 3 3 M503 3 3 4 3 3 M 8192 Not used M 8193 M 8194 M 8195 M 8196 M 8197 3 In FX1S PLCs use numbers shown in...

Page 885: ...3 M 8204 C204 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8205 C205 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8206 C206 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8207 C207 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8208 C208 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8209 C209 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8210 C210 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8211 C211 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8212 C212 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8213 C213 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8214 C214 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8215 C215 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8216 C216 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8217 C217 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8218 C218 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8219 C...

Page 886: ...3 3 3 M 8253 C253 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8254 C254 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8255 C255 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8256 to M 8259 Not used Analog Special Adapter FX3U FX3UC Refer to Subsection 37 2 19 for applicability of each analog special adapter M 8260 to M 8269 1st special adapter 1 3 3 2 M 8270 to M 8279 2nd special adapter 1 3 3 2 M 8280 to M 8289 3rd special adapter 1 3 3 2 M 8290 to M 8299 4th special adapter 1...

Page 887: ...OM TO error has occurred in a special function block unit as specified in the BFM initialization function at changing PLC from STOP to RUN When M8318 turns ON the unit number in which the error has occurred is stored in D8318 and the BFM number is stored in D8319 3 3 4 D8318 D8319 M 8319 to M 8321 Not used M 8322 FX3UC 32MT LT FX3UC 32MT LT 2 model indicator 1 FX3UC 32MT LT 2 0 FX3UC 32MT LT 3 5 M...

Page 888: ...rse 3 3 M 8348 Y000 Positioning instruction activation 3 3 3 M 8349 2 Y000 Pulse output stop command 3 3 3 M 8350 Y001 Pulse output monitor ON BUSY OFF READY 3 3 3 M 8351 2 Y001 Clear signal output function enable 3 3 3 M 8352 2 Y001 Zero return direction specification 3 3 3 M 8353 Y001 Forward limit 3 3 3 M 8354 Y001 Reverse limit 3 3 3 M 8355 2 Y001 DOG signal logic reverse 3 3 3 M 8356 2 Y001 Z...

Page 889: ... D8372 M 8373 1 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 instruction Receive complete flag 3 D8373 M 8374 to M 8378 Not used M 8379 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 instruction Time out check flag 3 1 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 2 Available only when two FX3U 2HSY ADP units are connected to an FX3U PLC High Speed Counter Function Refer to Subsection 4 7 5 for details M 8380 3 Operation status of C235 C241 C244 C246 C247 C249 ...

Page 890: ...00 Not used M 8401 1 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Send wait flag 3 3 3 M 8402 1 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Send request 3 3 3 D8402 M 8403 1 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Receive complete flag 3 3 3 D8403 M 8404 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Carrier detection flag 3 3 3 M 8405 RS2 FNC87 ch1 Data set ready DSR flag 3 3 2 3 2 M 8406 Not used M 8407 M 8408 M 8409 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Time out check flag 3 3 3 1 These devices are cleared when the PLC mode switch...

Page 891: ...Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN Error Detection Refer to Chapter 38 for details M 8430 to M 8437 Not used M 8438 Serial communication error 2 ch2 3 3 3 D8438 M 8439 to M 8448 Not used M 8449 Special block error flag 3 3 3 3 D8449 M 8450 to M 8459 Not used 3 Available in Ver 2 20 or later Positioning FX3G FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Refer to Positioning Control Edition for details M 8460 DVIT FN...

Page 892: ...3 2 3 8 3 4 8 3 8 3 4 8 D 8003 Memory type Type of internal memory RAM EEPROM EPROM cassette or ON OFF status of protect switch is stored 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D 8004 Error number M 3 3 3 M8004 3 3 3 3 3 D 8005 Battery voltage 3 3 3 M8005 3 3 D 8006 Low battery voltage detection level Default FX2N and FX2NC PLCs 3 0V in 0 1 V units FX3G FX3U and FX3UC PLCs 2 7V in 0 1 V units Writes from system ROM at p...

Page 893: ...o not make any change in a sequence program For FX3U and FX3UC PLCs refer to Subsection 37 2 4 Clock D 8010 Present scan time Accumulated instruction execution time from step 0 in 0 1 ms units Refer to Subsection 37 2 5 3 Same as on the right 3 Same as on the right 3 Same as on the right 3 Indicated value includes waiting time of constant scan operation when M8039 is activated D 8011 Minimum scan ...

Page 894: ... the input filter can be adjusted in X000 to X007 In FX3U FX3UC FX2N FX2NC PLCs 16 points type the input filter can be adjusted X000 to X007 2 The values of Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 are stored in D8182 to D8195 Analog Volume FX3G FX1S FX1N D 8030 Value of analog volume VR1 Integer from 0 to 255 3 3 3 D 8031 Value of analog volume VR2 Integer from 0 to 255 3 3 3 Constant Scan D 8032 Not used D 8033 D ...

Page 895: ...s stored in D8041 Active state numbers are then sequentially stored in registers up to D8047 Max 8 points 3 3 3 M8047 3 3 3 3 3 D 8041 1 ON state number 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D 8042 1 ON state number 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D 8043 1 ON state number 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D 8044 1 ON state number 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D 8045 1 ON state number 6 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D 8046 1 ON state number 7 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D 8047 1 ON st...

Page 896: ...8066 3 3 3 3 3 D 8067 5 Error code for operation error 3 3 3 M8067 3 3 3 3 3 D 8068 5 Operation error step number latched 3 3 6 3 6 M8068 3 3 3 3 3 D 8069 5 Error step number of M8065 to M8067 3 3 7 3 7 M8065 to M8067 3 3 3 3 3 3 10 to 337 in FX3U FX3UC FX2N and FX2NC PLCs and 10 to 177 in FX3G PLCs 4 The operation varies according to PLC Cleared in an FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC or FX2NC when PLC switch...

Page 897: ... D 8074 These devices are occupied by the PLC system when the sampling trace function is used in a connected personal computer 1 3 3 M8075 to M8079 3 3 D 8075 3 3 3 3 D 8076 3 3 3 3 D 8077 3 3 3 3 D 8078 3 3 3 3 D 8079 3 3 3 3 D 8080 3 3 3 3 D 8081 3 3 3 3 D 8082 3 3 3 3 D 8083 3 3 3 3 D 8084 3 3 3 3 D 8085 3 3 3 3 D 8086 3 3 3 3 D 8087 3 3 3 3 D 8088 3 3 3 3 D 8089 3 3 3 3 D 8090 3 3 3 3 D 8091 3...

Page 898: ...it 3 2 M8078 M8082 D 8087 1 Upper D 8088 1 Lower X003 Ring counter value for falling edge 1 6 µs unit 3 2 D 8089 1 Upper D 8090 1 Lower X003 Pulse width Pulse period 10 µs unit 3 2 D 8091 1 Upper D 8092 1 Lower X004 Ring counter value for rising edge 1 6 µs unit 3 2 M8079 M8083 D 8093 1 Upper D 8094 1 Lower X004 Ring counter value for falling edge 1 6 µs unit 3 2 D 8095 1 Upper D 8096 1 Lower X004...

Page 899: ... Expansion Board Dedicated to FX1S and FX1N D 8112 FX1N 2AD BD Digital value of ch1 M8112 3 3 D 8113 FX1N 2AD BD Digital value of ch2 M8113 3 3 D 8114 FX1N 1DA BD Digital value to be output M8114 3 3 D 8115 to D 8119 Not used RS FNC 80 and Computer Link ch1 Refer to Data Communication Edition for details D 8120 3 RS FNC 80 instruction and computer link ch1 Communication format setting 3 3 3 3 3 3 ...

Page 900: ...able counter 3 3 M8138 D 8139 HSCS FNC 53 HSCR FNC 54 HSZ FNC 55 and HSCT FNC280 instructions Number of instructions being executed 3 3 M8139 D 8140 Lower Accumulated number of pulses output to Y000 for PLSY FNC 57 and PLSR FNC 59 instructions or current address of Y000 for positioning instruction 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D 8141 Upper D 8142 Lower Accumulated number of pulses output to Y001 for PLSY FNC 57...

Page 901: ...VBWR FNC274 instruction ch1 Default 1 3 3 M8154 Response waiting time of EXTR FNC180 instruction 3 2 3 2 D 8155 Response wait time of inverter communication ch2 3 3 3 3 D 8155 Step number during communication of EXTR FNC180 instruction M8155 3 2 3 2 D 8156 Step number of instruction during inverter communication ch2 Default 1 3 3 3 3 M8156 Error code for EXTR FNC180 instruction M8156 3 2 3 2 D 815...

Page 902: ...0 Not used D 8171 D 8172 D 8173 Station number 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 3 3 D 8174 Total number of slave stations 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 3 3 D 8175 Refresh range 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 3 3 D 8176 Station number setting 3 3 3 M8038 3 3 3 5 3 3 D 8177 Total slave station number setting 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 3 3 D 8178 Refresh range setting 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 3 3 D 8179 Retry count setting 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 3 3 D 8180 Comms time out setting 3 3 ...

Page 903: ...8203 1 Number of communication error at master station 3 3 3 M8183 to M8191 D203 3 3 2 3 3 D 8204 1 Number of communication error at slave station No 1 3 3 3 D204 3 3 2 3 3 D 8205 1 Number of communication error at slave station No 2 3 3 3 D205 3 3 2 3 3 D 8206 1 Number of communication error at slave station No 3 3 3 3 D206 3 3 2 3 3 D 8207 1 Number of communication error at slave station No 4 3 ...

Page 904: ...f connected analog special adapter from the main unit 2 Available in Ver 1 20 or later 3 Expansion board connected to the BD connector of a 14 point or 24 point type main unit or the BD1 connector of a 40 point or 60 point type main unit 4 Expansion board connected to the BD2 connector of a 40 point or 60 point type main unit 5 Only a 40 point or 60 point type FX3G PLC can be connected 6 Available...

Page 905: ...rcuit Operation or Unconnected I O Designation Error Step Number Refer to Chapter 38 for details D 8312 Lower Operation error step number latched 32 bit 3 3 M8068 D 8313 Upper D 8314 1 Lower Error step number of M8065 to M8067 32 bit 3 3 M8065 to M8067 D 8315 1 Upper D 8316 Lower Step number of instruction specifying an unconnected I O number directly or indirectly using index register 3 3 M8316 D...

Page 906: ... D 8339 Not used D 8340 Lower Y000 Current value register Default 0 3 3 3 D 8341 Upper 3 3 3 D 8342 Y000 Bias speed Default 0 3 3 3 D 8343 Lower Y000 Maximum speed Default 100000 3 3 3 D 8344 Upper 3 3 3 D 8345 Y000 Creep speed Default 1000 3 3 3 D 8346 Lower Y000 Zero return speed Default 50000 3 3 3 D 8347 Upper 3 3 3 D 8348 Y000 Acceleration time Default 100 3 3 3 D 8349 Y000 Deceleration time ...

Page 907: ...speed Default 100000 3 2 D 8374 Upper D 8375 Y003 Creep speed Default 1000 3 2 D 8376 Lower Y003 Zero return speed Default 50000 3 2 D 8377 Upper D 8378 Y003 Acceleration time Default 100 3 2 D 8379 Y003 Deceleration time Default 100 3 2 D 8380 to D 8392 Not used RS2 FNC 87 ch0 FX3G PLCs Refer to Data Communication Edition for details D 8370 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 Communication format setting 3 D 8371 Not...

Page 908: ...87 ch1 Communication format setting 3 3 3 D 8401 Not used D 8402 1 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Remaining points of transmit data 3 3 3 M8402 D 8403 1 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Monitoring receive data points 3 3 3 M8403 D 8404 Not used D 8405 Communication parameter display ch1 3 3 3 D 8406 Not used D 8407 D 8408 D 8409 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Time out time setting 3 3 3 D 8410 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Header 1 and 2 Default STX 3 3 3 D 841...

Page 909: ...ter link ch2 Time out time setting 3 3 3 D 8430 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Header 1 and 2 Default STX 3 3 3 D 8431 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Header 3 and 4 3 3 3 D 8432 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Terminator 1 and 2 Default ETX 3 3 3 D 8433 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Terminator 3 and 4 3 3 3 D 8434 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Receive sum received data 3 3 3 D 8435 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Receive sum calculated result 3 3 3 D 8436 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Send sum 3 3 3 D 8437...

Page 910: ... for serial communication error 2 ch2 3 3 3 M8438 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 and Computer Link ch2 Refer to Data Communication Edition for details D 8439 Operation mode display ch2 3 3 3 Error Detection Refer to Chapter 38 for details D 8440 to D 8448 Not used D 8449 Special block error code 3 3 3 4 M8449 D 8450 to D 8459 Not used 4 Available in Ver 2 20 or later Positioning FX3G FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Refer to ...

Page 911: ...ays OFF while the PLC is in the RUN mode 2 Flag operation timing 2 Initial pulse M8002 and M8003 The initial pulse M8002 M8003 is turned to ON or OFF respectively during the 1st scan of the PLC program It can be utilized as an initial setting signal in a program for initializing the program for writing a specified value or for another purpose 1 Example program M8003 turns OFF momentarily for only ...

Page 912: ...r a watchdog timer error to occur 2 When executing many FROM TO instructions at the same time When many FROM TO instructions are executed or when many buffer memories are transferred it extends the scan time and a watchdog timer error may occur 3 When using many high speed counters software counters When many high speed counters are programmed and high frequency is counted at the same time it exte...

Page 913: ...wer failure time in FX3U PLCs AC power supply type 2 FX3U FX3UC PLC DC power supply type The allowable momentary power failure time in the FX3U FX3UC PLCs DC power supply type is 5 ms Do not overwrite the power failure detection time in device D8008 37 2 5 Scan time monitor D8010 to D8012 The present value minimum value and maximum value of the PLC scan time operation time are stored in D8010 D801...

Page 914: ...te When the second data is from 0 to 29 it is set to 0 When the second data is from 30 to 59 it is set to 0 and the minute data is incriminated by 1 M8018 Installation detection This device is always ON M8019 Real time clock RTC error When the data stored in special data registers is outside the allowable time setting range this device turns ON Number Name Set value range Operation and function D8...

Page 915: ... operating in the two digit year mode When the above instruction is executed during RUN and K2000 fixed value is transferred to D8018 year data D8018 switches to the four digit year mode 2 Execute this program every time the PLC enters RUN Only the year data display switches to four digit mode when K2000 is transferred The actual time date is not affected 3 In the four digit year mode the values 8...

Page 916: ...hange the flickering value by pressing the or key and press the OK key to set the value The items are set in the order year month day hour minute second When the last second value is decided by pressing the OK key the message Current time is set appears and setting of the present time is completed 5 Press the OK or ESC key to return to selection screen 6 Press the ESC key to return to the MENU scr...

Page 917: ... function in the device monitor of the programming tool input the date and time several minutes ahead to each data register 3 Finishing the time change When the actual time reaches the input data reset M8015 by forced ON OFF Point a While M8015 is OFF the registers for date and time cannot be changed Make sure to set M8015 to ON and then input date and time b When inputting the time set the time s...

Page 918: ...etting the input filter to 5 µs or when receiving pulses whose response frequency is 50 k to 100 kHz using high speed counters perform the following actions Input wiring length should be 5 m 16 4 or less Connect a bleeder resistor 1 5 kΩ 1 2 W to the input terminal The load current of the open collector transistor output in the device on the other end should be 20 mA or more including the input cu...

Page 919: ...ister R 2 Applicable programming tool Some programming tool versions do not support batteryless mode In such versions input a sequence program to enable the batteryless operation as explained below 2 Conditions for batteryless operation 1 An FLROM optional memory cassette for program memory is installed so that programs are not erased only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs 2 The latch battery backed devices such...

Page 920: ...he above special data registers before operation Thus it is recommended to set the communication conditions via the parameter settings 37 2 11 Built in analog volume D8030 and D8031 Values of variable analog potentiometers built in FX3G PLCs as standard are stored as numeric data in the range from 0 to 255 in the following special registers in accordance with the scale position An obtained numeric...

Page 921: ...quipment are kept driven and then the PLC can be started again after program changes 37 2 14 All outputs disable M8034 When M8034 is turned ON the output memory is cleared As a result all actual output relay contacts are turned OFF and the PLC is operated in the image memory 1 Program example Device number Cleared devices M8031 1 non latch memory all clear Contact image of output relay Y general t...

Page 922: ... 2 Setting method 1 Turn the built in RUN STOP switch to STOP 2 Set up the RUN input switch X X000 is specified in the circuit diagram example above Make the external RUN STOP input valid by specifying an input between X000 and X017 1 for the RUN input signal 1 X000 to X007 in the FX3U 16M FX3UC 16M and 14 point type FX3G PLCs and X000 to X014 in 24 point type FX3G PLCs a Display the parameter set...

Page 923: ...to ON in the forced ON OFF procedure the PLC begins RUN mode When M8037 forced STOP signal is set to ON the PLC changes to STOP mode 3 Even when the built in RUN STOP switch is on the RUN side of the PLC The remote STOP command via the programming tool or M8037 forced STOP signal are valid 37 2 16 Constant scan mode M8039 and D8039 When the special auxiliary relay M8039 is set to ON and a setting ...

Page 924: ... or 60 point type FX3G PLC can be connected Number Operation and function FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD Applicable version Ver 1 10 or later Ver 1 10 or later 1st analog expansion board M 8260 Input mode switching Ch1 Output mode switching M 8261 Input mode switching Ch2 Not used M 8262 Not used Not used M 8263 Not used Not used M 8264 Not used Output hold mode cancel M 8265 Not used Not used M 8266 Not...

Page 925: ...1DA BD Applicable version Ver 1 10 or later Ver 1 10 or later 1st analog expansion board D 8260 Input data Ch1 Output data D 8261 Input data Ch2 Not used D 8262 Not used Not used D 8263 Not used Not used D 8264 Number of averaging times for Ch1 1 to 4095 Not used D 8265 Number of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 Not used D 8266 Not used Not used D 8267 Not used Not used D 8268 Error status Error ...

Page 926: ...hing Ch3 Output mode switching Ch3 Output mode switching M 8273 Input mode switching Ch4 Output mode switching Ch4 Not used M 8274 Not used Output hold mode cancel Ch1 Not used M 8275 Not used Output hold mode cancel Ch2 Not used M 8276 Not used Output hold mode cancel Ch3 Output hold mode cancel M 8277 Not used Output hold mode cancel Ch4 Sets whether or not input channel 1 is used M 8278 Not use...

Page 927: ...nalog special adapter M 8270 Temperature unit selection Temperature unit selection Temperature unit selection M 8271 Not used Type K J switching Input sensor selection M 8272 Not used Not used Not used M 8273 Not used Not used Not used M 8274 Not used Not used Not used M 8275 Not used Not used Not used M 8276 Not used Not used Not used M 8277 Not used Not used Not used M 8278 Not used Not used Not...

Page 928: ...Ch2 Not used M 8286 Not used Output hold mode cancel Ch3 Output hold mode cancel M 8287 Not used Output hold mode cancel Ch4 Sets whether or not input channel 1 is used M 8288 Not used Not used Sets whether or not input channel 2 is used M 8289 Not used Not used Sets whether or not output channel is used 2nd analog special adapter 1 M 8290 Input mode switching Ch1 Output mode switching Ch1 Input m...

Page 929: ...analog special adapter M 8280 Temperature unit selection Temperature unit selection Temperature unit selection M 8281 Not used Type K J switching Input sensor selection M 8282 Not used Not used Not used M 8283 Not used Not used Not used M 8284 Not used Not used Not used M 8285 Not used Not used Not used M 8286 Not used Not used Not used M 8287 Not used Not used Not used M 8288 Not used Not used No...

Page 930: ...er of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 Not used Number of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 D 8276 Number of averaging times for Ch3 1 to 4095 Not used Not used D 8277 Number of averaging times for Ch4 1 to 4095 Not used Not used D 8278 Error status Error status Error status D 8279 Model code K1 Model code K2 Model code K50 3rd analog special adapter D 8280 Input data Ch1 Output data Ch1 Input da...

Page 931: ...umber of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 D 8276 Number of averaging times for Ch3 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch3 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch3 1 to 4095 D 8277 Number of averaging times for Ch4 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch4 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch4 1 to 4095 D 8278 Error status Error status Er...

Page 932: ... for Ch2 1 to 4095 Not used Number of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 D 8286 Number of averaging times for Ch3 1 to 4095 Not used Not used D 8287 Number of averaging times for Ch4 1 to 4095 Not used Not used D 8288 Error status Error status Error status D 8289 Model code K1 Model code K2 Model code K50 2nd analog special adapter 1 D 8290 Input data Ch1 Output data Ch1 Input data Ch1 D 8291 Input...

Page 933: ... Number of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 D 8286 Number of averaging times for Ch3 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch3 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch3 1 to 4095 D 8287 Number of averaging times for Ch4 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch4 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch4 1 to 4095 D 8288 Error status Error status ...

Page 934: ...er terminal The power supply is normal Flickering One of the following has occurred The voltage or current is incorrectly supplied to the power terminal The wiring is incorrect There is fault inside the PLC Check the power supply voltage Disconnect cables except the power cable turn the PLC power ON again and check whether the status is changed If the status is not improved consult a Mitsubishi El...

Page 935: ...or unlit FX3G This LED is valid when the optional battery is installed and the battery mode is selected using a parameter LED status PLC status Action Lit Sequence program is executing The PLC operation status is indicated This LED is not lit depending on the ERROR ERR LED status Refer to Subsection 38 1 4 Unlit Sequence program is stopped LED status PLC status Action Lit The battery voltage is lo...

Page 936: ...e Adding WDT instruction Use two or more WDT instructions in a program so that the watchdog timer is reset several times in one scan time Change the set value of the watchdog timer Change the set value D8000 of the watchdog timer in a program so that it is larger than the maximum value D8012 of the scan time 2 Remove the PLC and connect another power supply to the PLC If the ERROR ERR LED is off t...

Page 937: ...ation error RD station number setting error Securely connect the built in master to remote I O units and remote device stations on the network Make sure that the connected remote I O units and remote device stations are consistent with the detailed information on remote stations Flickering All stations are abnormal Securely connect the built in master to remote I O units and remote device stations...

Page 938: ...l the operation and return to menu screen Operation key Contents of operation ESC Return to TOP screen Moves the cursor up Moves the cursor at high speed when pressed for 1 second or more When the cursor is located at the top key operation is invalid Moves the cursor down Moves the cursor at high speed when pressed for 1 second or more When the cursor is located at the bottom key operation is inva...

Page 939: ...ming 36 Interrupt Function 37 Special Device 38 Error Code A Version Up Information B Execution Times 38 2 2 Error code check method by GX Developer 1 Connect a personal computer to PLC 2 Execute PLC diagnostics Click Diagnostics PLC diagnostics on the tool menu and execute the PLC diagnostics 3 Check the diagnostics result The error check result displays in the following windows The LED status of...

Page 940: ...wer supply module or the powered extension unit with DC 24V output failure to D8009 3 If the unit or block corresponding to a programmed I O number is not actually loaded M8060 is set to ON and the first device number of the erroneous block is written to D8060 1 10 to 337 in FX3U FX3UC PLCs and 10 to 177 in FX3G PLCs 4 When a device number is specified directly or indirectly with an index by the L...

Page 941: ...eck Check When program is changed STOP When program is transferred STOP M8065 Syntax error Flickering STOP M8066 Circuit error Flickering STOP M8067 Operation error Unlit RUN RUN mode M8068 Operation error latch Unlit RUN M8109 I O refresh error Unlit RUN Always M8316 Unconnected I O designation error Unlit RUN RUN mode M8318 BFM initialization failure Unlit RUN Check M8449 Special block error Unl...

Page 942: ... Remote maintenance Ensure modem power is ON and check the settings of the AT commands Wiring Check the communication cables for correct wiring 3802 Communication character error 3803 Communication data sum check error 3804 Communication data format error 3805 Command error 3806 Communication time out detected 3807 Modem initialization error 3808 N N network parameter error 3812 Parallel link char...

Page 943: ... Data format error 6205 Command error Serial communication error 1 M8063 D8063 0000 No error 6301 Continues operation Parity overrun or framing error Inverter communication computer link and programming Ensure the communication parameters are correctly set according to their applications N N network parallel link etc Check programs according to applications Remote maintenance Ensure modem power is...

Page 944: ...ntax error is detected modify the instruction correctly 6502 No OUT T or OUT C before setting value 6503 No setting value after OUT T or OUT C Insufficient number of operands for an applied instruction 6504 Same label number is used more than once Same interrupt input or high speed counter input is used more than once 6505 Device number is out of allowable range 6506 Invalid instruction 6507 Inval...

Page 945: ... times or more 6614 No MPS instruction 6615 No MPP instruction 6616 No coil between MPS MRD and MPP or incorrect combination 6617 Instruction below is not connected to bus line STL RET MCR P I DI EI FOR NEXT SRET IRET FEND or END 6618 STL MC or MCR can be used only in main program but it is used elsewhere e g in interrupt routine or subroutine 6619 Invalid instruction is used in FOR NEXT loop STL ...

Page 946: ...r This error occurs in the execution of operation Review the program or check the contents of the operands used in the applied instructions Verify that the specified buffer memories exist in the equipment Verify that the extension cables are correctly connected 6709 Other e g improper branching This error occurs in the execution of operation Review the program or check the contents of the operands...

Page 947: ...operation is started The deviation at start of auto tuning is 150 or less The deviation at end of auto tuning is 1 3 or more of the deviation at start of auto tuning Check the measured value and target value and then execute auto tuning again 6751 Step response method Auto tuning operation direction mismatch Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not started The operation direction esti...

Page 948: ...7 6760 ABS data read from servo sum check error Check servo wiring and parameter setting Also check the ABS instruction 6762 Port specified by inverter communication instruction is already used in another communication Check to make sure the port is not specified by another instruction 6763 1 Input X specified by DSZR DVIT or ZRN instruction is already used in another instruction 2 The interrupt s...

Page 949: ...ut in Special block error M8449 D8449 020 1 Continues operation General data sum error Check for the correct connection of extension cables 021 1 General data message error 080 1 FROM TO error This error occurs in the execution of operation Review the program or check the contents of the operands used in the applied instructions Check whether the specified buffer memories exist in the counterpart ...

Page 950: ...Model name Media model name is shown below Applicable GX Developer version Remarks Ver 2 20 or later GX Developer SW D5C F GPPW J SW D5C F GPPW E Ver 8 23Z or later Supports FX3U PLCs Ver 2 20 or later Model selection FX3U C 1 Ver 2 30 or later Ver 8 29F or later Supports FX3U PLCs Ver 2 30 or later Model selection FX3U C Ver 2 61 or later Ver 8 82L or later Supports FX3U PLCs Ver 2 61 or later Mo...

Page 951: ...toring of devices can be executed at high speed 115 2 kbps in the FX3U and FX3UC PLCs FX 30P can be executed at high speed 115 2kbps in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Standard built in port or expansion board FX3U 422 BD for RS 422 When the RS 232C RS 422 converter FX 232AWC H or USB RS 422 converter FX USB AW is connected Expansion board FX3U 232 BD for RS 232C Special adapter FX3U 232ADP MB for RS 232C Expansi...

Page 952: ...0 or later Ver 8 18U or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3UC PLCs Ver 1 30 or later Ver 8 23Z or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 20 or later Ver 8 29F or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 30 or later Ver 8 82L o...

Page 953: ... changed in edited circuits Circuit blocks in which 1 ms timers T246 to T249 and T256 to T511 are added in edited circuits Circuit blocks in which the following instructions are included in edited circuits Instruction to output high speed counters C235 to C255 OUT instruction SORT2 FNC149 TBL FNC152 RBFM FNC278 and or WBFM FNC279 instruction Circuit blooks which require attention on operation afte...

Page 954: ...such as MOVP 1 The PLS instruction is not executed When writing to a circuit block during RUN which includes the following instructions the following results Pulse instruction during rising edge of operation results MEP instruction After writing to the circuit with MEP instructions during RUN the MEP instruction result turns ON conductive while the operation results leading up to the MEP instructi...

Page 955: ...reading writing etc in the FX3G PLC using the built in USB programming port and GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later For GX Developer prior to Ver 8 72A communication using the built in USB programming port is not available 1 Installation of USB driver GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later It is necessary to install the USB driver to execute USB communication using the built in USB programming port For the U...

Page 956: ...k Serial in PC side I F to open PC side I F Serial setting dialog box 3 Select USB GOT Transparent mode 4 Click OK button to finish the setting GX Developer Ver 8 21X or former GX Developer Ver8 22Y or later When using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series Not supported not available Setting shown below is required When using transparent function by way of RS 232 in GOT1000 Series S...

Page 957: ...3P or later supports the FX3UC Series 2 GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later supports the FX3G Series Setting in GX Developer Ver 8 13P or later Ver 8 72A or later in FX3G PLC 1 Select Online Transfer setup to open Transfer Setup dialog box 2 Double click PLC module in PLC side I F to open PLC side I F Detailed setting of PLC module dialog box 3 Put a check mark in the check box via GOT F900 transparen...

Page 958: ...tion for MELSEC FX is not available When using the list editor function for MELSEC FX upgrade the standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS to the version compatible with the FX3G PLC Check the applicability of other items in the GOT manual F940WGOT Not applicable The following restriction applies when connected Contents of restrictions Programming is enabled only in the function rang...

Page 959: ...ction applies when connected Contents of restrictions Programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in the FX2N and FX2NC PLCs For applicable models refer to the GOT manual For connection using the 2 port interface function 1 refer to Appendix A 1 4 F940GOT F940 Handy GOT Not applicable F930GOT K Not applicable F920GOT K Not appli...

Page 960: ...n of the product can be checked from the manufacturer s serial number LOT on the front at the bottom of the product The LOT indication is adopted in products manufactured at the following time Main unit LOT indication adoption time FX3U Series PLC January 2009 and later FX3UC Series PLC January 2009 and later FX3G Series PLC October 2008 and later Right side 9 3 0 0 0 Control number Year Example 2...

Page 961: ...following instructions FLT FNC49 VRRD FNC85 VRSC FNC86 ECMP FNC110 EMOV FNC112 EADD FNC120 ESUB FNC121 EMUL FNC122 EDIV FNC123 ESQR FNC127 INT FNC129 IVCK FNC270 IVDR FNC271 IVRD FNC272 IVWR FNC273 Supports connection of FX3G 8AV BD FX3G 2AD BD and FX3G 1DA BD Supports connection of display module FX3G 5DM Supportsthe floating point operation function Supports the inverter communication function S...

Page 962: ...P FNC199 STR FNC200 VAL FNC201 INSTR FNC208 FDEL FNC210 FINS FNC211 DABIN FNC260 BINDA FNC261 RBFM FNC278 WBFM FNC279 Adds function of following 5 instructions SPD FNC 56 DSZR FNC150 DVIT FNC151 ZRN FNC156 PLSV FNC157 HCMOV FNC189 Supports connection of FREQROL F700 A700 inverters supporting following 5 instructions IVCK FNC270 IVDR FNC271 IVRD FNC272 IVWR FNC273 and IVBWR FNC274 Adds second entry...

Page 963: ...tion Execution time in ON status µs Execution time in OFF status µs Remarks 16 bit instruction 32 bit instruction 16 bit instruction 32 bit instruction Contact instructions LD 0 065 0 129 µs in 2 step instruction 1 0 193 µs in 3 step instruction 3 LDI 0 065 0 129 µs in 2 step instruction 1 0 193 µs in 3 step instruction 3 LDP 7 8 LDF 7 8 AND 0 065 0 129 µs in 2 step instruction 1 0 193 µs in 3 ste...

Page 964: ...tus SET Y M 0 065 0 129 µs in 2 step instruction 2 0 193 µs in 3 step instruction 3 SET S 4 7 or 6 6 0 9n 0 13 n Number of recombination 4 7 µs when there is no recombination RST Y M 0 065 0 129 µs in 2 step instruction 2 0 193 µs in 3 step instruction 3 RST S 4 6 0 13 RST T 0 45 0 45 RST C 0 45 5 8 0 45 4 8 RST D 5 4 0 195 PLS Y M 0 257 0 321 µs in M3584 to M7679 PLF Y M 0 257 0 321 µs in M3584 t...

Page 965: ...2 3 step instruction 2 44 µs in execution in ON status 3 2 4 µs in execution in OFF status 3 AND 0 2 1 16 µs in 2 step instruction 1 1 2 µs in 3 step instruction 3 ANI 0 2 1 16 µs in 2 step instruction 1 1 2 µs in 3 step instruction 3 ANP 2 36 2 32 3 step instruction 2 48 µs in execution in ON status 3 2 44 µs in execution in OFF status 3 ANF 2 4 2 36 3 step instruction 2 48 µs in execution in ON ...

Page 966: ...tus SET Y M 0 23 0 72 µs in 2 step instruction 2 0 72 µs in 3 step instruction 3 SET S 1 23 or 1 33 0 51n 0 59 n Number of recombination 1 23 µs when there is no recombination RST Y M 0 23 0 72 µs in 2 step instruction 2 0 72 µs in 3 step instruction 3 RST S 1 17 0 59 RST T 1 68 1 21 RST C 1 68 1 82 1 18 1 19 RST D 1 08 0 54 PLS Y M 1 52 1 56 µs in M3584 to M7679 PLF Y M 1 52 1 56 µs in M3584 to M...

Page 967: ...3 step instruction 2 84 µs in execution in ON status 3 2 8 µs in execution in OFF status 3 AND 0 41 1 48 µs in 2 step instruction 1 1 52 µs in 3 step instruction 3 ANI 0 41 1 48 µs in 2 step instruction 1 1 52 µs in 3 step instruction 3 ANP 2 72 2 68 3 step instruction 2 8 µs in execution in ON status 3 2 76 µs in execution in OFF status 3 ANF 2 76 2 72 3 step instruction 2 8 µs in execution in ON...

Page 968: ...atus SET Y M 0 44 0 88 µs in 2 step instruction 2 0 88 µs in 3 step instruction 3 SET S 1 62 or 1 66 0 55n 0 78 n Number of recombination n 1 62 when there is no recombination RST Y M 0 44 0 88 µs in 2 step instruction 2 0 88 µs in 3 step instruction 3 RST S 1 55 0 78 RST T 2 08 1 6 RST C 2 08 2 31 1 19 1 58 RST D 1 66 0 74 PLS Y M 1 88 1 88 µs in M3584 to M7679 PLF Y M 1 88 1 88 µs in M3584 to M7...

Page 969: ...ination RET 2 9 Instruc tion Standard mode Extension mode Remarks Execution time in ON status µs Execution time in OFF status µs Execution time in ON status µs Execution time in OFF status µs 16 bit instruc tion 32 bit instruc tion 16 bit instruc tion 32 bit instruc tion 16 bit instruc tion 32 bit instruc tion 16 bit instruc tion 32 bit instruc tion STL 1 8 0 49n 2 18 0 49n n Number of recombinati...

Page 970: ...ve and compare 10 CMP 15 5 16 0 0 455 0 845 11 ZCP 18 9 19 7 0 585 1 105 12 MOV 0 64 1 48 0 32 1 48 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 13 SMOV 22 9 0 715 14 CML 10 6 10 2 0 325 0 585 15 BMOV 13 9 0 44n 0 455 16 FMOV 14 2 0 19n 14 0 0 38n 0 455 0 845 17 XCH 10 7 11 4 0 325 0 585 18 BCD 7 94 12 49 0 325 0 585 19 BIN 4 38 5 32 0 325 0 585 Arithmetic and logical operation 20 ADD 4 77 5 72 0 455 0 845...

Page 971: ...EAN 11 8 0 41n 17 8 2 13n 0 455 0 845 46 ANS 20 4 19 7 47 ANR 7 0 0 065 48 SQR 9 7 12 1 0 325 0 585 49 FLT 9 8 9 5 0 325 0 585 High speed processing 50 REF 4 5 1 39n 0 325 51 REFF 14 4 0 24n 0 195 52 MTR 5 9 5 5 53 HSCS 20 0 0 845 54 HSCR 20 0 0 845 55 HSZ 22 0 1 105 56 SPD 16 0 16 0 12 6 12 6 57 PLSY 20 0 13 6 6 9 6 9 58 PWM 10 6 6 2 59 PLSR 11 2 11 2 7 0 7 0 Handy instructions 60 IST 28 5 0 455 ...

Page 972: ...on is executed to BFM 32 or later in a special function block unit for the FX0N FX2N FX2NC Series or in the CC Link LT built in the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 3 When the instruction is executed to a BFM in a special function block unit for the FX3U FX3UC Series External FX device 80 RS 15 6 5 7 81 PRUN 17 1 1 67n 18 2 2 9n 0 325 0 585 82 ASCI 13 5 1 45n 0 455 83 HEX 13 6 1 89n 0 455 84 CCD 13 6 1 63n 0 455 8...

Page 973: ...40 WSUM 11 7 0 38n 14 1 1 94n 0 455 0 845 141 WTOB 12 6 1 43n 0 455 142 BTOW 12 6 0 92n 0 455 143 UNI 11 6 0 4n 0 455 144 DIS 10 6 0 2n 0 455 145 146 147 SWAP 7 7 8 0 0 195 0 325 148 149 SORT2 13 2 15 2 6 5 7 7 Positioning control 150 DSZR 170 0 7 0 151 DVIT 178 0 178 0 7 1 7 1 152 TBL 1 7 1 153 154 155 ABS 25 4 22 2 156 ZRN 58 0 62 0 7 1 7 1 157 PLSV 144 0 144 0 7 1 7 1 158 DRVI 178 0 178 0 7 1 7...

Page 974: ... 195 185 186 DUTY 6 0 6 0 187 188 CRC 12 6 0 82n 0 455 189 HCMOV 14 8 0 845 Block data operation 190 191 192 BK 13 1 0 66n 13 9 1 23n 0 585 1 105 193 BK 13 1 0 66n 13 9 1 23n 0 585 1 105 194 BKCMP 19 6 1 88n 20 3 2 26n 0 585 1 105 195 BKCMP 19 6 1 88n 20 3 2 26n 0 585 1 105 196 BKCMP 19 6 1 88n 20 3 2 26n 0 585 1 105 197 BKCMP 19 6 1 88n 20 3 2 26n 0 585 1 105 198 BKCMP 19 6 1 88n 20 3 2 26n 0 585...

Page 975: ... of data shifted forward 2 211 FINS 63 0 98m m Number of data shifted backward 3 212 POP 7 8 0 455 213 SFR 9 3 0 325 214 SFL 9 3 0 325 215 216 217 218 219 2 m Number of data tables Table position of deleted data Number of data tables Present value of table position of deleted data n 3 m Number of data tables Table position of data insertion Number of data tables Present value of table position dat...

Page 976: ...Appendix B 6 2 242 OR 1 22 1 48 1 22 1 48 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 243 244 OR 1 22 1 48 1 22 1 48 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 245 OR 1 22 1 48 1 22 1 48 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 246 OR 1 22 1 48 1 22 1 48 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 247 248 249 Data table processing 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 LIMIT 8 1 8 6 0 585 1 105 257 BAND 8 1 8 6 0 585 1 105 258 ZONE 7 9...

Page 977: ...BFM 2 292 116n 0 715 1 When the instruction is executed to a BFM in a special function block unit for the FX0N FX2N FX2NC Series or in the CC Link LT built in the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 2 When the instruction is executed to a BFM in a special function block unit for the FX3U FX3UC Series High speed processing 2 280 HSCT 30 0 1 365 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 Extension file register control 290 LO...

Page 978: ...5 0 61 0 61 14 62 16 02 0 8 0 8 12 MOV 0 52 0 61 0 38 0 41 1 29 1 56 0 61 0 65 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 13 SMOV 16 19 0 61 18 68 0 8 14 CML 6 68 7 15 0 61 0 61 8 03 8 5 0 8 0 8 15 BMOV 15 08 5 58n 0 61 17 54 5 58n 0 8 16 FMOV 10 20 0 77n 10 87 0 79n 0 61 0 61 11 90 0 77n 12 94 0 79n 0 8 0 8 18 BCD 2 93 4 6 0 41 0 43 3 9 5 8 0 61 0 65 19 BIN 2 93 4 61 0 41 0 43 4 01 5 82 0 61 0 65 Arithm...

Page 979: ... 33 9 89 15 21 12 37 External FX I O device 72 DSW 24 74 18 27 08 20 3 74 SEGL 17 76 6 27 19 34 6 41 78 FROM 1 115 6 454 4n 119 14 904 86n 0 61 0 61 117 29 454 74n 121 98 905 03n 0 8 0 8 n Number of transfer points FROM 2 114 98 968 02n 119 62 1931 4n 0 61 0 61 117 81 968 19n 123 62 1931 4n 0 8 0 8 n Number of transfer points FROM 3 52 58 131 43n 11 67 242 33n 0 61 0 61 55 58 131 43n 14 67 242 34n...

Page 980: ... 62 13 35 0 8 0 8 171 GBIN 11 46 11 83 0 61 0 61 12 62 13 37 0 8 0 8 176 RD3A 2AD 1939 0 61 1941 0 8 FX2N 2AD 177 WR3A 2DA 3086 0 61 3089 0 8 FX2N 2DA Data comparison 224 LD 1 56 1 8 1 52 1 76 2 28 2 72 2 24 2 68 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 225 LD 1 92 2 36 1 92 2 32 2 68 3 24 2 68 3 24 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 226 LD 1 96 2 4 1 88 2 28 2 72 3 28 2 64 3 2 For details refer to Ap...

Page 981: ...etails refer to Appendix B 6 2 241 OR 1 92 2 32 1 88 2 32 2 64 3 24 2 64 3 24 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 242 OR 1 96 2 36 1 84 2 28 2 68 3 28 2 6 3 2 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 244 OR 1 52 1 72 1 56 1 76 2 24 2 64 2 28 2 68 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 245 OR 1 84 2 2 1 92 2 32 2 56 3 16 2 64 3 24 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 246 OR 1 84 2 2 1 96 2 36 2 56 3 16 2 68...

Page 982: ...ecution time in ON status 6 37 µs Non execution time Execution time in OFF status 0 75 µs SUB instruction FNC 21 Execution time at rising edge of input Execution time in ON status 6 47 µs Non execution time Execution time in OFF status 0 75 µs MUL instruction FNC 22 Execution time at rising edge of input Execution time in ON status 7 07 µs Non execution time Execution time in OFF status 0 75 µs DI...

Page 983: ...ion FNC 21 Execution time at rising edge of input Execution time in ON status 6 78 µs Non execution time Execution time in OFF status 0 81 µs MUL instruction FNC 22 Execution time at rising edge of input Execution time in ON status 7 24 µs Non execution time Execution time in OFF status 0 81 µs DIV instruction FNC 23 Execution time at rising edge of input Execution time in ON status 7 44 µs Non ex...

Page 984: ... with bit specification of word devices in basic instructions Appendix B 6 2 Applied instruction execution time 1 MOV FNC 12 instruction execution time FX3U FX3UC PLCs MOV instruction 16 bit operation 1 These combinations are handled as exceptions because high speed processing is adopted in the technique 2 When the instruction is executed for a BFM in a special extension block unit for FX3U FX3UC ...

Page 985: ... KnM KnS T C D R U G 2 KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G 2 ON KnX KnY KnM KnS 15 5 12 4 13 8 311 1 18 7 17 0 17 1 313 0 T C D 12 4 1 48 1 10 7 307 4 17 0 15 2 15 3 310 5 R 13 8 10 7 12 2 308 9 17 1 15 3 15 4 310 6 U G 2 199 8 195 9 197 4 542 6 201 2 197 3 198 8 544 0 K H 13 0 1 48 1 11 4 308 0 16 2 14 4 14 5 309 7 OFF KnX KnY KnM KnS 0 585 T C D 1 48 1 R U G 2 K H 1 48 1 Command contact S source D destinati...

Page 986: ... U G 2 KnX KnY KnM KnS 16 2 13 0 14 7 133 1 19 4 17 4 17 6 134 7 T C D 13 0 1 22 1 11 3 129 9 17 4 15 4 15 7 132 8 R 14 7 11 3 12 9 131 4 17 6 15 7 16 0 133 1 U G 2 133 0 129 3 131 4 298 2 134 3 131 0 138 9 299 4 K H 13 4 1 22 1 11 7 130 2 16 3 14 2 14 5 131 6 S source D destination Without indexing µs With indexing µs KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G 2 KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G 2 KnX KnY KnM KnS 16 4 13 2 1...

Page 987: ...ic FNC No Function Ref Page MOV FNC 12 Move 259 SMOV FNC 13 Shift Move 262 CML FNC 14 Complement 264 BMOV FNC 15 Block Move 266 FMOV FNC 16 Fill Move 271 PRUN FNC 81 Parallel Run Octal Mode 477 XCH FNC 17 Exchange 274 SWAP FNC147 Byte Swap 566 EMOV FNC112 Floating Point Move 510 HCMOV FNC189 High Speed Counter Move 625 2 Data conversion instructions Mnemonic FNC No Function Ref Page BCD FNC 18 Con...

Page 988: ...2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 EDIV FNC123 Floating Point Division 529 BK FNC192 Block Data Addition 631 BK FNC193 Block Data Subtraction 634 INC FNC 24 Increment 295 DEC FNC 25 Decrement 297 5 Logical operation instructions Mnemonic FNC No Function Ref Page WAND FNC 26 Logical Word AND 298 WOR FNC 27 Logical Word OR 300 WXOR FNC 28 Logical Exclusive OR 302 6 Special funct...

Page 989: ...n 643 VAL FNC201 Character String to BIN Conversion 648 DABIN FNC260 Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion 714 BINDA FNC261 BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion 717 ASCI FNC 82 Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion 479 HEX FNC 83 ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion 482 8 Shift instructions Mnemonic FNC No Function Ref Page MOV FNC209 Character String Transfer 672 FNC202 Link Character Strings 653 LEN FNC203 Character ...

Page 990: ...register control instructions Mnemonic FNC No Function Ref Page LOADR FNC290 Load From ER 754 SAVER FNC291 Save to ER 758 RWER FNC294 Rewrite to ER 777 INITR FNC292 Initialize R and ER 767 INITER FNC295 Initialize ER 783 LOGR FNC293 Logging R and ER 771 18 FX3U CF ADP instructions Mnemonic FNC No Function Ref Page FLCRT FNC300 File create check 787 FLDEL FNC301 File delete CF card format 790 FLWR ...

Page 991: ...cimal 276 BIN FNC 19 Conversion to Binary 279 BINDA FNC261 BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion 717 BK FNC193 Block Data Subtraction 634 BK FNC192 Block Data Addition 631 BKCMP FNC196 Block Data Compare 637 BKCMP FNC198 Block Data Compare 637 BKCMP FNC197 Block Data Compare 637 BKCMP FNC194 Block Data Compare 637 BKCMP FNC195 Block Data Compare 637 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 ...

Page 992: ...787 FLDEL FNC301 File delete CF card format 790 FLRD FNC303 Data read 795 FLSTRD FNC305 FX3U CF ADP status read 799 FLT FNC 49 Conversion to Floating Point 351 FLWR FNC302 Data write 792 FMOV FNC 16 Fill Move 271 FOR FNC 08 Start a FOR NEXT Loop 249 FROM FNC 78 Read From a Special Function Block 467 G GBIN FNC171 Gray Code to Decimal Conversion 608 GRY FNC170 Decimal to Gray Code Conversion 607 Mn...

Page 993: ...2 OR Compare 695 OR FNC244 OR Compare 695 OR FNC240 OR Compare 695 OR FNC241 OR Compare 695 OR FNC245 OR Compare 695 OR FNC246 OR Compare 695 P PID FNC 88 PID Control Loop 495 Mnemonic FNC No Function Ref Page S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 PLSR FNC 59 Acceleration Deceleration Setup 399 PLSV FNC157 Variable Speed Pulse Output 580 PLSY FNC 57 Pulse Y Output...

Page 994: ...action 286 SUM FNC 43 Sum of Active Bits 339 SWAP FNC147 Byte Swap 566 T TADD FNC162 RTC Data Addition 592 TAN FNC132 Floating Point Tangent 543 TBL FNC152 Batch Data Positioning Mode 576 TCMP FNC160 RTC Data Compare 587 TKY FNC 70 Ten Key Input 439 TO FNC 79 Write To a Special Function Block 472 TRD FNC166 Read RTC data 600 TSUB FNC163 RTC Data Subtraction 594 TTMR FNC 64 Teaching Timer 424 TWR F...

Page 995: ...ix D Discontinued models The table below shows discontinued models of MELSEC F Series PLCs and programming tools described in this manual Discontinued model Production stop date Repair acceptance period FX 20DU June 30 2008 Until June 30 2015 FX 232AW September 30 2004 Until September 30 2011 FX 232AWC June 30 2004 Until June 30 2011 FX 25DU E September 30 2002 Until September 30 2009 ...

Page 996: ...i h Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply includin...

Page 997: ...section 2 6 5 Caution on using header and terminator in RS2 instruction is added Section 16 6 Note on setting the clock data from the FX 10DU E 20DU E 25DU E is added Section 21 8 and Subsection 36 2 7 FX3U transistor output compatibility change the illegible from FX3UC to FX3U Section 13 3 Item 13 3 1 Section 13 8 Section 13 9 Section 13 10 Section 15 2 Section 15 3 Section 15 5 Revision A Revisi...

Page 998: ...r 33 15 instructions are added FLT FNC49 VRRD FNC85 VRSC FNC86 ECMP FNC110 EMOV FNC112 EADD FNC120 ESUB FNC121 EMUL FNC122 EDIV FNC123 ESQR FNC127 INT FNC129 IVCK FNC270 IVDR FNC271 IVRD FNC272 IVWR FNC273 Supports connection of FX3G 8AV BD FX3G 2AD BD and FX3G 1DA BD Section 16 6 16 7 and Chapter 36 Supports connection of display module FX3G 5DM Chapter 2 Chapter 36 and Chapter 37 Supports the fl...

Page 999: ......

Page 1000: ... Budapest Phone 36 0 1 431 9726 Fax 36 0 1 431 9727 LATVIA Beijer Electronics SIA Vestienas iela 2 LV 1035 Riga Phone 371 0 784 2280 Fax 371 0 784 2281 LITHUANIA Beijer Electronics UAB Savanoriu Pr 187 LT 02300 Vilnius Phone 370 0 5 232 3101 Fax 370 0 5 232 2980 MALTA ALFATRADE Ltd 99 Paola Hill Malta Paola PLA 1702 Phone 356 0 21 697 816 Fax 356 0 21 697 817 EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES MOLDOVA INTEH...

Search results

Summary of Contents for MELSEC FX3G

Reviews:

Brands by name

Popular brands

Mitsubishi Electric MELSEC FX3G, Programming Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for MELSEC FX3G

Reviews:

Brands by name

Popular brands